PLC Training ManualQ Series Basic Course (For GX Developer) E

Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller Training Manual
Q-series basic course(for GX Developer)

Mitsubishi Programmable
Logic Controller
Training Manual

MODEL SCHOOL-Q-BASIC-WIN-E
MODEL 13JW50
CODE
SH(NA)-080617ENG-A(0601)MEE
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these instructions before using the exercise.)
When designing the system, always read the relevant manuals and give sufficient consideration to safety.
During the exercise, pay full attention to the following points and handle the product correctly.
[EXERCISE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
Do not touch the terminals while the power is on to prevent electric shock.
When opening the safety cover, turn off the power or conduct a sufficient check of safety before
operation.
Caution
Follow the instructor’s direction during the exercise.
Do not remove the module of the demonstration machine or change wirings without permission.
Doing so may cause failures, malfunctions, personal injuries and/or a fire.
Turn off the power before installing or removing the module.

Failure to do so may result in malfunctions of the module or electric shock.
When the demonstration machine (X/Y table, etc.) emits abnormal odor/sound, press "Power switch" or
"Emergency switch" to turn off.
When a problem occurs, notify the instructor as soon as possible.

REVISIONS
* The textbook number is given on the bottom left of this textbook.
Print Date * Textbook number Revision

Jan., 2006 SH-080617ENG-A First edition
This textbook confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may
occur as a result of using the contents noted in this textbook.
© 2006 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 BASICS OF PLC 1- 1 to 1-14
1.1 Program ..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1

1.2 Program Processing Procedure................................................................................................................ 1- 4
1.3 MELSEC-Q Module Configuration ............................................................................................................ 1- 5
1.4 External I/O Signals and I/O Numbers..................................................................................................... 1-10
1.5 System Configuration and I/O Numbers of Demonstration Machine...................................................... 1-13
CHAPTER 2 OPERATING GX DEVELOPER 2- 1 to 2-40
2.1 Basic Knowledge Required for Operating GX Developer......................................................................... 2- 1

2.1.1 GX Developer Screen ........................................................................................................................ 2- 1
2.1.2 Project................................................................................................................................................. 2- 3
2.2 Operation Before Creating Ladder Programs........................................................................................... 2- 5
2.2.1 Starting up the GX Developer ............................................................................................................ 2- 5
2.2.2 Creating a new project........................................................................................................................ 2- 6
2.2.3 Changing the assignment of the function keys .................................................................................. 2- 8
2.3 Preparations for Starting Up CPU............................................................................................................. 2- 9
2.4 Creating a Ladder Program...................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.4.1 Creating a ladder program using the function keys .......................................................................... 2-13
2.4.2 Creating a ladder program using the tool buttons............................................................................. 2-15
2.5 Converting the Program ........................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.6 Writing to the PLC CPU ........................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.7 Monitoring the Condition of the Ladder Program..................................................................................... 2-22
2.8 Editing Ladder Program ........................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.8.1 Making partial correction to the ladder program ............................................................................... 2-25
2.8.2 Drawing/Deleting lines....................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.8.3 Inserting/Deleting rows ...................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.8.4 Cutting/Copying ladder program ....................................................................................................... 2-35
2.9 Saving Ladder Program ........................................................................................................................... 2-38
2.9.1 Saving newly-created or overwritten projects ................................................................................... 2-38
2.9.2 Saving a project under another name............................................................................................... 2-39
2.10 Reading the Saved Project .................................................................................................................... 2-40
CHAPTER 3 PLC DEVICES AND PARAMETERS 3- 1 to 3- 4
3.1 Devices ...................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1

3.2 Parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 3- 3
CHAPTER 4 SEQUENCE & BASIC INSTRUCTIONS -Part 1- 4- 1 to 4-40
4.1 List of Instructions Described in this Chapter ........................................................................................... 4- 1

4.2 Differences between OUT and SET · RST .......................................................................... 4- 4
4.3 Measuring Timer ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 5
4.4 Counting by the Counter............................................................................................................................ 4- 6
4.5 [PLS] Pulse·[PLF] Pulf .............................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.6 MC · MCR ..................................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.7 CJ · SCJ · CALL · RET · FEND ...................................................................................... 4-23
4.7.1 CJ · SCJ ................................................................................................................................. 4-23
4.7.2 CALL (P) Call· RET Return............................................................................................... 4-27
4.7.3 FEND F end .............................................................................................................................. 4-31
4.8 Practice Questions ................................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.8.1 Practice Question (1) ................................................................................................................. 4-34
CHAPTER 5 BASIC INSTRUCTION Part 2 5- 1 to 5-60
5.1 Notation of Numbers (Data) ...................................................................................................................... 5- 1

5.2 Transfer Instruction ................................................................................................................................... 5- 9
5.2.1 MOV (P) 16-bit data transfer...................................................................................................... 5- 9
5.2.2 BIN (P) BCD BIN data conversion instruction........................................................................ 5-16
5.2.3 BCD (P) BIN BCD data conversion instruction ...................................................................... 5-18
5.2.4 Example of specifying digit for bit devices and data transfer............................................................ 5-21
5.2.5 FMOV (P) FMOV (Batch transfer of the same data)
BMOV (P) BMOV (Batch transfer of the block data)................................................................ 5-22
5.3 Comparison Operation Instruction ........................................................................................................... 5-27
5.4 Arithmetic Operations Instruction............................................................................................................. 5-32
5.4.1 (P) · (P) BIN 16 bit data addition/subtraction................................................................ 5-32
5.4.2 * (P) · / (P) BIN 16 bit multiplication/division......................................................................... 5-36
5.4.3 32-bit data instructions and their necessity....................................................................................... 5-42
5.4.4 Calculation examples of multiplication/division that include decimal points
(in the case where an arithmetic operation " " or "/" is used) .......................................................... 5-44
*
5.5 Index Register, File Register .................................................................................................................... 5-45
5.5.1 How to use index register Z............................................................................................................... 5-45
5.5.2 How to use file register R .................................................................................................................. 5-47
5.6 External Setting of the Timer/Counter Set Value, and the External Display of the Current Value ......... 5-51
5.7 Practice Question ..................................................................................................................................... 5-53
5.7.1 Practice Question (1) MOV......................................................................................................... 5-53
5.7.2 Practice Question (2) BIN, BCD conversion............................................................................... 5-54
5.7.3 Practice Question (3) FMOV....................................................................................................... 5-55
5.7.4 Practice Question (4) Comparison instruction............................................................................ 5-56
5.7.5 Practice Question (5) , .......................................................................................................... 5-57
5.7.6 Practice Question (6) , / ............................................................................................................ 5-58
*
5.7.7 Practice Question (7)
*
D , D/....................................................................................................... 5-59
CHAPTER 6 USING OTHER FUNCTIONS 6- 1 to 6-26
6.1 Clock Function........................................................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.2 Test Function at Online ............................................................................................................................. 6- 3
6.2.1 Turning device "Y" ON/OFF forcibly................................................................................................... 6- 4
6.2.2 Setting and resetting device "M" ........................................................................................................ 6- 5
6.2.3 Changing a current value of device "T".............................................................................................. 6- 6
6.2.4 Reading error steps ............................................................................................................................ 6- 7
6.2.5 Remote RUN/STOP ........................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.3 Forced I/O Assignment by Parameter Settings ........................................................................................ 6- 9
6.4 Using Retentive Timers ............................................................................................................................. 6-11
6.5 Batch Replacement of Devices................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.5.1 Batch replacement of device numbers ............................................................................................. 6-13
6.5.2 Batch switching of specified devices between normally open and normally close .......................... 6-14
6.6 Write During RUN..................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.7 Registering Devices.................................................................................................................................. 6-16
6.8 Creating Comments ................................................................................................................................. 6-18
CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 7- 1 to 7-22
7.1 Intelligent Function Module ....................................................................................................................... 7- 1

7.2 Data Communication between Intelligent Function Modules and CPUs ................................................. 7- 2
7.2.1 I/O signals to CPUs ............................................................................................................................ 7- 2
7.2.2 Data communication with intelligent function modules ...................................................................... 7- 3
7.3 Communicating with Intelligent Function Modules ................................................................................... 7- 4
7.3.1 Communication methods with intelligent function modules............................................................... 7- 4
7.3.2 Using GX Configurator for communication ........................................................................................ 7- 5
7.3.3 Data created by GX Configurator....................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.4 Exercise System of Intelligent Function Module ....................................................................................... 7- 7
7.5 Q64AD Analog/Digital Conversion Module............................................................................................... 7- 8
7.5.1 Names of parts ................................................................................................................................... 7- 8
7.5.2 A/D conversion characteristics............................................................................................................... 7- 9
7.5.3 Intelligent function module switch settings........................................................................................ 7-10
7.5.4 Setting with GX Configurator............................................................................................................. 7-12
7.5.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine ........................................................................................ 7-14
7.6 Q62DA Digital/Analog Conversion Module.............................................................................................. 7-15
7.6.1 Names of parts .................................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.6.2 D/A conversion characteristics.......................................................................................................... 7-16
7.6.3 Intelligent function module switch settings........................................................................................ 7-17
7.6.4 Setting with GX Configurator............................................................................................................. 7-19
7.6.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine ........................................................................................ 7-21
CHAPTER 8 USING THE LOGIC TEST FUNCTION (GX SIMULATOR) 8- 1 to 8-16
8.1 Operating Procedure of Logic Test Function (GX Simulator) .................................................................. 8- 2

8.2 Monitoring Device Status and Testing Devices ........................................................................................ 8- 4
8.3 I/O System Settings Function.................................................................................................................... 8- 8
8.3.1 Device value input .............................................................................................................................. 8- 9
8.3.2 Timing chart value input .................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.3.3 Executing the I/O system settings..................................................................................................... 8-15
CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE 9- 1 to 9- 8
9.1 Typical Troubles ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 1

9.2 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 9- 2
9.3 Consumable Products............................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.4 Service Life of Output Relay...................................................................................................................... 9- 4
9.5 Spare Products.......................................................................................................................................... 9- 5
9.6 Using Maintenance Supporters................................................................................................................. 9- 7
APPENDIX App- 1 to App-133
Appendix 1 I/O Control Mode......................................................................................................................App- 1

Appendix 1.1 Direct mode .......................................................................................................................App- 1
Appendix 1.2 Refresh mode....................................................................................................................App- 2
Appendix 1.3 Comparisons between the direct mode and refresh mode ..............................................App- 3
Appendix 2 Instruction Table.......................................................................................................................App- 4
Appendix 2.1 Sequence instructions.......................................................................................................App- 4
Appendix 2.2 Basic instructions ..............................................................................................................App- 8
Appendix 2.3 Application instructions.....................................................................................................App-24
Appendix 2.4 Instructions for data link ...................................................................................................App-45
Appendix 2.5 QCPU instructions............................................................................................................App-48
Appendix 3 Special Relay List....................................................................................................................App-50
Appendix 4 Special Register List................................................................................................................App-64
Appendix 5 Application Program Examples...............................................................................................App-90
Appendix 5. 1 Flip-flop ladder.................................................................................................................App-90
Appendix 5. 2 One shot ladder...............................................................................................................App-92
Appendix 5. 3 Long time timer................................................................................................................App-93
Appendix 5. 4 Off delay timer .................................................................................................................App-94
Appendix 5. 5 On delay timer (momentary input) ..................................................................................App-95
Appendix 5. 6 ON-OFF repeat ladder ....................................................................................................App-96
Appendix 5. 7 Preventing chattering input .............................................................................................App-96
Appendix 5. 8 Ladders with a common line ...........................................................................................App-97
Appendix 5. 9 Time control program......................................................................................................App-98
Appendix 5.10 Clock ladder ...................................................................................................................App-99
Appendix 5.11 Starting stardelta operation of electrical machinery.....................................................App-100
Appendix 5.12 Displaying elapsed time and outputting before time limit ............................................App-101
Appendix 5.13 Retentive timer .............................................................................................................App-102
Appendix 5.14 Switching timer set value externally.............................................................................App-103
Appendix 5.15 Setting counters externally...........................................................................................App-104
Appendix 5.16 Measuring operation time ............................................................................................App-106
Appendix 5.17 Measuring cycle time ...................................................................................................App-106
Appendix 5.18 Application example of (D) CML (P) ............................................................................App-107
Appendix 5.19 Program showing divided value of 4-digit BIN value to 4 places of decimals.............App-108
Appendix 5.20 Carriage line control .....................................................................................................App-111
Appendix 5.21 Starting compressors in order using ring counters......................................................App-113
Appendix 5.22 Application example of positioning control...................................................................App-117
Appendix 5.23 Application example using index Z ..............................................................................App-118
Appendix 5.24 Application example of FIFO instruction......................................................................App-120
Appendix 5.25 Application example of data shift .................................................................................App-122
Appendix 5.26 Example of operation program calculating square root of data ..................................App-125
Appendix 5.27 Example of operation program calculating n-th power of data....................................App-126
Appendix 5.28 Program using digital switch to input data ...................................................................App-127
Appendix 5.29 Displaying number of faults with fault numbers using fault detection program...........App-128
Appendix 6 Keys of GX Developer...........................................................................................................App-132
INTRODUCTION
This textbook describes the PLC, the program editing methods, the sequence instructions
and the application instructions to help you understand the MELSEC-Q series
programming.
The multiple CPU system is available for the MELSEC-Q series with multiple CPU
modules, but this textbook explains the case in which one CPU module is used.
Refer to the following school textbook for the exercises when the multiple CPU system is
used.
: Q Programming School Textbook (Practice) .............................SH-080045-D or later
The related manuals are shown below.
(1) QCPU User's Manual

(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)........................ SH(NA)-080483ENG
Explains the hardware.
(2) QCPU User's Manual
(Function Explanation,Program Fundamentals) .......................... SH(NA)-080484ENG
Explains the functions and programming method.
(3) QCPU(Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual
(Common Instructions).......................................................................... SH(NA)-080039
Explains details of each instruction.
(4) GX Developer Version 8
Operating Manual (Startup).................................................................SH(NA)-080372E
(5) Ladder Logic Test Function software for Windows
SW5D5C-LLT-E Operation Manual...................................................... SH(NA)-080064
(6) GX Developer Version 8
Operating Manual ................................................................................SH(NA)-080373E
Explains the operating method.
In this textbook, the following CPUs are generically named "QCPU (Q

mode)".
Q02CPU Q12HCPU
Q02HCPU Q25HCPU
Q06HCPU
CHAPTER 1 BASICS OF PLC
1.1 Program
Taking PLC as a control ladder, PLC can be described by an input ladder, output
ladder, and internal sequential operation.
PLC
PB1 X6 T1
Y70
X0 Y74 PL
Y71
LS1 X1 Output relay
Y74
Y72
X2
Electro-
Y73
X3 K30 magnetic
PB2 Y74 X6
Y74 valve
X4 T1 MC
Y75 Magnet
X5 Timer
Sensor Y76 contactor
X6
Contacts for
Input relay external
(virtual coil) outputs
COM COM
(+) (-)
Input circuit Internal sequential operation Output circuit

Input module Output module
Turns on/off the Activates the Transmits the on/off Activates the
input relay with internal sequential operations of the external loading.
external signal. operation by the output relay.
contact of the input relay.
Figure 1.1 PLC Configuration
The PLC is an assembly of relays and timers/counters as well as an electronic device

centered around a microprocessor.
As in figure 1.1, internal sequential operation is performed by turning on/off the coil by
connecting the normally open and normally close serially or in parallel.
"Relay", which is also called an electromagnetic relay, is a switch that passes on signals. Also, it is a key component
that makes up a logic ladder.
1) Energizing the coil Excitation Coil off Coil on
• Closes the normally open (all times) (in operation)
(Conducted) Normally
• Opens the normally close open Not conducted Conducted
(Not conducted) Common
Coil
2) De-energizing the coil Normally
Demagnetization close Conducted Not condcuted
A-contact
• Opens the normally open
(Not conducted) B-contact
• Closes the normally close

(Conducted)
1-1
Internal Sequential Operation
The signal flow of figure 1.1 internal sequential operation is described below.
1) When the sensor turns on, the coil of input relay X6 is energized.
2) Energizing the coil of input relay X6 conducts the normally open X6 and energizes
the coil of output relay Y74.
(As the timer is not energized at this moment, the normally close remains
conducted.)
3) Once the coil of output relay Y74 is energized, the external connection Y74 is
conducted allowing the magnet contactor (MC) to be turned on.
4) Turning off the sensor demagnetizes the coil of input relay X6 and ceases the
conduction of normally open X6. As self-maintaining the normally open Y74 is
conducted, the coil remains energized. (Self-maintaining operation)
5) When the coil of output relay Y74 is energized (with the normally open Y74
conducted), turning off the sensor (with normally close X6 conducted) energizes
the coil of the timer T1 so that the timer starts measuring the time.
After a lapse of three seconds (K30 indicates 3.0 seconds), the normally open of
the timer becomes conducted and the normally close is brought non conductive.
6) As a result, the coil of output relay Y74 demagnetizes and the load magnet
contactor drops.
The output relay self- maintenance is also released.
Time Chart
A time chart that explains the input/output relays and timer operations is shown below.
Input X6
Output Y74
Timer T1 (Coil)
Timer T1 (Contact)
3 sec.
1-2
The internal sequential operation can be described as a program of PLC. The program
is saved in the program memory as close to the instruction list described below.
Instruction
Step number I/O number
words
X6 T1
0 Y74 0 LD X6
1 OR Y74
Y74 2 ANI T1
3 OUT Y74 Repeat
K30
Y74 X6 4 LD Y74 operation
4 T1 5 ANI X6
6 OUT T1 K30
7 END
(a) Ladder diagram (b) Instruction list (program list)
Figure 1.2 Program

• The program consists of a large number of instruction words and I/O numbers.
(I/O numbers include not only the input (X) and output (Y), but all the contacts and the
factor numbers of the coils such as a timer (T) that make up a ladder diagram.
Those numbers are also called device numbers.)
• The instructions, which contain instruction words and I/O numbers, are added
numbers that represent the order of operations.
Those numbers are called step numbers.
(Instruction words are sometimes referred to as instructions.)
• The number of steps varies depending on the types of instructions or the setting
method for the numbers to be used for the I/O numbers and operations. (The more
complicated the operations become, the more numbers are added to the
instructions.)
• The instructions repeat from "Step number = 0" to "Instruction words end" endlessly.
This is called "repeat operation", "cyclic operation" or "scanning".)
Amount of time required to take once through is called operation cycle (scan time).
• The number of the programming steps from step number = 0 to the END instruction
defines the length or the size of the program.
• The program is stored in the program memory within the CPU. The operation is
performed in one ladder block unit.
One ladder block ranges from the operation START instruction (LD, LDI) to the OUT
instruction (including the DATA instruction).
1-3
1.2 Program Processing Procedure
The operation process is performed serially from the start step of the program memory
left to right then top to bottom (in the order corresponding to 1), 2)... 17)) in ladder
block unit as shown below.
1) 2) 3)
X0 X1
0 Y10
4) 5) 7)
X2 X3
3 Y11
6)
X4
8) 9) 10)
X5 X6
7 Y12
11) 12)
X7
Y13
13) 14)
X8
Y14
15) 16) 17)

X9 XA
17 Y15
1-4
1.3 MELSEC-Q Module Configuration
(1) High Performance model and Basic model

Q series CPU has two models; High Performance model and Basic model.
As a High Performance model CPU (Q mode) is used as the demonstration in this
course, "QCPU" means "High Performance model CPU (Q mode)" in this textbook
unless otherwise specified.
* See "Q series data book (L08029E)" for details.

Model CPU Description
High Performance Target For the use of focusing on high-speed processing and system
model extension
CPU Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
name
Features • High-speed processing
• Large-capacity memory...... the number of programs: 252(Q25H)
file register: 128 K(Q12H/Q25H built-in)
• Number of I/O device points…8,192 (including devices for remote
I/O)
• Number of I/O points .... 4,096 (excluding the I/Os for remote I/O)
• The SFC program is available.
• The Multiple CPU system is configurable.
• The Motion CPU is mountable.
• The personal computer CPU (manufactured by CONTEC
CO., LTD) is applicable.
• The real number, trigonometric function, character-string,
and PID control operation are available.
• The memory cards are compatible
• The ROM operation is available by using the CPU built-in
standard ROM.
Basic model Target For the use for a small-scale system
CPU Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU
name
Features • Number of I/O device points…..2,048 (including the devices for
remote I/O)
• Number of I/O points (excluding the I/Os for remote I/O).....
256 (Q00J)
1,024 (Q00/Q01)
• All-in-one power supply base is available (Q00J).
• Built-in serial communication ready for service (Q00/Q01)
• The ROM operation is available by using the CPU built-in
standard ROM.
(2) Q mode CPU and A mode CPU

QCPU series has two models; the one is Q mode CPU models that utilize the
Q-series original functions and performance. The other is A mode CPU models
that especially improve CPU processing ability by using the program hardware of
the conventional AnS series.
This textbook deals with the Q mode models.
1-5
(3) Basic configuration of the PLC system
The actual configuration of the PCL is explained below using the building-block
type.
MELSEC Q25HCPU QX10 QX10 QX10 QX10 QX41 QX41

POWER
Q61P-A1 MODE
RUN
ERR
USER
BAT 0 0 0 0
BOOT 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
PULL 5 5 5 5 I/O6 I/O7
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 Q38B
8 8 8 8
USB 9 9 9 9
A A A A
B B B B
C C C C
PULL D D D D
E E E E
MITSUBISHI F F F F
Power supply module CPU module I/O modules Base unit

Figure 1.3 MELSEC-Q Module Configuration
Base Unit
Main base unit Extension base unit
Power supply
Power supply
CPU
With three I/O

modules
Q33B Q63B
Power supply
Power supply
With five I/O

CPU
modules
Q35B Q65B
Power supply
Power supply
With eight I/O

CPU
modules
Q38B Q68B
Power supply
Power supply
With 12 I/O
CPU
modules
Q312B Q612B
• The main roles of the base unit are; to attach the power supply module, CPU module,
and I/O modules securely, to supply 5VDC power from the power supply module to
the CPU module and I/O modules, and to transmit the control signals to each module.
• Q00JCPU, which is all-in-one power supply base, is available for the basic model
CPU.
1-6
Power Supply Module
Input Output Module model
100V-120V AC 5V DC 6A Q61P-A1
200-240V AC 5V DC 6A Q61P-A2
100V-120V AC 5V DC 3A, 24V DC 0.6A Q62P
24V DC 5V DC 6A Q63P
CPU Module
Maximum number of I/O Program Capacity Basic instruction
CPU type
connected to the PLC (Maximum) processing speed
28 K steps 79ns Q02CPU
28 K steps Q02HCPU
4096 points 60 K steps Q06HCPU
34ns
124 K steps Q12HCPU
256 K steps Q25HCPU
256 points 8 K steps 200ns Q00JCPU
1024 points
I/O Module
No. of I/O
8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points
Format
120V AC
240V AC
Input module
24V DC (Plus common)

24V DC (High-speed
input)
24V DC (Minus Common)
5/12V DC
Connection output
Output module
Independent contact
output
Triac output
Transistor output (Sink)
Transistor output (Source)
I/O mixed
1-7
Memory Card
QCPU equips a built-in memory as a standard to store the parameters and the
program so that a program can normally execute without a memory card.
High Performance model QCPU is compatible with the memory cards.

However, the Basic model QCPU does not support the memory cards.
The memory cards are required when using the following functions;
Type Description
Can be written/changed within the amount of the memory.
<Example of the usage>
• During boot operation
SRAM card • When using the file register that exceeds 32 K points/128 K points in volume.
• For storing the sampling trace data
• For storing the SFC trace data
• For storing the failure history data
Writes the contents of the program memory or the specified file in one pass.
The newly written data replaces all the original data. Can only be read by using the sequence
program.
Flash card
• When no change will be made to the data
Can be written/changed within the amount of the program.
Using the file access order (such as FWRITE instruction) in the sequence program, accesses
the PLC user data of the ATA card in the CSV type/binary type.
ATA card
• When used by PLC user data (general-purpose data)
• The memory cards are required when the

MODE
RUN
amount of the built-in program memory,
ERR.
USER standard RAM, and standard ROM are not
BAT.
BOOT enough for storing the data.
ON SW
1 • The memory cards should be selected
2
Memory Card
3
4
according to the size of the program or the
5
STOP RUN
type of the data to be stored.
• The SRAM-type RAM card must install the
RESETL CLR
supplied batteries upon purchase. The SRAM
card data cannot be duplicated unless those
batteries are installed.
• Format the memory card before using it first.
• The Flash card is writable 100,000 times. The
ATA card is writable 1,000,000 times.
1-8
<Reference: QCPU System Configuration>
The memory of QCPU consists of the following block configurations.
Drive numbers of the target memory accessed

CPU module by peripheral devices.
Memory card (RAM)

Program memory
Drive number 0 Drive number 1
Standard RAM Memory card (ROM)
Drive number 3
Drive number 2
Standard ROM
Drive number 4
• Program memory :Stores the program that is used by QCPU for operation.
The programs stored in the standard ROM or in the memory
card are read into the program memory before execution.
• Standard RAM :Stores the data of the file register and the local device.
• Standard ROM :Stores the data of the parameters and the program when the
QCPU is operated with ROM.
• Memory card (RAM) :Stores the local device, debug data, SFC trace data, and
failure history data as well as the parameters and program.
• Memory card (ROM) :The Flash card stores the parameters, program, and the file
register.
:The ATA card stores the parameters, program, and the PLC
user data (general-purpose file).
1-9
1.4 External I/O Signals and I/O Numbers
(1) Wiring of I/O devices

The signals from external input devices are substituted by the input numbers,
which is determined by the fixing points and port numbers of the connected input
module, and are dealt with in the program.
The operation result output (coil) uses the output numbers that are determined by
the fixing points and port numbers of the output module that is connected to the
external output devices.
0 1 2 3 4 Slot numbers
(Power (CPU)
supply)
(QY)
Base unit
(QX)
Input numbers Output numbers
Y10
PB1 V1
X0
CS1 Y11
X1 V2
CS2
X2
Y12
V3
PB2
X3 · Input numbers are hexadecimal numbers
PB3 Y13 that start with 0. I/O numbers share the
X4 RL same numbers. "X" at the beginning of
LS1 the number represents "Input", and "Y"
X5 Y14 indicates "Output".
GL
LS2
X6 · Maximum number of the QCPU (Q
Y15 mode) I/O number is 4,096.
LS3 MC1
X7
LS4 Y16
X8 MC2
PB4
X9
Y17
PB5 MC3
XA
CS3 COM1
XB
XC
Y18
XD
Y1F
XE
XF COM2
COM
Output module
Input module
Figure 1.4 Wiring of I/O devices
1 - 10
(2) I/O numbers of the main base unit
The I/O numbers of the I/O modules that are attached to the main base unit are
assigned as follows. This concept applies both to the I/O modules and to the
intelligent function module.
Main base unit (Q33B,Q35B,Q38B,Q312B)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot numbers
Power supply module
00 to 0F
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
30 to 3F
40 to 4F
50 to 5F
60 to 6F
70 to 7F
A0 to AF
B0 to BF
80 to 8F
90 to 9F
CPU
I/O numbers
Base unit with three

slots (Q33B)
Base unit with five slots
(Q35B)
Base unit with eight slots

(Q38B)
Base unit with 12 slots

(Q312B)
• The I/O numbers of one slot (one module) is assigned in ascending order in units of 16 points. (0 to FH)
The status that 16-point module is attached to each slot is considered as a standard.
For example, the I/O numbers when 32-point module is attached to the fifth slot is as shown below.
Main base unit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot numbers
Power supply module
The I/O numbers of the

50 to 5F / 60 to 6F
slot next to the one with

00 to 0F
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
30 to 3F
40 to 4F
32-point modules are changed.

70 to 7F
80 to 8F
CPU
(The numbers are assigned

in order from lower
numbers.)
• The vacant slot (The slot with no I/O modules installed) is also assigned with the I/O numbers.
For example, if the third slot is vacant, the I/O numbers are assigned as described below. (Default)
The number of assigned point is changeable depending on the setting.
Main base unit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot numbers
Power supply module
10 to 1F
00 to 0F
20 to 2F
40 to 4F
70 to 7F
60 to 6F
50 to 5F
(30 to 3F)
Vacant slot
CPU
• As for the multiple CPU configuration (Two to four CPUs), the I/O numbers are assigned from the slot
next to the one to which a CPU is attached.
1 - 11
(3) I/O numbers of the extension base unit
Connect the extension base unit when the required number of the slots exceeds
the number of the slots of the main base unit.
The I/O numbers are assigned as follows by default.
This concept applies both to the I/O modules and to the intelligent function
module.
Main base unit (Q38B)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot numbers
Power supply module
00 to 0F
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
30 to 3F
40 to 4F
50 to 5F
60 to 6F
70 to 7F
CPU
Extension cable
Extension base unit (Q68B)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Power supply module
80 to 8F
90 to 9F
A0 to AF
B0 to BF
C0 to CF
D0 to DF
E0 to EF
F0 to FF
With one
extension As for the number of the slots, setting the
base units number different from the actual number is
possible. For example, setting the base unit
for 12 slots as for three slots is possible and
Extension base unit (Q65B) vice versa. This is in order to handle the
future extension, and to prevent the gap of
I/O numbers which is likely to happen when
16 17 18 19 20 making the transition from the conventional
system to the new one. For details, refer to
Power supply module
QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation,

100 to 10F
110 to 11F
120 to 12F
130 to 13F
140 to 14F
With two Program Fundamentals).

extension
base units
Extension base unit (Q68B)
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Power supply module
150 to 15F
160 to 16F
170 to 17F
180 to 18F
190 to 19F
1A0 to 1AF
1B0 to 1BF
1C0 to 1CF
With three
extension
base units
• The slots of the extension base unit are also assigned in ascending order in units of 16 points.
• The head I/O numbers of the extension bases follow the last number of the main base or the one of the
previous extension base.
• It is possible to assign "0" as the I/O number to the vacant slot or to the area with no slot.
The number of the extension base units that can be extended is as follows;
CPU type Number of stages (Including the ones
connected via GOT bus)
High Performance model 7
Basic model Q00JCPU 2
Q00CPU,Q01CPU 4
1 - 12
1.5 System Configuration and I/O Numbers of Demonstration Machine
CPU module Output module

Power supply module Input module
Base unit Q3 B
*
QCPU QCPU QX QY Q64 Q62
Q61P (One (Two
-A1 42 42P AD DA
station) station) (64 (64 (16 (16
points) points) points) points)
* Not used in this textbook.

(Leave it in STOP status.)
X0 Y40
to to
RS-232 cable X3F Y7F
Peripheral device
I/O panel
Y6F Y60 Y5F Y50 Y4F Y40

Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70
Y7F Y7E Y7D Y7C Y7B Y7A Y79 Y78
X3F X30 X2F X20

X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
ON 1 9 4 2 4 1 3 6 MELSEC-Q
OFF
XF XE XD XC XB XA X9 X8 A/D INPUT D/A OUTPUT
ON
OFF
1 - 13
MEMO
1 - 14
CHAPTER 2 OPERATING GX DEVELOPER
2.1 Basic Knowledge Required for Operating GX Developer
2.1.1 GX Developer Screen
1) Title bar
2) Menu bar
3) Tool bar
4) Project data list
5) Edit screen
6) Status bar
2-1
1) Title bar
Shows the name of the active project.
Resizes/Terminates GX Developer . Zooms GX Developer.
Displays the name and Minimizes GX Terminates

the path of the project. Developer. GX Developer.
2) Menu bar
Most frequently used item when operating GX Developer.
Click the menu bar to select a variety of functions from the drop-down menu under
the menu bar.
3) Tool bar
Equips buttons to easily access the commonly-used functions. This enables
quicker and speedier operation.
Point the cursor to the tool button to

show the function of each button.
4) Project data list

A ladder program creation screen or dialogue boxes can be read out from the list.
This list shows the project data sorted in classified categories.
5) Edit screen
Displays a ladder program creation screen or a comment creation screen. Various
screens are displayed so that you can edit ladder diagrams, comments, or
parameters.
6) Status bar
Shows the status information of the GX Developer.
Shows the state of

Shows the current mode. Scroll Lock.
Shows the explanation of the

point where the mouse cursor
Shows the Shows the Shows the state Shows the state
is placed. CPU type. connected CPU. of Caps Lock. of Num Lock.
2-2
2.1.2 Project
A project consists of programs, device comments, parameters, device memory, and

device default.
Project
Program
········
Program
Device comment
········
Device comment
Parameter
Device memory
Device default
Item Description
Program A sequential program that is required to operate the PLC CPU.
A comment for the sequential program device, which is classified into
two types. One is "common comment" that is common to all the
Device comment
projects, and the other is "comment by program", which varies by
projects.
Used for specifying the range of various settings such as the network
Parameter
related setting and device spectrum.
Displays the current device capacity. The device capacity can be
Device memory
changed by entering numeric value.
Device default Sets the device default for the PLC CPU.
2-3
1) One project per GX Developer
One GX Developer can edit only one project unit.
To edit two or more projects at a time, run as many GX Developers as the number
of projects.
2) Device Comments
The device comments of GX Developer are categorized into common comment
and comments by program.
Comment type Number of comments Description
A device comment that is common to all the
Common comment 1
programs within the project.
A device comment that is set by each
Comments by Equals the number of
program. The name of the comment must
program the programs
be the same as of the program.
If the contents of the two device comments overlap with one another, select
[Tools] [Option] [By program] to set priorities of them.
2-4
2.2 Operation Before Creating Ladder Programs
2.2.1 Starting up the GX Developer
1) Click the Start button.
2) Select the [All Programs] menu.
3) Select the [MELSOFT Application] menu.

2) Select!
3) Select!
Put a mouse cursor over the items to select the
4) Click!
menu.
1) Click!
(Clicking or double-clicking the mouse is not
required.)
4) Click the [GX Developer] menu.
5) GX Developer will start up.
5) GX Developer will start up.
2-5
2.2.2 Creating a new project
1) Click on the tool bar or select [Project]

1) Click!
[New Project] menu ( Ctrl + N ).
2) Click the button with an inverted delta symbol

2) Click! on the [PLC series] column.
3) Click on "QCPU(Qmode)" to select it from the

drop-down menu.
3) Click and select!
4) Click the button with an inverted delta symbol

on the [PLC Type] column.
4) Click! 5) Click on "Q02(H)" to select it from the

drop-down menu.
5) Click and select!
(Continue on the next page)
2-6
(Continued from the previous page)
6) Click the OK button.
6) Click!
7) New project window will open.
7) New project window will open!
2-7
2.2.3 Changing the assignment of the function keys
1) Click [Tooles] [Customize keys] menu.
1) Click!
2) Select the desirable 2) Click on the desirable key type to select it.
key type!
As an example, the window on the left shows
the case when "GPPA type" is selected.
3) Click!
REFERENCE
Display of the tool bar changes depending on the selected key type. Assignment of the shortcut keys alters
accordingly.
GPPA format
GPPQ format
MEDOC format
2-8
2.3 Preparations for Starting Up CPU
Setting up switches and formatting the built-in memory are required in advance to
writing a program to the CPU.
Connect or set up the connectors and the switches indicated as (1) to (3) shown
below.
(The figures below are illustrations of Q02HCPU. The locations of the switches and
connectors are the same with other CPUs.)
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
ON SW
1
2
3 (2)
4
5
STOP RUN
RESET L CLR
(3)
(1)
(1) Connect a battery

Connect the battery connector to the CPU as it is not connected with shipment.
(2) Set up the switches

Set up the DIP switches for the system setting and the RUN/STOP switch.
1) Setting the DIP switches for the system setting
Set all the switches to Off.
(Set switch 1 to Off to remove its write and control protection restrictions.)
2) Setting the RUN/STOP switch
Move the switch to the STOP position.
3) Setting the RESET/L.CLR switch
Move the switch to the central position.
(3) Connect the RS-232 cable
2-9
(4) Format the built-in memory of the CPU
The program memory of the QCPU is formatted in the following procedure.
1) Click the [Online] [Format PLC memory]

menu.
1) Click!
2) The dialogue box as shown on the left will

appear. Select "Program memory / Device
memory" from the Target memory drop-down
2) Select the
target memory! menu.
3) Click the Execute button.
3) Click!
4) Click the Yes button to begin format.
4) Click!
5) When format is complete, the dialogue box

shown left will appear. Click the OK
button.
5) Click!
6) Click the Close button to close the dialog

box.
6) Click!
2 - 10
(5) Clear all the device memory from the CPU
Clears the device memory from the QCPU.
1) Click the [Online] [Clear PLC memory]

menu.
1) Click!

appear. Confirm that the "Clear devices whole
2) Confirm that the box memory" checkbox is checked.
is checked.
3) Check
3) Check the "Include latch" checkbox.

4) Click!
5) Click the Yes button to clear the latch

device.
4) Click!
6) When completed, the dialogue box as shown

on the left will appear. Click the OK button.
5) Click!
7) Click the Close button to close the dialog

box.
7) Click!
2 - 11
(6) Clear the fault history in the CPU
Clear the fault history data stored in the QCPU.
1) Click the [Diagnostics] [PLC diagnostics]

menu.
1) Click!

appear. Click the Clear log button.
3) The dialogue box for confirmation will appear.

Click the Yes button.
4) Click the Close button to close the

2) Click! dialogue box.
4) Click!
2 - 12
2.4 Creating a Ladder Program
2.4.1 Creating a ladder program using the function keys
A ladder program Follow the steps below to create the ladder

to be created
program as shown on the left.
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
Make sure that the write mode is active before

X3
creating the ladder program.
Y71
1) Press the F5 key to open the Enter symbol

screen. Enter "X2".
If you pressed other key(s) by mistake, press
Esc and retype.
2) Press Enter ! 2) Press Enter to confirm the entry.

1) Enter!
You can also use the OK or Cancel button to

confirm or cancel your entry.
X2
3) The symbol you entered ( ) will appear.
3) The symbol will appear.
4) Press the Shift + F5 keys, and enter "X0".

4) Enter "X0"!
XO
6) The symbol will appear. 7) Press the F7 key, and enter "Y70".
8) Press Enter to confirm the entry.

8) Press Enter !
7) Enter "Y70"!
(Continued on the next page)
2 - 13
9) The symbol will appear! 9) The symbol you entered ( Y70 ) will
appear.
10) Press the F6 key, and enter "Y70".

11) Press Enter !
10) Enter "Y70"! 11) Press Enter to confirm the entry.
Y70
12) The symbol will appear! 12) The symbol you entered ( ) will appear.
Y70
13) Move the cursor! 13) Move the cursor to the ladder under .
14) Enter "X3"! 14) Press the F5 key, and enter "X3".
X3
16) The symbol will appear! 17) Press the F7 key, and enter "Y71".
18) Press Enter !
17) Enter "Y71"!
18) Press Enter to confirm the entry.
19) The symbol you entered ( Y71 ) will

appear.
19) The symbol will appear!
20) This is the end of the procedure.
2 - 14
2.4.2 Creating a ladder program using the tool buttons
Follow the steps below to create the ladder

A ladder program
to be created program as shown on the left.
X2 X0
Y70
Make sure that the write mode is active before
Y70 creating the ladder program.
X3
Y71
1) Click on the tool bar to open the Enter

symbol screen. Enter "X2".
If you clicked other key(s) by mistake, press
the Exit button.
2) Click the OK button to confirm the entry.

2) Click!
1) Click ,
then enter "X2".
X2
3) The symbol will appear! 4) Click on the tool bar, and enter "X0".

5) Click!
4) Click ,
then enter "X0".
X0
6) The symbol will appear! 7) Click on the tool bar, and enter "Y70".
8) Click the [OK] button.

7) Click , 8) Click!
then enter "Y70".
2 - 15
9) The symbol will appear! 9) The symbol you entered ( Y70 ) will
appear.
10) Click on the tool bar, and enter "Y70".

10) Click ,
11) Click!
then enter "Y70". 11) Click the OK button.
Y70
12) The symbol will appear! Y70
13) Move the cursor to the ladder under .
13) Move the cursor!
14) Click on the tool bar, and enter "X3".
14) Click ,
15) Click! 15) Click the OK button.
then enter "X3".
X3
16) The symbol will appear! 17) Click on the tool bar, and enter "Y71".
17) Click , then enter "Y71". 18) Click!
19) The symbol you entered ( Y71 ) will

appear.
20) This is the end of the procedure.
2 - 16
2.5 Converting the Program
1) Activate and select the window that displays

1) Activate the window! the ladder you want to convert.
2) Click on the tool bar or select the [convert]

[convert] menu ( F4 ).
2) Click!
If an error occurs while converting, the cursor will
automatically move to the defective point of the
ladder program. Check the point and correct the
program as necessary.
2.6 Writing to the PLC CPU
(1) Parameter setting for Multiple CPUs (if only one CPU is installed, omit this step.)
The Q-series Multiple-CPU version demonstration machines are equipped with
two CPUs.
Those machines are not dealt with in this textbook, however, it is required to set
the PLC parameters of each CPU for the reason mentioned below.
Each CPU should be informed where in the main base slot the I/O numbers
begin
<When two CPUs are installed>
Power supply
Output unit
Input unit
CPU 1
CPU 2
AD unit
DA unit
I/O numbers start from this slot.
Follow the steps below to set the parameters. For details on parameters, refer to
"3.2 Parameters".
1) Double-click "PLC parameter" on the GX

Developer project list.
1) Double-click!
2 - 17
2) The Qn (H) parameter setting dialogue box will

appear. Click the Multiple CPU settings
button.
2) Click!
3) Select "2" in <Number of CPU> box in the

3) Select "2". Multiple CPU settings dialogue box.
4) Click the End button.
4) Click!
(2) Writing to CPU

1) Suppose that the ladder program (sequence
MODE program) has been created with GX Developer
RUN
ERR. to proceed to the next step.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
ON SW
1
2) Set the RUN/STOP switch on the CPU to
2) Set the switch to "STOP"!
2
3 STOP.
4
5
STOP RUN
RESET L CLR
3) Click on the tool bar or click [Online]

[Writ to PLC] menu.
3) Click!
2 - 18
4) From the "File selection" tab, click to select the

4) Select a program to be 5) Click! program and parameter that you want to write
written by clicking on data!
to the CPU. Or click Param+Prog to select
them.
5) Click Execute to accept the selection.
6) If the parameter or program has already been

written to the CPU, the confirmation appears
asking if you want to overwrite the
parameter/program. Click Yes .
6) Click!
7) The progress bar will appear.
8) The completion pop-up window will appear

when writing is complete. Click OK .
8) Click!

When two CPUs are installed, perform the procedure from step 9) to step 15) explained in the dotted lines
on the next page in order to write a parameter into the CPU No.2 When only one CPU is installed, go on to
step 17) on page 2-21 .
2 - 19
9) Set the RUN/STOP switch of the second PLC
CPU to STOP.
10) Click the Transfer setup button on the
"Write to PLC" dialogue box.
10) Click!
11) The "Transfer Setup" dialog box will appear.

Click "2" in the "Multiple CPU setting"
column.

11) Click!
12) Click!
13) The target CPU will switch to the second

CPU.
13) The target CPU
switches. 14) Mark the checkbox for
14) Click! "PLC/Network/Remote" placed below the
"Parameter".
15) Click the Execute button to start writing
15) Click!
the parameter to the CPU No.2.

16) When the writing is complete, follow the
steps from 9) through 12) to select the first
CPU again. (At Step 11), select "1" in the
"Multiple CPU setting" column.)
2 - 20
17) Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
5) Click!
IMPORTANT
If you practice the operation by following the procedures described in this textbook,
resetting/rewriting the parameter for the CPU No.2 is required only in Section 6.3 or
in Chapter 7. (In the case where two CPUs are installed.)
<Reasons>
(1) Only the CPU No.1 drives the CPU program.
(2) No changes are made to the parameter items that correspond to the multiple
CPU system.
(The number of CPUs, refresh, I/O assignment setting)
2 - 21
2.7 Monitoring the Condition of the Ladder Program
1) Suppose that the ladder program (sequence

program) has been written into the PLC to
MODE
RUN
ERR.
proceed to the next step.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
ON SW 2) Reset with the RESET/L.CLR switch on the
1
2 2) Set the switch to "RUN"! CPU, and set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN.
3
4
5
STOP RUN
RESET L CLR
3) Click on the tool bar or click the [Online]

[Monitor] [Monitor mode] menu.
3) Click!
4) Selecting another menu ends the monitor

mode.
Operation Practice
1) Confirm that the LED indicator Y70 lights up by turning the snap switch X2 on, and
that the indicator remains lit after the snap switch is turned off.
2) Confirm that the LED indicator Y70 turns off by pressing push button X0, and that
the indicator does not light up when releasing the button.
3) Turn the snap switch X3 on to turn on LED indicator Y71.
2 - 22
(1) In monitor mode, the monitor status dialogue box shown below will appear
regardless of whether the monitoring is activated or not.
<QCPU (Q mode) or QnA series>
1) 2) 3)
1) Scan time
Shows the maximum scan time of the monitored PLC CPU.
The Q-series device will display the scan time in 0.1-ms increments.
2) PLC CPU condition

Shows the operating condition of the PLC CPU.
3) Monitor execution status

Flashes while the monitoring is active.
(2) The statuses of ladder are indicated as shown below.
1) Display of contacts when X0 = OFF

X0 X0
Normally open Normally close

(Not conducting) (Conducting)
Display of contacts when X0 = ON

X0 X0
Normally open Normally close

(Conducting) (Not conducting)
2) Display of coil output instruction, contact-equivalent comparison instruction,

and coil-equivalent instruction
Not executed, conditions *
not established
Executed, conditions *
established
*: Available contact-equivalent comparison and coil-equivalent instructions

are; SET, RST, PLS, PLF, SFT, SFTP, MC, FF, DELTA, and DELTAP.
2 - 23
POINT
· The monitor of RST instruction shows on/off status of the device to be reset.
The device to be reset is off :
The device to be reset is on :
· By alternating to list mode, the ladder program can be displayed in list form.
In list mode, on/off status is shown as described below.

1) Bit device
Shows the device name and the monitor status under the row where the list
instruction is displayed.
Off: [X0 = OFF], On: [X0 = ON]
2) Word device
Shows the current value.
2 - 24
2.8 Editing Ladder Program
2.8.1 Making partial correction to the ladder program
A ladder program Perform the following steps to make partial

to be created correction to the ladder as shown on the left.
X2 X0 (OUT Y71→OUT Y72)
Y70
Y70 Make sure that the write mode is active before

making changes to the ladder program.
Y72
X3
Y71
1) Confirm that "Overwrite" is shown in the

lower-right portion of the screen.
If "Insert" is shown on the screen, press the Ins

key to change the display to "Overwrite".
If "Insert" is shown on the screen, contacts or
coils you enter will be added to the diagram.
1) Check! <When correcting from X2 to X5>
Added!
X5 X2
<When correcting from SET to RST>
SET M3
RST M3
Added!
2) Double-click the point you want to correct.
2) Double-click!
2 - 25
3) The Enter symbol screen will appear.
3) A diagram creation window

will appear!
4) Click the edit box and enter "Y72".
5) Click the OK button to accept the change.
5) Click! 6) The modified ladder program will appear.

4) Enter "Y72"!
6) A diagram will be modified!
2 - 26
2.8.2 Drawing/Deleting lines
(1) Drawing lines
Perform the following steps to add a line to the

A ladder program
to be created
ladder as shown on the left.
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
Y73
X3
Y72
1) Click ( Alt + F10 ) on the tool bar.
1) Click!
2) Drag the mouse from the start position to the

2) Drag! end position.
A vertical line will be created to the left of the

cursor.
3) A line will be created when the left button of the

mouse is released.
3) A line will be created!
2 - 27
4) Click on the tool bar, and enter "Y73".
then enter "Y73"!
6) The ladder ( Y73 ) you entered will

appear.
6) The ladder will appear!
2 - 28
(2) Deleting lines
Perform the following steps to delete the line from

A ladder program
to be created the ladder shown on the left.
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
Y73
X3
Y72
1) Click ( Alt + F9 ) on the tool bar.
1) Click!
2) Drag the mouse from the start position to the

2) Drag!
end position that you want to delete.
3) A line will be removed!

3) The line will be deleted when the left button of
the mouse is released.
The line drawn for End instruction cannot be

removed.
4) Press the Delete key to delete Y73 .
4) Press "Delete"!
2 - 29
2.8.3 Inserting/Deleting rows
(1) Inserting rows

A ladder program Perform the following steps to insert a row to the
to be modified
X7 ladder shown on the left.
Y77
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
X3
Y72
1) Click on any point of the row.
1) Click to move cursor!

The new row will be inserted above the row
selected with the cursor.
2) Click the right button of the mouse on any point

on the ladder window except on the rows to
display the menu.
2) The menu
will appear!
2 - 30
3) Click the [Insert line] ( Shift + Ins ) menu.
3) Click!
4) The new row will be inserted above the

selected row.
4) New line will be inserted!
5) Click on the tool bar to open the Enter

Symbol screen. Enter "X7".
6) Click the OK button to confirm the entry.

then enter "X7"!
2 - 31
X7
7) The symbol will appear! 7) The symbol ( ) you entered will appear.
8) Click on the tool bar, and input "Y77".
8) Click , 9) Click! 9) Click the OK button.

then enter "Y77"!

10) The symbol ( Y77 ) you entered will
appear.
2 - 32
(2) Deleting rows
Perform the following steps to remove the row

A ladder program from the ladder shown on the left.
to be modified
X7
Y77
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
X3
Y72
1) Click on any point of the row to be deleted.

1) Click to move
cursor!
2) Click the right button of the mouse on any point

on the ladder window except on the rows to
display the menu.
2) The menu
will appear!
2 - 33
3) Click the [Delete line] ( Shift + Del ) menu.
3) Click!
4) The selected row will be deleted.
4) The row will be removed!
2 - 34
2.8.4 Cutting/Copying ladder program
A ladder program Follow the steps below to cut and copy the ladder
to be modified program shown on the left.
X7
Y77
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
1) Click on the start point of the ladder program

Range of cut/copy
you want to cut.
2) Drag the mouse cursor over the ladder to

specify the area.
2) Drag to specify the area!
The selected area will be highlighted.
Click the step numbers and drag the mouse

cursor vertically to specify the area in ladder block
units.
3) Click on the tool bar or select "Edit"

"cut" ( Ctrl + X ) to cut the specified area.
3) Click to cut!
2 - 35
4) Click the start point of the ladder program you

want to copy.
5) Drag the mouse cursor over the ladder to

specify the area.
The selected area will be highlighted.
Click the step numbers and drag the mouse

cursor vertically to specify the area in ladder
block units.
6) Click on the tool bar or select "Edit"

"copy" ( Ctrl + C ) to copy the specified area.
6) Click !
7) Click any ladder block to move the cursor to

the ladder. The copied ladder will be pasted
The ladder will be pasted above this block! right above the row with a cursor.
2 - 36
8) Click on the tool bar or select the "Edit"

"paste" menu ( Ctrl + V ) to paste the
specified area.
8) Click!
9) The copied ladder will be pasted.
9) Complete!
2 - 37
2.9 Saving Ladder Program
2.9.1 Saving newly-created or overwritten projects
1) Click on the tool bar or select the [Project]

[Overwritten Project] menu ( Ctrl + S ).
Saving the overwritten project completes at this

1) Click! step.
( Saving newly-created project) 2) Specify the area to store the new project.
3) Name the project.
3) Name the project! 4) Set a title as necessary.
2) Specify the location 5) Click the Save button to confirm your entry.
to store the project! 5) Click!
4) Set a title as necessary!
6) Click the Yes button.

The new project will be stored.
6) Click!
Reference
· The following characters cannot be used for the project name.
/, , >, <, *, ?," ", |, :, ; (: and can only be used to specify a drive.)
Do not place a period (.) at the end of the name.
· Eight or more characters can be used for the project name when operating with GX Developer
(SW8D5-GPPW or later), however, only the first seven characters will be displayed if the project is read
in GX Developer (SW2D5-GPPW or older).
· Maximum 150 characters are allowed for the project path + project name.
· Maximum 32 characters are allowed for the title.
· If space(s) is included in the project path or the project name, GX Developer will not start up properly by
double-clicking GPPW.gpj, ***.gps on the Explorer.
To open such project, start GX Developer first and open the project by selecting the [Project] [Open
project] menu.
2 - 38
2.9.2 Saving a project under another name
1) Click [Project] [Save as …] on the menu

bar.
1) Click!
2) Specify the location to store the project.
3) Name the project.

3) Name the project!
4) Set a title as necessary.
2) Specify the location
to store the project! 5) Click! 5) Click the Save button to confirm your entry.
4) Set a title as necessary!

The project will be stored under the new name.
6) Click!
2 - 39
2.10 Reading the Saved Project
1) Click on the tool bar or select the "Project"

"Open project" menu ( Ctrl + O ).
1) Click!
2) Specify the location where the project you want

to open is stored.
3) Click on the project.
4) GX Developer starts to read the specified

4) Click!
3) Click! project.
The following dialogue box will appear depending

on the condition (when another project has been open).
Yes : will terminate the project.

No : will keep the project activated.
When another project has been open without being converted.
Yes : will terminate the project without

converting the project
No : will keep the project activated.
(Continue editing the ladder
program.)
When another project has been open without being saved.
Yes : will save the project before

terminating it.
No : will terminate the project without
saving it.
Cancel : will keep the project activated.
2 - 40
CHAPTER 3 PLC DEVICES AND PARAMETERS
3.1 Devices
The devices are imaginary elements for programming in the PLC’s CPU, as well as the
components (such as contacts and coils) that compose a program.
X6 T2 Y 74
Y74
Y74 Device No.
Device symbol
Type Description Remark

Transmits instructions or data to the PLC through the external
X Input devices such as the push buttons, selector switches, limit
switches, and digital switches.
Outputs to the solenoids, electromagnetic switches, signal lights
Y Output
or digital indicators as a result of control.
Auxiliary relay inside the PLC that cannot output directly to the
M Internal relay
external devices．
Uninterruptible auxiliary relay inside the PLC that cannot output
L Latch relay
directly to the external devices.
Auxiliary relay inside the PLC that cannot output directly to the
S Step relay
external devices.
Internal relay for data link that cannot output directly to the
B Link relay external devices. The area not assigned by initial link information · Bit device
setting can be used as the internal relay. · Mainly deals with the
Used for failure detection. Create the failure detection program on/off signals.
F Annunciator beforehand and turn on the program while the PLC is running to
store the numerical values in the special register D.
Internal relay that stores the operation result (on/off information)
V Edge relay
from the top of the circuit block.
SM Special relay Internal relay that stores the CPU conditions.
Internal relay for data link that indicates the communication
SB Special link relay
status and errors.
Internal relay that captures the on/off data specified by the
FX Function input subroutine call instructions with arguments in the subroutine
program.
Internal relay that transmits the operation result (on/off data) in
FY Function output
the subroutine program to the subroutine program call source.
Accumulative timers of four types: low-speed timer, high-speed
T(ST) Timer
timer, low-speed integrator, and high-speed integrator.
Accumulative counters of two types: the counters for the sequence
C Counter
program and the counters for interruption sequence program.
D Data register Memory that stores the data in the PLC. · Word device
W Link register Data register for data link. · Mainly deals with a data.
Register for the extensive use of data registers, which uses user · One word consists of 16
R File register
memory area. bits.
SD Special register Register that stores the CPU conditions. · Can be specified by
Data register for data link that stores the communication status entering " .*".
SW Link data register (*=0 to F (hexadecimal).
and failure information.
Register for the exchange data between the subroutine call
FD Function register
source and the subroutine program.
Registers for modification to the devices (X, Y, M, L, B, F, T, C,
Z Index register
D, W, R, K, H, and P).
3-1
Type Description Remark
N Nesting Shows the nesting (nested structure) of the master control.
Locates the jump addresses of the branch instructions (CJ, SCJ,
P Pointer
CALL and JMP).
Interruption Locates the jump address that corresponds to the factor of the
I
pointer interruption when an interruption occurs.
SFC block Device that checks if the SFC program designated block is
BL
device activated or not.
SFC transition Device to check if the designated transition condition of SFC
TR
device program designated block is specified as forced transition or not.
Network No.
Used when designating Network No. by the instructions of data
J designation
link.
device
I/O No.
Used when designating I/O No. by the instructions for the
U designation
device
Used when designating the followings; timer counter set value,
Decimal
K pointer number, interruption pointer number, number of digits of
constant
bit device, and basic/application instruction values.
Hexadecimal Used when designating the basic/application instruction values.
H
constant
E Real constant Used when specifying real numbers as instructions.
"Character Character-string Used when specifying character strings as instructions.
string" constant
Jn X · Bit device
Jn Y · Mainly deals with the
Jn S on/off signals.
Link direct Device that can access directly to the link device of the network
Jn SB
device module.
Jn W · Word device
(Establish the refresh parameter beforehand.)
Jn SW · Mainly deals with a data.
Un G · One word consists of 16
Intelligent bits.
Device that can access directly to the buffer memory of the
Un G function module
device
3-2
3.2 Parameters
The parameters are basic settings applied to the PLC in order to control the object as
planned.
The parameters are divided into the PLC parameter, network parameter, and remote
password as shown below.
PLC Name Setting
Label................................................. Sets the QCPU label (name and purpose)
Comment .......................................... Sets the comment of QCPU label
Timer interval setting.............................. Sets either the low-speed/high-speed timer
RUN-PAUSE contact ............................. Sets contact that controls QCPU RUN/PAUSE
Remote reset ............................................ Permits/Prohibits the remote reset operations from GX Developer
STOP-RUN output mode...................... Sets the output (Y) status after switching from STOP to RUN
Computation on floating decimal
point data ................................................... Sets the execution of computing floating decimal point data in double accuracy
Intelligent function module setting ..... Sets the following items: Interruption pointer assignment (I50 to I255),
head I/O No. and head SI No. of intelligent function module
PLC System Setting Common pointer ...................................... Sets the head No. of the pointer used as a common pointer
Number of vacant slots ......................... Sets the number of vacant slots for the basic/expanded bases
System interruption setting .................. Sets execution interval for head No. of interruption counters and
interruption pointers (I28 to I31)
Interruption program/Fixed-cycle
program setting........................................ Sets the execution of interruption program at high speeds
Unit synchronization setting................. Sets the synchronization of the start-up of QCPU with that of intelligent
function module
A series CPU compatibility setting .... Sets whether or not to use the special relay/register for MELSEC-A series
File register....................................... Sets the file of the file register used throughout the program
PLC File Setting Comment file used in instructions..... Sets the file of the comment used throughout the program
Device initial value............................ Sets file of the device initial value used for QCPU
Local device file................................ Sets the local device file used throughout the program
WDT setting......................................Sets the QCPU watchdog timer
PLC Operation mode in error condition ....Sets the QCPUs operation mode in the error status
Parameter Error check .......................................Sets the detection of specified errors
PLC RAS Setting
Constant scan ..................................Sets constant scan time
Low speed program execution time .Sets the execution time for each scanning of the low speed program
Failure history ...................................Sets the area to store the QCPUs failure history
No. of devices................................... Sets the number of devices according to the systems

Latch (1) start/last............................. Sets the latch range (starting/last No. of devices) cleared by the latch
Device Setting clear key or remote latch clear operation
Latch (2) start/last............................. Sets the latch range (starting/last No. of devices) cleared by the latch
clear key or remote latch clear operation
Local device start/last ....................... Sets the device range (starting/last No. of devices) used at local device
Program Setting ....................................................................... Sets the file name and execution type (execution condition) of
the program when writing multiple programs for QCPU
Boot option ....................................... Sets whether or not to clear the program memory at boot
Boot File Setting Boot file setting ................................. Sets the type, data name, and transfer from drive of the program file
that operate at boot
Standard ROM automatic refresh..... Sets the execution of automatic refresh on the standard ROM
SFC Setting ...................................................................... Sets the start mode/condition of the SFC program when the program is in use,
and sets the output mode when the block is at a stop
I/O assignment .................................
Sets the type, model, occupation numbers, and start input/output numbers
of the installed module
Basic setting .....................................
I/O Assignment Sets the basic base module in use, expanded base module, power supply
module, model of expanded cable, and the number of the slot of the base module
Switch setting ................................... Sets various switches of the intelligent function module
Detailed setting................................. Sets the operations at an error and the response time of the input module
MELSECNET,
Network Ethernet Setting ....................................................................Sets the network parameters for MELSECNET/H and Ethernet
Parameter
CC-Link Setting ....................................................................Sets the parameters for CC-Link
Remote Password .......................................................................................................................... Sets the password that limits the access via the Ethernet or serial
communication modules
3-3
· When GX Developer starts, it employs the preset values as the parameters. These
values are called the default (initial values).
· PLC can run with those values unchanged, however, modify them within a specified
range as necessary.
· The second CPU is installed on the demonstration machine for making up a Multiple
CPU structure. In MELSEC-Q series, multiple CPU setting for the parameters is
required if two to four CPUs are installed.
Operation Example: Changing Multiple-CPU Setting
The number of CPUs of Multiple CPU setting is one by default.
Change the value to "two". (If only one CPU is installed, omit this step.)
1) Double-click "PLC parameter" on the GX
Developer project list.
1) Double-click!
2) The Qn (H) parameter setting dialogue box

appears. Click the Multiple CPU settings
button.
2) Click!
3) Enter "2" in <Number of PLC> box in the

3) Select "2" multiple CPU setting dialogue box.
4) Click!
5) Click! 5) Click the End button in the Qn (H)

parameter setting dialogue box. The setting is
completed.
3-4
CHAPTER 4 SEQUENCE & BASIC INSTRUCTIONS -Part 1-
4.1 List of Instructions Described in this Chapter
The table below shows the sequence and basic instructions described in this chapter.
Instruction Instruction
symbol Functions Drawing (devices to be used) symbol Functions Drawing (devices to be used)
(Name) (Name)
Conditional
OUT CJ CJ Pn
Coil output jump
Out n = 0 to 4095
Designates bit for bit (non-delay)
devices and word devices. (pointer number)
Designates bit for bit

MC devices and word devices. SCJ Conditional
Master Starts master jump SCJ Pn
Nn Mc Nn
control control Jumps after n = 0 to 4095
n = 0 to 14
one scan (pointer number)
(nesting)
MCR Calls a
Terminates MCR Nn CALL CALL Pn
Master subroutine
master control n = 0 to 14 n = 0 to 4095
control reset program
(nesting) (pointer number)
Calls a
SET subroutine
SET CALLP CALLP Pn
Sets devices program
Set n = 0 to 4095
Designates bit for bit (pulsing
(pointer number)
devices and word devices. operation)
RST Returns from a

RST Resets RET
subroutine RET
Reset devices Return
Designates bit for bit program
devices and word devices.
Pulse Terminates a
Generates the mainroutine
PLS pulses for one PLS FEND program FEND
Pulse program cycle
during an Designates bit for bit
input
Pulf
Generates the
PLF pulses for one PLF
Pulf program cycle
during an Designates bit for bit
input
4-1
[List of Instructions Not Described in this Chapter: Part 1]
"Introduction: PLC Course" covers the instructions shown below. The conventional
A series also support them. Refer to "QCPU (Q mode) / QnACPU Programming
Manual (Common Instructions)" for more details.
(Name) (Name)
LD MRD Intermediate
Load Starts logical Lead branching
operation
Starts to
operate normally Designates bit for bit
open
LDI MPP Terminates
Load Starts logical Pop branching
inverse inverse operation
Starts to
operate normally Designates bit for bit
open
AND NOP Ignored For a space or deleting a
And Logical AND Nop program
operation
normally open
series connection Designates bit for bit
ANI END Terminates Must be used as an end of a

And Logical AND inverse a program program
inverse operation END
normally close processing
series connection Designates bit for bit
OR STOP Stops
Or Logical OR operation STOP
operation
normally open
parallel connection Designates bit for bit
Logical OR inverse
ORI SFT
operation SFT 1-bit shift
Or
normally close Shift for devices
inverse Designates bit for bit
parallel connection Designates bit for bit devices and word devices.
AND operation 1-bit shift

ANB between logical SFTP for devices SFTP
And block blocks Shift P (pulsing
Designates bit for bit
Series connection operation) devices and word devices.
between blocks
OR operation Ignored
ORB between logical (Inserts a page
NOPLF NOPLF
Or block blocks break when
Parallel connection printing)
between blocks
Ignored
MPS Starts to cause (Recognized
PAGE PAGE n
Push a branch as zero step of
n-page)
4-2
[List of Instructions Not Described in this Chapter: Part 2]
The instructions listed below are intended for the Q series and not supported by the
A series.
Some of them are explained in "Q Programming Practice Course".
Refer to "QCPU (Q mode) / QnACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions)"
for more details.
(Name) (Name)
Starts to Converts the

LDP
operate MEF results into a
Load P
rising pulse Designates bit for bit falling pulse Designates bit device and
devices and word devices. word device
Inverts the
LDF Starts to start INV
operation
Load F a falling pulse Inverse Designates bit device and
Designates bit for bit results
Converts the Vn
Series results into a
ANDP EGP
connection of rising pulse
And P Edge P
rising pulse Designates bit for bit (Memorized by Designates bit device and
Vn)
Converts the Vn
Series results into a
ANDF EGF
connection of falling pulse
And F Edge F
falling pulse Designates bit for bit (Memorized by Designates bit device and
Vn)
Parallel FF
ORP Inverts a
connection of FF
Or P device output Designates bit device and
rising pulse Designates bit for bit
word device
Parallel Converts a
ORF DELTA
connection of direct output to DELTA
Or F Delta DY
falling pulse Designates bit for bit a pulse
Converts the
DELTAP Converts a
operation DELTAP
MEP Delta P direct output to
results into a Designates bit device and DY
a pulse
rising pulse word device
4-3
4.2 Differences between OUT and SET • RST
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QB-1
Program name MAIN
OUT Instruction
X0
0 Y70
• The OUT instruction turns the specified device ON when receiving the input
condition, and turns the device OFF when the condition becomes OFF.
[Timing Chart]
X0
Y70
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QB-2
Program name MAIN
SET· RST instruction
X0
0 SET Y70
X1
2 RST Y70
• The SET instruction turns the specified device ON when receiving the input
condition, and maintains the device ON status even if the condition becomes OFF.
To turn the device OFF, use the RST instruction.
[Timing Chart]
X0
X1
Y70
4-4
4.3 Measuring Timer
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QB-3
Program name MAIN
K30
X5
0 T0
Timer setting value (Time limit: 3 s.)

T0
5 Y70
T0
7 Y71
* OUT T is a 4-step instruction.
[Timing Chart]
X5contact • The timer contact operates
when a given delay time elapses
after the coil is energized.
T0 coil (Ondelay timer)
• The allowable range of timer
3.0 s
setting is between K1 to
T0Normally open, Y70 coil K32767.
Low-speed (100 ms) timer
T0Normally closeY71 coil
0.1 to 3276.7 s
High-speed (10 ms) timer
0.01 to 327.67 s
• When the timer setting value is
set to zero, it turns ON (Time
out) by the execution of the
instruction.
The following four types of timer are available.

Timer No.
Type
(Default) • The number of each type of
Low-speed timer timer can be changed in units of
T0 to T2047(2048)
Counts time in increments of 100 ms. 16 using parameters.
High-speed timer • Change the output instruction
───
Counts time in increments of 10 ms. (OUT) to OUTH to select the
Low-speed retentive timer high-speed timer or high-speed
───
Accumulates time in increments of 100ms. retentive timer.
High-speed retentive timer
───
Accumulates time in increments of 10ms.
Refer to Section 6.4 for explanation on the retentive timers.
4-5
4.4 Counting by the Counter
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QB-4
Program name MAIN
K12
X1
0 C20
Counter setting value

C20
5 Y72
X7
7 RST C20
* OUT C is a 4-step instruction.
[Timing Chart]
• Counts when an input signal
rises.
•X1contact • After the count, the subsequent
input signals are not counted.
• Once the counter counts, the
contact status and the current
C20 coil counter value do not change
1 2 3 11 12 0
until the RST instruction is
(Current value of counter)
performed.
• Perfoming the RST instruction
C20contact, Y72 coil
before the count returns the
counter to zero.
• The allowable range of the
X7contact (Input of the RST instruction) counter setting is between K0
and K32767. (K0 turns ON
(Count up) by the execution of
the instruction.)
In addition to the direct designation using K, indirect designation using D (Data register)
is available.
• The counter C30 counts when
the number of rising edges on
the input signal X0 becomes
Setting value the same as the number (e.g.;
D10 24) specified by the data
X0
Digital register D10.
0 2 4 0 C30
switch • This indirect designation is
useful for applying a value
C30 specified with an external
5 Y71 digital switch to the counter.
D10 24
The indirect designation using
data register D is also
available for the timer.
4-6
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX1
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
When the conveyor belt operation start switch (X0) is turned ON, the buzzer (Y70)
beeps for three seconds and then the conveyor belt (Y71) starts to operate.
The conveyor belt automatically stops when the sensor (X1) detects that six
packages have passed through.
Sensor
(X1)
Conveyor belt
Control panel Motor
Operating panel
MC
Operation Buzzer
(X0) (Y70)
(Y71)
Create the following ladder and check if it works properly.
X0 C0
0 M0 During operation
M0
M0 Y71
4 Y70 Buzzer
M0 K30
7 T0 3-sec timer
T0
12 Y71 Operating the conveyor belt
X1 K6
14 C0 Counter for counting the number
Y71 of packages
19 RST C0
4-7
Operating Procedure
(1) Create a new project
1) Click on the tool bar.
Click
2) The dialog box for creating a new project appears.

Confirm that the "PLC series" is QCPU and the "PLC type" is QO2H. Then
click the OK button.
Click
3) If the project in preparation exists, the dialog box appears asking if you want
to save the product.
Click the No button.
Click
4) The screen shifts to the new project creation mode.
4-8
(2) Create a program
[Using the keyboard]
F5 X 0 Shift + F5 C 0 F7 M 0
F4
Convert
[Using the tool buttons]

Enter after 1) Click on the toolbar to open the ladder
clicking . input window.
Click
2) Enter "X0" with the keyboard and click the

OK button.
Enter after
clicking . 3) Click on the toolbar to open the ladder
Click
input window.
4) Enter "C0" with the keyboard and click the
OK button.
Enter after
clicking . 5) Click on the toolbar to open the ladder
Click
input window.
6) Enter "M0" with the keyboard and click the

· OK button.
·
·
·
Click 7) When creating the circuit is finished, click
on the toolbar.
4-9
(3) Write to the PLC
As the demonstration machine has two CPUs, setting parameters for

Multiple-CPU is required. (The setting is not necessary only for one CPU
machine.)
Refer to Section 3.2 Parameters for the Multiple-CPU setting procedure.
1) Write the created ladder to the memory on the PLC.
Set the RUN/STOP switch

of the CPU to STOP
Click on the tool bar.

The dialog box for writing to the PLC appears.
Click
2) Click the Param+Prog button. Checkboxes for the program of the write
data and the parameter displayed in the window are automatically marked.
Click this button after the

program name (MAIN) and
PLC parameter appear and
their checkboxes are marked.
Click
4 - 10
4) If the parameters have been already written, the dialog box appears asking if
you want to overwrite them. Click the Yes button.
Click
5) The progress bar dialog box appears to show how much the PLC parameter is
written.
6) If the program has already been written, the dialog box appears asking if you
want to overwrite it. Click the Yes button.
Click
7) The progress bar dialog box appears to show how much the program MAIN is
written.
Click
4 - 11
(4) Monitor the ladder
Reset the CPU
Set the RUN/STOP switch

of the CPU to RUN
1) Click on the tool bar.
Click
2) The ladder (write) screen is used to monitor the ladder.
Operation Practice
1) Turn the push button switch (X0) ON. Y70 becomes ON, and T0 starts at the same
time.
2) When the timer T0 counts three seconds (time is up), Y70 goes OFF and at the same
time, Y71 becomes ON.
3) Turn the push button switch (X1) ON and OFF. The counter C0 counts the number of
ON to turn Y71 OFF after counting ON for six times.
4 - 12
4.5 PLS Pulse (Turns the specified device ON for one scan at rising edge of an input condition.)
PLF Pulf (Turns the specified device ON for one scan at falling edge of an input condition.)
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QB-5
Program name MAIN
X0 1
0 PLS M5
X1 2
3 PLF M0
1 • The PLS instruction turns the specified device ON only for one scan at rising edge of
the PLS command.
[Timing Chart]
X0
M5
One scan One scan
2 • The PLF instruction turns the specified device ON only for one scan at falling edge
of the PLF command.
[Timing Chart]
X1
M0
One scan One scan
4 - 13
Application
• The instructions can be used in the standby program that waits for the operation
condition.
Operation Trigger
X0
PLS M0
M0
SET M5
M5
Y70
Operation Condition K50
TO
TO
RST M5
[Timing Chart]
X0
(Trigger)
M0
M5
Y70
5s
(Operation)
Time to wait
for the condition
Operation
Condition
Applicable Device Basic number of steps
Intelligent
Constant
Pointer
Internal Device File MELSECNET/10 Index

Level
Digit
function
(system user) register (H) Direct Jn register
module
Un G
Bit Word R Bit Word Z K H P I N
PLS D
D 2
PLF D
4 - 14
• The instructions can be used for the detection program that detects passage of
moving objects.
After detecting the passage of a product, the next process for the product is started.
X0
PLF M0
M0
SET Y70 Product
Y70 Sensor
Sensor
(Detection of input from X0) Conveyor belt
[Timing Chart]
X0
M0
Y70
Other Useful Ways of PLS & PLF Part 1

• They can be used to create the program that performs the output operation for a
given period of time when the input signal changes ON to OFF.
[Timing Chart]
Input(X0)
Output(Y76) Given period of time

Pulse duration
10 s
[Program example]
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QB-6
Program name MAIN
X0
0 PLF M1
M1 T16 K100
3 T16
Y76
Y76
4 - 15
Other Useful Ways of PLS & PLF Part 2
• The program for the repeated operation such as switching ON/OFF status alternately
by pressing the push button switch can be made using the instructions.
If you use the PLS for the above program, the rising edge caused when the
push button switch is pressed triggers the program. If you use the PLF, the
falling edge caused when the switch is released becomes the trigger.
[Timing Chart]
X0
Y70
Y71
[Program Example]
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QB-7
Program name MAIN
X0
0 PLS M0
PLF M1
M0 Y70
5 Y70
M0 Y70
M1 Y71
11 Y71
M1 Y71
4 - 16
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX2
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
Create the following ladder and check if it works properly.
X2
0 PLS M0
M0 X0
3 Y70
Y70
X3
7 PLF M1
M1 X1
10 Y71
Y71
[Timing Chart]
X2
M0
PLS
Y70
X0
X3
M1
PLF
Y71
X1
REFERENCE
The following is a timing chart of a lockup ladder programmed using OUT
instructions. Compare this with the lockup ladder created using the PLS
instructions.
X2
Y70
X0
X2 X0
Y70
Y70
4 - 17
Operating Procedure
See Section 4.4 Operating Procedure for the procedure of the following operations.
Operation Practice
• Turning X2 switch ON makes Y70 turn ON, and Y70 switch OFF when X0 turns ON.
(Even when X2 stays ON, Y70 is turned OFF when X0 turns ON.)
• Turning X3 switch OFF makes Y71 turn ON, and Y71 switch OFF when X1 turns ON.
__
Related Exercise Exercise 3
REMARK
Input pulse processing is not required for the QCPU as it uses a derivative contact.
( / ).
[A/AnSCPU case]
X0
PLS M0
M0
SET M5
[QCPU case]
X0
SET M5
Supported instructions are; LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, and ORF.
4 - 18
4.6 MC Master control (Start)
MCR Master control reset (End)
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QB-8
Program name MAIN
X7
0 MC N0 M98
N0 M98
X2
3 Y70
X3
5 Y71
7 MCR N0
*N0 M98 is displayed in the read mode.
• The above program is a basic one.

• MC N M to MCR N (indicated as "MC to MCR" hereafter.)
The allowable nesting (N) numbers for the MC to MCR are between N0 and N14.
• The scan time skipped by the "MC to MCR" hardly changes.
The status of the devices which exist in the skipped area becomes as follows;
All the devices are turned OFF by the OUT instruction.
The SET, RST and SFT instructions make no change, and values of the counter
and retentive timer remain unchanged.
The 100ms timer and 10ms timer are reset to zero.
Reference
X7
You do not need to write contacts for the master
0 MC N0 M98 control when creating the ladder.
After creating the ladder, convert it ( F4 ) and enter
NO M98
into the read mode. The contacts are automatically
inserted.
Application
• The instructions can be used to create the program for switching between manual
and automatic operations. (Refer to the Ladder Example.)
Applicable Device
Basic number of steps
Intelligent
Constant
Pointer

Level
Digit
function
module
Un G
MC n D n
2
MCR n D 1
The basic number of steps of the MC instruction is two, and that of the MCR instruction is one.
4 - 19
Nested "MC to MCR" Program Example
• The MC and MCR instructions can be nested as shown below.
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QB-9
Program name MAIN
X5
0 Y70
X2
2 MC N0 M6
N0 M6 K5
X6
5 C0
X3
10 MC N1 M7
1
N1 M7 K100
N1 N0
X7
13 TO
18 MCR N1
X20
19 Y71
21 MCR N0
X0
22 SET Y72
X4
24 MC N0 M8 2
N0 M8
X1 N0
27 RST Y72
29 MCR N0
X30
30 Y73
M6
32 Y74
1 • The "MC to MCR" program is nested under the "MC to MCR" program . (It is
called "nested structure".)
To do that;
1) Assign the nesting number (N) of MC instructions in ascending order.
2) For the MCR nesting number (N), assign the numbers used for the MC in
descending order.
2 • The "MC to MCR" program is independent from the program. The nesting
numbers (N) used in the program can be used for the program.
• The internal relay number (M) must be changed by MC.
3 • As shown in the program, the internal relay number M of MC can be used as a

contact.
4 - 20
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX3
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
A program for switching between manual and automatic operations can be made using
the MC and MCR instructions.
• When selecting manual operation by turning X7 OFF
1) The system goes into low-speed operation mode when X2 is turned ON.
2) The system goes into high-speed mode when X3 is turned ON.
• When selecting automatic operation by turning X7 ON, the system operates in
low-speed mode for 3 s after X0 is turned ON. Then it operates in high-speed mode
for 10 s and stops.
High speed
Low Speed
3s 10 s
Manual
X7
0 MC N0 M10
N0 M10 Need no key input

X2 M82
3 M81 Instruction for manual low-speed
X3 M81
6 M82 Instruction for manual high-speed
9 MCR N0
Automatic
X7
10 MC N0 M11

X0 T1
13 Y70 Automatic start
Y70
MC N1 M12

Y70 M72
19 M71 Instruction for auto low-speed
M71 K30
T0
T0
27 M72 Instruction for auto high-speed
M72 K100
T1
34 MCR N0
M71
35 Y71 Low speed operation
M81
M72
38 Y72 High speed operation
M82
4 - 21
Operating Procedure
See Section 4.4 Operating Procedure for the detailed procedure of the following
operations.
Operation Practice
• The manual operation is selected by turning the X7 switch OFF.
When the X2 switch is turned ON, Y71 lights and the low-speed operation is
performed. To perform the high-speed operation, turn the X3 switch ON. Y72 lights
and the high-speed operation starts.
• Automatic operation is selected by turning the X7 switch ON.
When the X0 switch is turned ON, Y70 lights and indicates that it being automatically
operated. Y71 also lights at the same instant and stays on for three seconds
indicating the system is in low-speed mode. After the three seconds elapsed, Y72
lights and stays on for 10 s indicating in high-speed mode. Then the operation is
stopped. (Y70, Y71, and Y72 have stopped lighting at the end.)
NOTE
For the MCR instructions in one nested program block, all master controls in the
program can be terminated with the lowest nesting (N) number only.
4 - 22
4.7 CJ • SCJ • CALL • RET • FEND
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QB-10
Program name MAIN
4.7.1 CJ (Conditional jump: instataneous execution condition jump)
SCJ (S conditional jump: execution condition jump after one scan)
1
X0
0 CJ P10
2
X1
3 SCJ P10
X0 X1
6 Y70
Pointer
P10
X3
9 Y71
1 • The CJ instruction instantaneously executes a program with jumping it to the

designated jump address (pointer number) when the input condition is ON.
When the condition is OFF, the program is not jumped.
2 • The SCJ instruction executes a program without jumping for the scan when the input
condition is ON. From next scan, the instruction executes a program with jumping it
to the designated jump address (pointer number).
When the input condition is OFF, the program is not executed.
• The SCJ instruction is used when some operations must be executed before
jumping the program.
For example, when the output needs to be ON or reset in advance.
[Timing Chart]
Input Condition
(X0, X1)
Executes at Executes at
CJ every scan every scan
Executes at Executes at
SCJ every scan every scan
One scan One scan
4 - 23
Caution
• The pointer numbers available for both CJ and SCJ are P0 to P4095.
• Use the FEND instruction as shown below when a program using the CJ and SCJ
must be concluded in each program block. (See Section 4.7.3 for explanation on the
FEND.)
Start
0 Sequence program A When Not executing CJ When executing CJ
Input Condition Step 0 Step 0
Sequence
program A CJ P
CJP
Sequence program B
Input condition
YES
FEND FEND
is ON?
P
P Sequence program C
NO
Sequence Sequence END

program B program C
END
• The status of ladders skipped by the CJ instruction remains unchanged.
(Before executing CJ) (During executing CJ)
X0 X0
1100 CJ P10 1100 CJ P10
X2 X2
1103 Y72 1103 Y72 Because X0 is ON, all instructions within
this area are not executed.
Hence Y72 remains ON even after X2 is
turned OFF.
P10 X1 P10 X1
1330 PLS M1 1330 PLS M1
• Once the coil of the timer is energized, the timer updates even if the coil is skipped
by the CJ or SCJ instruction.
When time is up, the contact becomes ON. This is because the timer updates and
turns the contact ON/OFF after each END.
Applicable Device Basic number of steps
Intelligent
Constant
Pointer

Level
Digit
function
module
Un G
CJ P**
P 2
SCJ P**
4 - 24
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX4
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
Create the following ladder with GX Developer and write it on the CPU of the
demonstration machine. Then check the difference between CJ and SCJ
instructions.
X0
0 CJ F3
P10
X1
3 SCJ F3
P10
X0 X1
6 Y70
P10 X3
9 Y71
Operating Procedure
operations.
4 - 25
Operation Practice
(1) When X0 and X1 are OFF, the CJ and SCJ (2) When X0 is turned ON, the CJ instruction
instructions are not executed. Therefore, Y70 is is executed jumping to P10. Therefore, Y70
ON. remains ON.
[Before executing CJ and SCJ] [Executing CJ] First scan and subsequent scans
X0 X0
CJ P10 CJ P10
X1 X1
SCJ P10 SCJ P10
X0 X1 X0 X1
Y70 Y70
P10 X3 P10 X3
Y71 Y71
(3) The SCJ instruction is executed when X0 is turned OFF and X1 is turned ON.
The instruction is executed jumping to P10 from the next scan.
Therefore, Y70 becomes OFF.
[Executing SCJ] First scan [Executing SCJ] Second scan and subsequent scans
X0 Second X0
scan & CJ P10
CJ P10
First subsequent
X1 times X1
scan SCJ P10
SCJ P10
X0 X1 X0 X1
Y70 Y70
P10 X3 P10 X3
Y71 Y71
(4) Y71 is turned ON/OFF by X3 regardless of the CJ or SCJ instructions.

• The following lists explain the difference between the CJ and SCJ instructions.
After X1 becomes ON
Second scan & subsequent times
[ CJ ] [ SCJ ]
First scan only
0 LD X0 0 LD X0
1 CJ P10 1 CJ P10
3 LD X1 3 LD X1
4 SCJ P10 4 SCJ P10
6 LDI X0 6 LDI X0
7 ANI X1 7 ANI X1
8 OUT Y70 8 OUT Y70
9 P10 9 P10
10 LD X3 10 LD X3
11 OUT Y71 11 OUT Y71
12 END 12 END
____
Related Practice Question Practice Question 4
4 - 26
4.7.2 CALL (P) Call
Executes a subroutine program
RET Return
M0
0 CALL P10
M5 X2
50 CALL P10
Sequence
program
103 FEND
1
P10
2 X1
104 Y70
Subroutine
program
157 RET
• The above program is a basic style to execute the subroutine program using the
CALL and RET instructions.
Keep this structure, otherwise an error occurs and PLC stops.
1 A subroutine program consists of the ladders for executing the same data many times
in one program.
The subroutine starts at Pointer P and ends with the RET instruction.
2 • 0 to 4095 can be used as the Pointer P number. (Same as the pointer numbers used
for the CJ and SCJ instructions.)
• The subroutine program is executed as shown in the following diagrams.
(When not executing CALL P10) (When executing CALL P10)

0 0 0
Sequence program
Input Condition CALL P10

CALL P10 Next step after CALL
Sequence program
FEND P10 FEND

FEND
P10
Subroutine program
Sequence program
Execution of subroutine program
RET
RET
END
4 - 27
About Nesting
• The CALL (P) instructions can be nested up to 16 levels.

Subroutine Subroutine Subroutine Subroutine Subroutine
Sequence program program program program program program
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
0
CALL P3
CALL P5
CALL P1 CALL P4
CALL P2 RET RET
RET
RET
RET
FEND
The following ladder circuit shows the above nested program.
CALL P1
Sequence program
FEND
P1
CALL P2 P1 subroutine program

RET
P2

RET
P3

RET
P4

RET
P5
P5 subroutine program
RET
Applicable Device
Intelligent
Constant
Pointer

Level
Digit
function
module
Un G
CALL(P) P** P ○ 2
RET 1
The basic number of steps of CALL (P) is 2 tn, and that of RET is one. ("n" is a argument passed to the subroutine.)
4 - 28
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX5
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
Create the following ladder with the GX Developer and write it on the CPU of the
demonstration machine to check if the CALL and RET instructions work properly.
X2
0 CALL P10
X3
3 Y70
5 FEND
P10 X4
6 Y71
9 RET
Operating Procedure
Refer to Section 4.4 Operating Procedure for the detailed procedure of the
following operations.
4 - 29
Operation Practice
Verify the operation of the ladder, which was created with the GX Developer and
written to the CPU of the demonstration machine, by monitoring the ladder on the
screen.
X2
0 CALL P10
X3
3 Y70
5 FEND
P10 X4
6 Y71
9 RET
10 END
(1) When X2 is OFF Computation when X2 is OFF
1) Operates from 0 to FEND.

0 LD X2
2) Y70 turns ON/OFF when turning X3
1 CALL P10
ON/OFF.
3 LD X3
3) Y71 remains unchanged even when 4 OUT Y70
turning X4 ON/OFF. 5 FEND
6 P10
(2) When X2 is ON 7 LD X4
1) After executing P10 subroutine, 8 OUT Y71
operate from Step 4 to FEND. 9 RET
ON/OFF.
Operation when X2 is ON
ON/OFF.
____
4 - 30
4.7.3 FEND F end
FEND is a one-step
FEND
instruction.
• Use the FEND instruction as the END instruction under the following conditions:
1) When a sequence program must be executed and terminated in each program
block.
For example, use this instruction with CJ and SCJ instructions.
2) When using the subroutine programs (CALL and RET instructions).
3) When using an interrupt program.
• After each execution of the FEND, the PLC processes the current value of the timer
and counter and makes self-diagnostic check, and then re-operates from 0 step.
0
CALL P**
Operation Sequence program
when not Sequence program
executing CJ Jump by CJ
CJ P** FEND
Operation P**
Sequence program Subroutine program
when executing CJ
FEND I**
P** Interrupt program
Sequence program
END END
(a) When operating in each program block by CJ instruction (b) When using the subroutine and interrupt
programs
Caution
• There is no limit to the number of FEND instructions in a sequence program,
however, it cannot be used in the subroutine and interrupt programs.
• The FEND instruction cannot be used to terminate the main or sub sequence
program.
Make sure to use an END instruction for the end of a whole program.
REFERENCE
The interrupt program allows you to stop the current process and processes an
interrupt upon receiving an interrupt request in the middle of processing a normal
program.
4 - 31
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX6
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
Create the following ladder with the GX Developer and write it to the CPU of the
demonstration machine to check if the FEND instruction work properly.
X3
0 CJ F3
P10
X4
3 Y70
5 FEND
P10 X5
6 Y72
Operating Procedure
4 - 32
Operation Practice
Verify the operation of the ladder, which was created with the GX Developer and
written to the CPU of the demonstration machine, by monitoring the ladder on the
screen.
X3
0 CJ P10
X4
3 Y70
5 FEND
P10 X5
6 Y72
9 END
(1) When X3 is OFF Operation when X3 is OFF

1) Operates from 0 to FEND.
0 LD X3
2) Y70 turns ON/OFF when turning X4 1 CJ P10
ON/OFF. 3 LD X4
3) Y72 remains unchanged even 4 OUT Y70
Jump by CJ
when turning X5 ON/OFF. 5 FEND
6 P10
(2) When X3 is ON 7 LD X5
1) Jumps to P10 pointer by the CJ 8 OUT Y72

9 END
instruction.
2) Y70 remains unchanged when
turning X4 ON/OFF. Operation when X3 is ON
ON/OFF.
____
4 - 33
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST1
Program name MAIN
4.8 Practice Questions
LD to NOP
When X0 turns ON, Y70 is self-maintained, and Y74 and Y77 flicker alternately every
0.5 s.
When X1 turns ON, Y70 turns OFF and flickering of Y74 and Y77 also stops.
[Timing Chart]
X0
Y70
T0
Y74
T1
Y77
X1
0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s
Create the following program with the GX Developer filling in the blanks , and
verify the operation using the demonstration machine.
X0 2)
0 Y70
1)
Y70 3) K5
4 T0
4) K5
10 T1
Y74
5) Y70
16 Y77
4 - 34
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST2
Program name MAIN
SET, RST
When turning X0 ON, Y70 starts to flicker at one-second intervals and stops the
flickering for five seconds after flickering 10 times, then restart flickering.
The flickering of Y70 can be stopped by turning X1 ON.
X0
0 1)
M0 M1 T1 K10
2 T0
T0 K10
T1
T0
Y70
K10
C0
2) 3)
23 4)
K50
T2
T2
30 RST M1
5)
X1
36 6)
7)
1) 5)
2) 6)
3) 7)
4)
4 - 35
Hint
(1) The following shows the timing chart of the program.
X0
M0
X1
Restart
T0-contact
1s
T1-contact
1s
1s
Y70
1s 1s 5s
C0-contact
C0 counter 1. 2. ··············· 10. 1. 2.0.
(2) The following shows the basic flickering ladder and its timing chart.
[Ladder] [Timing Chart]

K10 Start
T1 T0-
T0 contact
1s
K10
T0
T1-
T1 contact 1s
1s
REFERENCE
The flickering ladder can be created using the special relay that generates clock as
shown below.
Other than the SM413 (2-s clock), the following
K10 can be used.
SM413 (2-s clock)
T0 SM409 (0.01-s clock)
SM410 (0.1-s clock)
SM411 (0.2-s clock)
[Timing Chart] SM412 (1-s clock)
SM414 (2n-s clock)
Y70
1s 1s 1s SM415 (2-nms clock)
Starts from OFF when the PLC is reset or the
power is turned ON.
4 - 36
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST3
Program name MAIN
PLS, PLF
Y70 starts to switch between ON and OFF alternately upon detecting a rising edge of
X0 signal, and a falling edge of the signal triggers Y71 to do the same operation as
Y70 does.
[Timing Chart]
X0
Y70
Y71
X0
0 1) M0
2) M1
M0 Y70
5 Y70
M0 Y70
M1 Y71
11 Y71
M1 Y71
1)
2)
4 - 37
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST4
Program name MAIN
CJ, CALL, RET, FEND

Y70 and Y71 flicker for 0.5 s alternately when X7 is OFF, and when X7 is ON, Y72 and
Y73 flicker for 1.0 s alternately. Turning X0 ON resets the currently flickering Y70 to
Y73.
Create the following program filling in the blanks , and verify the program with
the demonstration machine.
T0 K9999
T0
T200 K9999
T200
X7
CJ 1)
SM401 T11 K5
T10
T10 K5
T11
Flip flop ladder
Y70
T10
Y71
X0
2) P10
F3
3)
SM401 T20 K10
P0 T21
T21 K10
T20
Flip flop ladder
Y72
T21
Y73
X0
4) P10
5)
SM401
P10 RST Y70
F3
RST F3
Y71
RST F3
Y72
RST F3
Y73
6)
4 - 38
Hint
1)
START
2)
3)
Y <CJ P0>
X7 ON? 4)
5)
N
P0 6)
Y70 & Y71 Y72 & Y73
0.5-s flickering 1-s flickering
Y Y
X0 ON? X0 ON?
N N
P10
Reset Y70 Subroutine
to Y73 program
<FEND>
<FEND>
END
4 - 39
Chapter 4 Practice Question Answers
Question
Answers
No.
1) Y70
2) X1
1 3) T1
4) T0
5) Y74
1) SET M0
2) C0
3) Y70
2 4) SET M1
5) RST C0
6) RST M0
7) RST C0
1) PLS
3
2) PLF
1) P0
2) CALL
3) FEND
4
4) CALL
5) FEND
6) RET
4 - 40
CHAPTER 5 BASIC INSTRUCTION Part 2
5.1 Notation of Numbers (Data)
The PLC CPU converts all the input signals into ON or OFF signals (logical 1 or 0,
respectively) to store and process them, and performs the numeric operation using the
numeric value stored with the logical 1 or 0 (binary numbers = BIN).
In our everyday life, on the other hand, a decimal system is most commonly used
because it is easier to understand. Therefore, decimal-to-binary conversion or the
reverse is required whenever you write/read (monitor) numbers to/from the PLC. The
programming system and some instructions have the function of performing the
conversion.
This section explains how numbers (data) are expressed in decimal, binary,
hexadecimal and binary-coded decimal notation (BCD), and how the conversion is
made.
Decimal
• A decimal number system consists of ten single-digit numbers: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
and 9 which represent the order and size (amount). The number after 9 is 10. The
number after 19 is 20 and so forth. Additional powers of 10 require the addition of
another positional digit.
• The following shows how a base-ten number (in this case 153) is represented.
153 = 100 + 50 + 3
= 1 x 100 + 5 x 10 + 3 x 1
= 1 x 102 + 5 x 101 + 3 x 100
Decimal (0 to 9) symbol
Base number 10 raised to the power of digit number
n .......Digit number (0,1,2…)
10 .......Decimal number
• The Q series PLC uses a symbol K when it expresses numbers in decimal notation.
5-1
Binary (BIN)
• The binary number is a base 2 method of counting in which only the digits 0 and 1
are used. When 1 is reached, counting begins at 0 again, with the digit to the left
being incremented. The two digits 0 and 1 are referred to as bits.
Binary Decimal
0 0
1 1
10 2
11 3
100 4
101 5
110 6
111 7
1000 8
…
…
• Let’s look at how the binary number shown below is converted to decimal.
"10011101"
The diagram below depicts the binary number with the powers of two written beneath
it. The same incrementing pattern as the decimal system goes for the binary system
except for the difference of the radix. Since the binary method uses only 0 and 1
digits, it has more carries than the decimal method.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit number
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 Binary symbol
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Base number 2 raised to
= Bit value
the power of digit number
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
From the diagram, we see that the binary number can be broken down as:
1×128 0×64 0×32 1×16 1×8 1×4 0×2 1×1
So, the equivalent decimal number is:

128 16 8 4 1=157
The decimal equivalent of a binary number can be calculated by adding together

each digit 1 multiplied by its power of 2.
5-2
Hexadecimal
• The hexadecimal (often called hex for short) is a numeral system with a radix of 16
usually written using the symbols 0-9 and A-F. The A-F represent 10-15 respectively
as shown in the table below. When F is reached, counting begins at 0 again, with the
digit to the left being incremented just like the decimal and binary system.
Decimal Hexadecimal Binary
0 0 0
1 1 1
2 2 10
3 3 11
4 4 100
5 5 101
6 6 110
7 7 111
8 8 1000
9 9 1001
10 A 1010
11 B 1011
12 C 1100
13 D 1101
14 E 1110
15 F 1111
16 10 10000
17 11 10001
18 12 10010
…
…
19101 4A9D 0100 1010 1001 1101
3 2 1 0 Digit number
n ........Digit number
4 A 9 D Hex symbol
16 ....... Hexadecimal
3 2 1 0
=(4)×16 (A)×16 (9)×16 (D)×16
=4×4096 10×256 9×16 13×1
=19101
• One hex digit is equivalent to 4 bits of binary.

• The Q series PLC uses a symbol “H” when it expresses numbers in hex notation.
• The hex system is used to represent the specific numbers of the following devices.
• Input and output (X, Y)
• Input and output of function (FX, FY)
• Link relay (B)
• Link register (W)
• Special relay for link (SM)
• Special register for link (SW)
• Link direct devices (Jn X, Jn Y, Jn B, Jn SB, Jn W, Jn SW)
5-3
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)
• The binary-coded decimal is a code in which a string of four binary digits represents a
decimal number.
A decimal number 157, for example, is expressed as shown below in BCD.
2 1 0 Digit number
1 5 7 Decimal
(100) (10) (1) Place (digit)
0001 0101 0111 BCD

842 8 2 8 Values allocated
to each digit
• In BCD, decimal numbers (0 to the biggest 4-digit number; 9999) can be represented
by 16 bits.
The diagram below shows the bit values allocated to each digit of BCD.
Thousand digits
Hundred digits
Ten digits
Unit digits
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
8000
4000
1000
2000
200
800
400
100
80
40
20
10
1
4
2
• The BCD is used for the following signals.
1) Output signals of digital switches
2) Signals of seven-element display (digital display)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1(0) (1) (0) (1) (0) (1) (0) (1) (0) (1)
2(0) (0) (1) (1) (0) (0) (1) (1) (0) (0)
4(0) (0) (0) (0) (1) (1) (1) (1) (0) (0)
8(0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (1) (1)
COM
BCD Code Digital Switch
5-4
How to Convert Decimal to Binary
A decimal number 157, for example, is converted to binary as shown below.
1)
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Bit
157 value
- 128
29
- 16
13
- 8
5
- 4
1
- 1
0
2)
Quotient Remainder
2 157
2 78 1
2 39 0
2 19 1
2 9 1
2 4 1
2 2 0
1 0
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
How to Convert Decimal to Hex

A decimal number 157, for example, is converted to hex as shown below.
1)
16 157 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
9 ...13(D)
9 D
5-5
Valid Numbers for Q series PLC
• 8 bits is usually called 1 byte and 16 bits (2 bytes) is called 1 word.
1 bit
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
1 byte
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
1 word (2 bytes)
• Each register of word devices in the MELSEC-Q PLC consists of 16 bits.

• Data register D
D0
• Current timer T value
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
1
• Current counter C value
• File register R Binary digit value
• Link register W
etc.
• The following two ranges of numbers can be processed using 16 bits (1 word).
1) 0 to 65535
2) -32768 to +32767
• The MELSEC-Q PLC uses the 2) range.
The negative numbers adopt two’s complement to positive numbers (1+0+32767).
• In the two’s complement, each binary bit is inverted, and then 1 is added to the lower bits.
Example)
Negative 1 is represented as shown below using two’s complement:
1 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Invert all the bits
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
+ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Add 1 to the least

significant bit
-1 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
The most significant bit indicates the sign. If the bit is 1,

the bits contain a negative number in two's complement form.
5-6
(Binary Coded Decimal) BCD (Binary) BIN (Decimal) K (Hexadecimal) H
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0 0000
00000000 00000001 00000000 00000001 1 0001
00000000 00000010 00000000 00000010 2 0002
00000000 00000011 00000000 00000011 3 0003
00000000 00000100 00000000 00000100 4 0004
00000000 00000101 00000000 00000101 5 0005
00000000 00000110 00000000 00000110 6 0006
00000000 00000111 00000000 00000111 7 0007
00000000 00001000 00000000 00001000 8 0008
00000000 00001001 00000000 00001001 9 0009
00000000 00010000 00000000 00001010 10 000A
00000000 00010001 00000000 00001011 11 000B
00000000 00010010 00000000 00001100 12 000C
00000000 00010011 00000000 00001101 13 000D
00000000 00010100 00000000 00001110 14 000E
00000000 00010101 00000000 00001111 15 000F
00000000 00010110 00000000 00010000 16 0010
00000000 00010111 00000000 00010001 17 0011
00000000 00011000 00000000 00010010 18 0012
00000000 00011001 00000000 00010011 19 0013
00000000 00100000 00000000 00010100 20 0014
00000000 00100001 00000000 00010101 21 0015
00000000 00100010 00000000 00010110 22 0016
00000000 00100011 00000000 00010111 23 0017
00000001 00000000 00000000 01100100 100 0064
00000001 00100111 00000000 01111111 127 007F
00000010 01010101 00000000 11111111 255 00FF
00010000 00000000 00000011 11101000 1000 03E8
00100000 01000111 00000111 11111111 2047 07FF
01000000 10010101 00001111 11111111 4095 0FFF
00100111 00010000 10000 2710
01111111 11111111 32767 7FFF
11111111 11111111 1 FFFF
11111111 11111110 2 FFFE
10000000 00000000 32768 8000
5-7
Demonstration Machine Configuration & Input/Output No.
CPU module Output Module

Power Supply
Input module
Module
Base Unit Q3 8
QCPU QCPU * QX QY Q64 Q62

Q61P-A1 (No. 1) (No. 2) 42 42P AD DA
(64 (64 (16 (16
points)points) points)points)
*Not used for the practices instructed in this text book.

Keep it in off state.
X0 Y40
to to
RS-232Cable X3F Y7F
Peripheral device
I/0 Panel
Y6F Y60 Y5F Y50 Y4F Y40

Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70
Y7F Y7E Y7D Y7C Y7B Y7A Y79 Y78
X3F X30 X2F X20

X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
ON 1 9 4 2 4 1 3 6 MELSEC-Q
OFF
XF XE XD XC XB XA X9 X8 A/D INPUT D/A OUTPUT
ON
OFF
5-8
5.2 Transfer Instruction
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QB-11
Program name MAIN
5.2.1 MOV (P) 16-bit data transfer
K50
X7 T0
0 T0
K1500
T0
C10
X1
13 RST C10
S D 1
X2
18 MOV T0 D0
X3
21 MOVP C10 D1
X4 2
24 MOVP K157 D2
X5 3
27 MOVP H4A9D D3
1 • As soon as the input condition goes active, the current value of timer T0 is
transferred to the data register D0.
S …Source, D …Destination
• The current T0 value is stored in the register in binary form and transferred to the
data register D0 without changing the form.
T0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 45
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
2 • When the input condition goes active, the decimal number 157 is transferred to the
data register D2 and stored in the register binary form. The decimal number (K) is
automatically converted to binary before it is transferred.
K157
D2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
5-9
3 • When the input condition goes active, the 4A9DH is transferred to the data register
D3.
H4A9D
(4) (A) (9) (D) Hex numbers

D3 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Binary bit
32768
16384
64
32
16
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
8
4
2
1
weight
Difference Between MOV & MOVP

The P of MOVP stands for a pulse.
• Use the MOV instruction when the target data is changing and needs to be read
frequently.
To read the fixed data such as setting data, or data required to identify the cause of
abnormal condition, use the MOVP instruction.
• The following both of programs function the same.
X4 X4
MOVP K157 D2 PLS M1
M1
MOV K157 D2
Applicable Device Basic number of
Intelligent
Constant
Pointer
Internal device File MELSECNET/10 Index

Level
steps
Digit
function
module
Un G
S
MOV S D *
D
* The number of steps varies by the device used.
5 - 10
Check Operation The CPU is in RUN
Input X2, X3, X4, X5, and X7 is ON.
• Monitor the data stored in the data register D0 to D3.

• After writing the data to the PLC, select [Online] [Monitor] [Device batch].
The Device batch monitor dialog box appears.
• Enter "D0" in the Device batch monitor dialog box and click the Start monitor
button.
Enter "D0".
Click after
entering the
device number.
5 - 11
Current values of timer
and counter. (They changes.)
A decimal number 157 is stored.
A decimal number equivalent

to a 4A9DH .
Indicates ON/OFF state of each bit in the word devices.

(Binary digit 0)
(Binary digit 1)
(4) (A) (9) (D)

D3 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 H4A9D
Binary bit
16
64
32
256
512
8192
4096
2048
128
1024
16384
1
weight
Sign bit
19101
5 - 12
• Change the displayed decimal numbers into hex.
Select hex in the device batch monitoring dialog box.
[Device Batch Monitor Window]
• Change the display format to the corresponding binary codes

Select Bit in the device batch monitoring dialog box.
[Device Batch Monitor Window]

Numbers in D1 Numbers in D0
Numbers in D3 Numbers in D2
5 - 13
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX7
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
Create the following ladder with the GX Developer and write it to the CPU of the
demonstration machine to check if the MOV instruction works properly.
X0
0 MOV K200 D0
MOV D0 D1
X1
5 RST D0
RST D1
Operating Procedure
operations.

• How to alter the
Follow the procedure given below to alter the transfer instruction.
transfer instruction
Example: Change the transfer data K200 of [MOV K200 D0] to K100
1) Double-click the instruction to be changed.
2) A ladder input window appears.
3) Move the cursor to "2" of "MOV K200 D0" and write "1" over the "2".
4) Click the OK button on the ladder input window.
All data exist in can be changed using the above method.

Be sure to make the changes in overwrite mode. If "Insert" is displayed in the
lower right portion of the screen, press the Insert key to change it to
overwrite.
5) When finished, click on the toolbar.
5 - 14
Operation Practice
Check that "200" is displayed under both D0 and D1 on the monitor screen when X0
on the control panel of the demonstration machine is turned ON.
X0
0 MOV K200 D0
200
MOV D0 D1
200 200
X1
5 RST D0
RST D1
10 END
When X0 turns ON, the values

of D0 and D1 become 200.
5 - 15
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QB-12
Program name MAIN
5.2.2 BIN (P) BCD BIN data conversion instruction
Operations to read and write data from 35 steps onward

K50
X7 T0
0 T0
K1500
T0
C10
S D
X0
30 BIN K4X20 D5
X0
34 MOV K4X20 D6
Check the difference between

BIN and MOV instructions.
• When the input condition is activated, the data in the device designated as S is
automatically judged as a BCD code, and converted into binary to be transferred to
the device designated as D .
8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1
S BCD 9999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Thousand digits Hundred digits Ten digits Unit digits

Converted to binary
163848192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
D BIN 9999 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Becomes 0.
• As the ordinary digital switches generate BCD codes, the BIN instruction can be used
to write data of the digital switches to the PLC.
4096
512 1 2 3 4 Digital switch
32
16
+ 4 8 4 2 8 4 1 8 4 8 2 1
K4X20
4660
X2B
X2D
X2F
X2A
X27
X26
X25
X24
X23
X22
X21
X20
X2E
X2C
X29
X28
D6
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 When the BCD code is input
without conversion.
· ·
256
64
32
512
8192
4096
2048
128
1024
16384
16
1024
128
64 D5
16 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 When the BCD is converted
+ 2
to binary code.
8192
4096
32
64
16384
2048
16
256
512
· ·
128
1024
1234
5 - 16
K4X20
• As each of the word devices D (data register), T (timer current value), and C (counter
current value) consist of 16 bits (1 word), transferring the data is performed in units of
device.
• Using 16 bit devices (such as X, Y, and M) allows you to handle 16-bit data. To do
that, the numbers allocated to the 16 bit devices must be in consecutive order.
• Four bit devices allow you to handle data in units of 4 bits.
1 2 3 4 Place (digit)
8 4 2 8 4 1 8 4 8 2 1 K4 X20
X2D
X2C
X2E
X2B
X2A
X2F
X29
X28
X27
X26
X25
X24
X23
X22
X21
X20
First Number
Specify to read K2X28 K1X20
Read one-digit data "4".
two-digit data "12". (X2F to X28) (X23 to X20)
K2X20
Read two-digit data "34".
(X27 to X20)
K3X20
Read three-digit data "234".
(X2B to X20)
K4X20
Read four-digit data "1234".
(X2F to X20)
As long as four bit devices to read 4-digit data are in consecutive order, any bit device can be the first one.
• Other bit devices can be used in the same way as described above.
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
(Internal relay M) 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
K2M6 K1M0
K3M5
A sample program that performs data input by digital switches is provided in

Appendix 85.
Applicable Device
MELSECNET/10(H) Intelligent Basic number of steps

Constant
Pointer
Internal device File Index

Level
Digit
Direct function
(system user) register register
Jn module
Un G
S K1
BIN S D to 3
D
K4
5 - 17
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QB-13
Program name MAIN
5.2.3 BCD (P) BIN BCD data conversion instruction
K50
X7 T0
0 T0
K1500
T0
C10
S D
X6
37 BCD T0 K2Y40
BCD C10 K4Y50
• When the input condition is activated, data in the device designated as S is

automatically judged as a BIN code, and converted into BCD to be transferred to the
device designated as D .
163848192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
S BIN 9999 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Must be set to "0" BCD conversion
8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1

D BCD 9999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Thousand digits Hundred digits Ten digits Unit digits
• As the ordinary digital displays display numbers using BCD code, the BCD instruction
can be used to display data of the PLC (current timer and counter values, operation
results).
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
1024
8
128 C10
32 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1
16 (BIN)
8
4
+ 1
1213 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
(BCD)
Y5D
Y5C
Y5E
Y5B
Y5A
Y5F
Y59
Y58
Y57
Y56
Y55
Y54
Y53
Y52
Y51
Y50
K4Y50
8 4 2 8 4 1 8 4 2 8 4
Digital display
5 - 18
Allowable Range with BCD Instruction
• The allowable range of data to be displayed by the BCD instruction (to be converted
from BIN to BCD) is between 0 and 9999. Any data that falls outside the range cause
an error.
(Error code 50: OPERATION ERROR)
• When you want to display the current timer value that exceeds 9,999, use the DBCD
instruction. The instruction allows you to handle 8-digit data up to 99,999,999.
PLC Output Module
COM
Y4D
Y4C
Y4E
Y4B
Y4A
Y4F
Y53
Y52
Y51
Y50
Y49
Y48
Y47
Y46
Y45
Y44
Y43
Y42
Y41
Y40
8000
4000
2000
1000
80
40
20
10
80000
40000
20000
10000
800
400
200
100
8
4
2
1
Output Power
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
K18000
X3
0 T5
SM400(ON at all times)

2 DBCD T5 K5Y40
Applicable Device

MELSECNET/10(H) Intelligent
Constant
Pointer
Level
Digit
Direct function
(system user) register register
Jn module
Un G
S K1
BCD S D to 3
D
K4
5 - 19
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX8
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
Create the following ladder with GX Developer and write it to the CPU of the
demonstration machine to check if the BCD instruction works properly.
X0 K10
0 C0
BCD C0 K2Y40
X1
8 RST C0
Operating Procedure

Operation Practice
Check that the current value of C0 is displayed on the Y40 to Y47 BCD digital displays
when the X0 on the control panel is turned ON several times. The C0 is reset by
turning the X1 ON.
Y5F to Y5C Y5B toY58 Y57 to Y54 Y53 to Y50 Y4F to Y4C Y4B to Y48 Y47 to Y44 Y43 to Y40
0 - 10
Displays the value of C0
BCD Didital Display
____
5 - 20
5.2.4 Example of specifying digit for bit devices and data transfer
Program Example Process

When the destination D is a word device
X3 X2 X1 X0
S D
K1X0 1 1 0 1
MOVP K1X0 D0
Become 0.
• Source: Source device b15 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
• Destination: Destination device D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
When the source S is a word device

b15 b8 b7 b0
S D D0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
MOV D0 K2M100
M115 M108 M107 M100
K2M100 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
No change.
When the source S is a constant

1 2 3 4
S D
MOV H1234 K2M0 H1234 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
M15 M8 M7 M0
K2M0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
No change. 3 4
When the source S is a bit device

M15 M8 M7 M4 M3 M0
S D
K1M0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
MOV K1M0 K2M100 0
M115 M108 M107 M104 M103 M100
K2M100 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
No change. 0s are Data of M3

transferred. to M0 are
transferred.
5 - 21
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QB-14
Program name MAIN
5.2.5 FMOV (P) FMOV (Batch transfer of the same data)
BMOV (P) BMOV (Batch transfer of the block data)
S D n
X3
0 FMOVP K365 D0 K8
X4
5 FMOVP K7000 D8 K16
S D n
X5
10 BMOVP D0 D32 K16
X6
15 FMOVP K0 D0 K48
Operation Practice
Input condition S D n
FMOVP K365 D0 K8
FMOV
• When the input condition is activated, the FMOV instruction starts to transfer the data
specified in S to the specified number ( n ) of devices starting from the device
specified in D .
Example The FMOV instruction performs the following operation when X3 is
turned ON.
D
365 D0
S
365 D1 n
K365 365
365 D2 8 devices (K8)
365 D7
• FMOV instruction is useful when clearing many data all at once.
Example
Input condition Equal
Input condition
FMOV K0 D0 K8 RST D0
RST D1
RST D7
Only one FMOV instruction can be substituted for many RST instructions as shown
above.
5 - 22
BMOVP D0 D32 K16
BMOV
• When the input condition goes active, the BMOV instruction performs the batch
transfer of the data stored in the specified number ( n ) of devices starting from the
device specified in S , to the specified number ( n ) of devices starting from the
device specified in D .
Example The BMOV instruction performs the following operation when X5 is

turned on.
S D
D0 365 365 D32
...
...
...
...
...
D7 365 365 D39

D8 7000 7000 D40
...
...
...
...
...
D15 7000 7000 D47
• BMOV instruction is useful in the following situations:

• When filing a logging data
• For saving important data (e.g. data for auto-driving or measured data) into the
latch area. This allows you to avoid data loss in the event of a power failure. Using
the instruction, set to transfer the important data to data registers which have been
set to live after the shut down.
Available device

MELSECNET/10 (H) Intelligent
Constant
Pointer
Level
Digit
Direct function register
(system, user) register
Jn module
Un G
(Note) (Note) (Note)
S K1
FMOV S D n
to 4
BMOV S D n D
K4
n
(Note) Not available in BMOV instruction.
5 - 23
Operation Practice
• Write the program on the previous page to the CPU, and run the CPU.
• Follow the following steps to perform device batch monitoring. The contents from D0
to D47 can be monitored.
After writing to PLC Select [Online] [Monitor] [Device batch].
Enter the device "D0" in the device batch monitor dialogue box.
Select “Word” for the monitor type.
Click the Start monitor button.
Enter "D0". Select "Word".
After setting the device

and the monitor type,
click this button.
[Monitor screen]
1) Turn X3 ON.
The numeric value 365 is
sent to eight registers
starting from D0 to D7 all at
once.
2) Turn X4 ON.
The numeric value 7000 is
sent to 16 registers starting
from D8 to D23 all at once.
3) Turn X5 ON.
The contents of the 16
registers starting from D0 to
D15 are sent to the 16
D47 all at once.
4) Turn X6 ON.
"0" is sent to the all 48
D47 all at once. In other
words, all the 48 registers
are cleared to 0 at a time.
5 - 24
Reference
• If a bit device is specified as D , the operation becomes as follows;
FMOV instruction
FMOV D0 K2Y40 K4
As D is specified
with two-digit numbers,
S
these data are ignored. D D
D0 (Example: when the content is 365.)
Y4F Y48 Y47 Y40

0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 n
4 devices
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 (K4)
D D
Y5F Y58 Y57 Y50

0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
• Among the device from Y40 to Y5F, the devices specified as "1" are output first.
• Programming as shown below allows you to turn ON the output of Y40 to Y5F all at
once by activating the input condition (1), or to turn OFF the output of Y40 to Y5F at
a time by activating the input condition (2).
Input condition
FMOV K255 K2Y40 K4
Input condition K255 bit pattern 0 0 0 0 00 00 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FMOV K0 K2Y40 K4
• When turning off bit devices in units of 4 bits;

16 bit devices or less MOV instruction e.g. MOV K0 K4M0
32 bit devices or less DMOV instruction e.g. DMOV K0 K8M0
More than 32 bit devices FMOV instruction e.g. FMOV K0 K4M0 K4
(Turns OFF 64 bit device)
BMOV instruction
)
S D n
Input condition
BMOV D0 K2Y40 K4
As D is specified
with two-digit numbers,
these data are ignored. D D
D0 3 0 5 1
Y4F to Y48 Y47 to Y40
D1 3 0 5 7 5 7 5 1
n
D D 4 pieces (K4)
D2 3 0 5 6
Y5F to Y58 Y57 to Y50
D3 3 0 5 5 5 5 5 6
• The product codes (hexadecimal numbers) are stored in the devices from D0 to D3
as shown above. The instruction is useful for displaying and monitoring the last two
digits that represent their types.
5 - 25
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX9
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
Create the ladder chart shown below using GX Developer, write the chart into the
demonstration machine, and confirm if the FMOV instruction is correctly performed.
X0
0 FMOV K200 D0 K5
X1
5 FMOV K0 D0 K5
Operating Procedure
The following procedures are the same as the Operating Procedure described in
Section 4.4.
Operation Practice
Make sure that the contents of the devices from D0 to D4 become 200s on the batch
monitor screen by turning X0 ON on the control panel of the demonstration machine.
The data in the devices are cleared by turning X1 ON.
Change the setting of the device batch monitor as shown below to display the
numbers in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary numbers.
Numeric value: decimal………..displays the numbers in decimal.
Numeric value: hexadecimal…..displays the numbers in hexadecimal.
Monitor type: bit…………………displays the numbers in binary.
5 - 26
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QB-15
Program name MAIN
5.3 Comparison Operation Instruction
= <> >
Size
comparison
>= < <=
K100
X3 SM413 (2 s clock)
0 C10
X4
6 BCD C10 K4Y40
SM400 (ON at all times) S1 S2
10 > K10 C10 Y70
S1 S2
15 <= K10 C10 Y71
19 = K20 C10 Y72
23 <> K30 C10 Y73
27 > K20 C10 Y74
< K40 C10
34 <= K25 C10 >= K35 C10 Y75
41 <= K10 C10 >= K20 C10 Y76
<= K40 C10 > K50 C10
55 = K100 C10 RST C10

X0
• The comparison operation instruction compares the data of source 1 ( S1 ) and source
2 ( S2 ), and brings the devices into conduction if the conditions are met.
• The instruction can be considered as one normally open ( ) as they are only
conducted when the conditions are met.
> K20 C10 Y74 Y74
< K40 C10
• = S1 S2 Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 agree.

• < S1 S2 Becomes conducted when source 1 is smaller than source 2.
• > S1 S2 Becomes conducted when source 1 is larger than source 2.
• <= S1 S2 Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 agree or when
source 1 is smaller than source 2.
• >= S1 S2 Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 agree or when
source 1 is larger than source 2.
• <> S1 S2 Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 do not agree.
5 - 27
Operation Practice
• Write the program to the CPU.
• Turn ON both X3 and X4.
• C10 starts to count (one count every two seconds). The current counted value is
displayed on the digital display (Y40 to Y4F).
• Make sure that the devices Y70 to Y76 turn ON as follows.
• The counter is designed to be reset every 200 s.

• In this way, the comparison instruction not only compares one data, but also specifies
the range. This function is commonly used for the program that judges the passing
status of products, etc.
Applicable device

Constant
Pointer
Level
Digit
direct function
(system, user) register register
Jn module
Un G
S1 K1
Comparison
instruction
S1 S2 to 3
S2
K4
5 - 28
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX10
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
Read the following ladder diagram from FD, write it to the demonstration machine,
and make sure that , instructions are correctly performed.
0s T0 3s Y70: ON, 2.7 s T0 3.3 s Y71: ON,
3s T0 6s Y72: ON
Y70:ON Y71:ON Y72:ON
T0:
0 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 6.0 s
X0
0 SET M0
M0 M10 K60
2 T0
T0
8 M10
M20
10 > K30 T0 Y70
< K27 T0 > K33 T0 Y71
< K30 T0 Y72
BCD T0 K2Y40
X1
33 RST M0
Operating Procedure
(1)Read data from FD

Read the project data stored in FD.
• Click on the tool bar.
Click
5 - 29
• Click beside "Project drive" and select [-a-] to display "SCHOOL" and the
path name.
• Double-click on "SCHOOL".
Click to display the pull-down menu.

Select [-a-].
After selecting the project drive,

double-click on "SCHOOL".
• Double-click on "QEX10". Once "QEX10" is displayed on the project name box,

click the Open button.
Click
After setting the project
name, click the button.
The following procedures are the same as the Operating Procedure in Section 4.4.
5 - 30
Operation Practice
• Turn X0 ON, and make sure that the program works properly.
X0
X0
0 SET M0
K60
2 T0
30
T0
8 M10
10 > K30 T0 Y70

30
< K27 T0 > K33 T0 Y71
30 30
< K30 T0 Y72
30
BCD T0 K2Y40
30
X1
33 RST M0
35 END
____
5 - 31
5.4 Arithmetic Operations Instruction
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QB-16
Program name MAIN
5.4.1 +(P) BIN 16 bit data addition
-(P) BIN 16 bit data subtraction
S D
X2
0 +P K5 D0
1
S1 S2 D
X3
4 +P D0 K100 D1
2
1 • The device content specified as D is added the device content specified as S ,

and the result is stored in D device every time the input condition is turned ON.
D S D
D0 + (5) D0
(Input condition)
First ON 0 (Assumption) + 5 5
Second ON 5 + 5 10
Third ON 10 + 5 15
D0 contents are changed
2 • The device content specified by S1 is added the device content specified by S2

and the result is stored in D device when the input condition is turned ON.
S1 S2 D
D0 + (100) D1
(Input condition)
ON 15 (Assumption) + 100 115
D0 contents are not changed.
CAUTION
• +P or
should always be used for add-subtract instructions.
-P
• When + or - is used for the instructions, add-subtract operation is
performed upon every scanning. To use + or - for the instructions,
operands must have been converted to pulse beforehand.
X2 X2
+P K5 D0 PLS M0
M0
+ K5 D0
REFERENCE
• The following two instructions work on the same principle in add-subtract operation.
(Addition)
+P K1 D0 INCP D0
(Subtraction)
-P K1 D2 DECP D2
5 - 32
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QB-17
Program name MAIN
X4
0 MOVP K1000 D2
S D
X5
3 -P K10 D2
3
S1 S2 D
X6
7 -P D2 K50 D3
4
3 • The device content specified as S is subtracted from the device content specified
as D , and the result is stored in D device every time the input condition is turned
ON.
D S D
D2 - (10) D2
(Input condition)
First ON 1000 - 10 990
(Assumption) - 10 980
Second ON 990 - 10 970
Third ON 980
D2 contents are changed.
4 • The device content specified as S2 is subtracted from the device content specified
as S1 and the result is stored in D device when the input condition is turned ON.
S1 S2 D
D2 - (50) D3
(Input condition)
ON 970 - 50 920
(Assumption)
D2 contents are not changed.
Applicable device
Intelligent
Constant
Pointer
Internal device File MELSECNET/10 Index

Level
Digit
function
(system, user) register (H) direct Jn register
module
Un G
Add-substract S S1 K1 3
instruction
S D
Add-substract S2 to
instruction
S1 S2 D
D K4 4
The basic number of steps becomes four steps for S1 S2 D type.
5 - 33
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX11
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
Create the ladder diagram shown below with GX Developer, write it to the
demonstration machine, and confirm if "+, - instructions" work properly.
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0
BINP K4X20 D1
+P D0 D1
X1
10 BINP K4X30 D0
BINP K4X20 D1
-P D0 D1
20 >= D1 K0 DBCD D1 K5Y40
26 < D1 K0 Y70
DMOV K0 K5Y40
Operating Procedure
The following procedures are the same as Operating Procedure described in
Section 4.4.
5 - 34
Operation Practice
(1) When X0 is turned ON, the addition of data in X30 to 3F and data in X20 to 2F is
performed, and the result is output to Y40 to Y53.
(2) When X1 is turned ON, the subtraction of data of X30 to 3F and data of X20 to 2F
is performed, and the result is output to Y40 to 53. When the result is negative
value, Y70 is turned ON while Y40 to 53 are cleared to 0.
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0
300
BINP K4X20 D1
400
+P D0 D1
300 400
X1
10 BINP K4X30 D0
300
BINP K4X20 D1
400
-P D0 D1
300 400
20 >= D1 K0 DBCD D1 K5Y40
400 400
26 < D1 K0 Y70
400
DMOV K0 K5Y40
34 END
+ D0 D1 = D1 + D0 D1
100 + 300 400
5 - 35
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QB-18
Program name MAIN
5.4.2 * (P) BIN 16 bit multiplication
/(P) BIN 16 bit division
X0
0 MOVP K2000 D0
S1 S2 D
X2 1
3 *P K30 D0 D10
S1 S2 D
X3 2
7 /P D0 K600 D20
1 • The device content specified by S1 is multiplied by the device content specified by

S2 ,and the result is stored in the device specified by D when the input condition is
turned ON.
S1 S2 D
K30 D0 D11 D10
30 x 2000 = 60000
16 bit (1 word) is not enough for storing the This device is handled as 32-bit register to
result of 16-bit data x 16-bit data. hold the result. Left-most bit of D10 (b15) is
Thus, D10 that is specified by the program not a sign bit.
and D11, which is the next device number, It is handled as a part of the data.
work as the holder of the result.
The instructions should be handled as 32-bit when programming using the calculation result of the
(P) instruction. (e.g. DMOV instruction, DBCD instruction)
5 - 36
2 • The device content specified by S1 is divided by the device content specified by S2
when the input condition is turned on, and the result is stored in the device specified
by D .
S1 S2 D
D0 K600 D20 D21
2000 ÷ 600 = 3 200
Quotient Remainder
and
Quotient goes to D20 specified by Remainder goes to D21, which is the
the program. next device number.
Digits after the decimal point of the operation result are ignored.
• If a bit device is specified as D , the quotient is stored, however, the remainder is not
saved.
• Examples when handling negative values are explained below.
Example -5 ÷ (-3) = 1, remainder
-2
5 ÷ (-3) = -1, remainder 2
• Examples when dividing a number by 0, or dividing 0 by a number are explained
below.
Example 0÷0
Error “OPERATION ERROR”
1÷0
0÷1 Both quotient and remainder are 0
Operation Practice
• Write the program to the CPU and run the program.
• Turn X0 ON and store "2000" (BIN value) into D0.
• Turn X2 ON. The following operation is performed.
If the "60000" (operation result of D11 and ) is handles as 16-bitD10
integral number and only D10 is monitored, "-5536" is displayed. To avoid this,
follow the procedures on the following pages.
S1 S2 D
K30 D0 = D11 D10
(30) (2000) (60000)
• Turn X3 ON.
S1 S2 D
D0 K600 = D21 D20
(2000) (600) (200) (3)
Remainder Quotient
Applicable device

Constant
Pointer

Level
Digit
direct function
(system, user) register register
Jn module
Un G
S1 K1 *
Multiply-division
instruction
S1 S2 D S2 to
D K4 4
The basic number of steps for multiplication instruction is three or four steps, and that for division instruction is four steps.
* The multiplication instruction varies depending on the device to be used.
5 - 37
• How to monitor 32-bit integral number data
If the operation result of the multiplication instruction is out of the range from 0 to 32,767,
the result cannot be displayed properly when the number is handled as 16-bit integral number and
the contents of the lower register are monitored in ladder.
To monitor those numbers correctly, follow the steps below (device registration monitor operation).
• Select [Online] [Monitor] [Entry data monitor].
• Click Register devices to show the device registration dialogue box.
Click this button to display

the device registration dialogue box.
Continued on the next page
5 - 38
Continued from the previous page
• Enter "D10" in the device edit box on the device registration dialogue box.
• Click on the display edit box, and select "32-bit integral number".
• Click the Register button. The items are displayed on the device registration monitor dialogue box.
• When complete, click the Cancel button to close the window.
1) Enter "D10".
3) After entering the device

and setting the display,
click "Register".
2) Click the button
and select
"32-bit integral number" 4) When complete,
from the pull-down menu. click "Cancel".
5) Click the Start monitor button.

Thus, 2 words of the operation result stored in D10 and D11 can be monitored.
Click this button to show the

operation result of D10 and D11.
5 - 39
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QEX12
Program name MAIN
Ladder Example
Create the ladder chart shown below with GX Developer, write it to the
demonstration machine, and make sure that "*, / instructions" can be performed
X0 properly.
0 BINP K4X30 D0
BINP K4X20 D1
*P D0 D1 D10
DBCDP D10 K8Y40

X1
13 BINP K4X30 D0
BINP K4X20 D1
/P D0 D1 D20
BCDP D20 K4Y50
BCDP D21 K4Y40
Operating Procedure
The following procedures are the same as the Operating Procedure described in
Section 4.4.
5 - 40
Operation Practice
(1) When X0 is turned ON, the data of X20 to 2F is multiplied by that of X30 to 3F, and
the result is output to Y40 to 5F.
(2) The data of X20 to 2F is divided by that of X30 to 3F when X1 is turned ON. Its
quotient is output to Y50 to 5F, and the remainder is output to Y40 to 4F.
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0
6
BINP K4X20 D1
3
*P D0 D1 D10
6 3 18
DBCDP D10 K8Y40
18
X1
13 BINP K4X30 D0
6
BINP K4X20 D1
3
/P D0 D1 D20
6 3 0
BCDP D20 K4Y50
0
BCDP D21 K4Y40
0
30 END
D0 x D1 = D10
6 x 3 = 18
As the operation result of this example is in the range from 0 to 32767, the result is displayed
properly even though the number is handled and monitored as 16-bit integral number.
Related Practice Question Practice Question 10, Practice Question 11
5 - 41
5.4.3 32-bit data instructions and their necessity
• The data memory of Q-series PLC, which consists of 16-bit, is a memory of 1-word
unit. The memory generally processes transfer, comparison, and arithmetic
operations in 1-word unit.
• Q-series PLC also supports 2-word (32-bit) unit. In this case, add "D" at the head of
each instruction to indicate that the instruction is handled as 2-word. The following
shows the examples:
1-word 2-word
Data
16-bit 32-bit
Instruction
MOV(P) DMOV(P)
Transfer BIN(P) DBIN(P)
BCD(P) DBCD(P)
<, >, < = D <, D >, D < =
Comparison
> =, =, < > D > =, D =, D< >
Four arithmetic + (P) D + (P)
operations - (P) D - (P)
* (P) D * (P)
/ (P) D / (P)
Available range of - 32768 0 - 2147483648
numbers to to to
32767 9999 2147483647
Numbers in parentheses are for 0
BIN (P), BCD (P) instructions. to
99999999
Numbers in parentheses are for
BIN (P), DBCD (P) instructions.
Available range of
K1 to K4 K1 to K8
digits
• The bit value of the 32-bit configuration is as follows:

b31 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · b16 b15 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · b0
-2147483648
1073741824
536870912
268435456
134217728
67108864
33554432
16777216
8388608
4194304
2097152
1048576
524288
262144
131072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
512
256
128
As in the case of handling 16-bit data, the PLC handles a 32-bit negative value in
two’s complement form. Therefore, the leftmost bit (B15 for 16-bit) is regarded as a
sign bit.
b31 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · b0 Allowable range
-2147483648 to 0 to 2147483647
Top bit If the bit is 0, the number is interpreted as a positive number.

(Sign bit) If the bit is 1, the number is interpreted as a negative number.
5 - 42
• Determine if the data should be handled in 2-word (32-bit) unit or not depending on
the data size.
In the following conditions, 2-word instructions must be used.
1) When the data size exceeds the range ( 32768 to 32767) that can be
dealt with by 1 word.
S D
DMOV K50000 D0
D1 D0 Stored in the two

50000 50000 contiguous devices.
Transferred
2) When transferring the result of 16-bit multiplication instruction (1-word

instruction).
S1 S2 D
* D0 D1 D10
D0 D1 D11 D10 The result of the

X multiplication is stored in
the two contiguous devices.
DBCD D10 K8Y40
D11 D10 8-digit Display (0 to 99999999)
BCD conversion
The result of the 32-bit data multiplication will be 64 bits.
3) When utilizing the result of 32-bit division instruction.
D/ D20 D30 D40
D21 D20 D31 D30 D41 D40

÷ (Quotient)
D43 D42
(Remainder)
DBCD D40 K8Y40 Displays quotient
DBCD D42 K8Y60 Displays remainder
5 - 43
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QB-19
Program name MAIN
5.4.4 Calculation examples of multiplication/division that include decimal points (in the case where an
arithmetic operation instruction " " or "/" is used)
*
Example 1 Calculation example to determine a circle's perimeter
Numeric value of the digital switch × 3.14
(K4X30) (Circle ratio)
Displays integral part and Displays decimal fraction part
(K8Y50) (K2Y48)
• Programming method
Specify the circle ratio as 314 (3.14 x 100), and divide the result by 100 afterward.
Example 2 Calculation example to handle decimal places (division example)
Numeric value of the digital switch ÷ 0.006
(K4X30)
Displays quotient and Displays remainder
(K8Y50) (K4Y40)
• Programming method
In order to deal with 0.006 as an integer 6, both the dividend and divisor have to be
multiplied 1,000 times.
X0 X1
Ordering Example 1
BINP K4X30 D0 Digital switch set value is taken into D0 .
calculation
*P D0 K314 D1 D0 x 314 → D2 D1
D/P D1 K100 D10 D2 D1 ÷ 100 → D11 D10 D13 D12

Quotient Remainder
(decimal fraction part)
DBCD D10 K8Y50 Displays integral part (quotient)
BCD D12 K2Y48 Displays decimal fraction part (remainder)
MOV K0 K2Y40
X1 X0
Ordering Example 2
BINP K4X30 D20 Digital switch set value is taken into D20 .
calculation
*P D20 K1000 D21 D20 x 1000 → D22 D21
D/P D21 K6 D30 D22 D21 ÷ 6 → D31 D30 D33 D32

Quotient Remainder
DBCD D30 K8Y50 Displays quotient by multiplying 1,000 times
BCD D32 K3Y44 Displays remainder by multiplying 1,000 times
REMARK
QCPU has instructions that can handle actual (floating point) operation data for
highly accurate operations.
As long as you use the instructions, you don’t have to pay careful attention
concerning the place of the decimal point as shown above.
5 - 44
5.5 Index Register, File Register
5.5.1 How to use index register Z
• The index register (Zn) is used to indirectly specify the device number. The result of
an addition of data in the index register and the directly specified device number can
be specified as the device number.
Example
D0Z0 Can be interpreted as D(0 + Z0)
Device number.
For example, if Z0 is 0, the device number becomes D0.
if Z0 is 50, the device number becomes D50.
• Z0 to Z15 can be used as the index register.

• The index register (Zn) is a word device that consists of 16 bits. The allowable data
size range is -32768 to +32767.
• Index modification can be applied to the following devices.
Bit device……… X, Y, M, L, S, B, F, Jn X, Jn Y, Jn B, Jn SB (e.g. K4Y40Z)
Word device …... T, C, D, R, W, Jn W, Jn SW, Jn G (e.g. D0Z)
Constant………. K,H (e.g. K100Z)
Pointer………… P
CAUTION
The index register cannot be used for indirectly specifying the timer or the counter
coil.
Example K100
TOZ
K50
COZ
5 - 45
Application Example
• The data is written to the data register whose number is specified with the digital
switch.
K3000
T2
0 T2
X0
5 BINP K2X20 Z0
MOVP T2 D0Z0
• Perform the device batch monitoring while conducting a check.

The operating procedure is the same as the one explained in Section 5.2.1.
Enter any two-digit number in the digital switch column (X27 to X20) and turn X0 ON.
5 0
X27 - X20
Z0 = 50
D0Z0 = D50
The current value of T2 is transferred to D50 column.
5 - 46
5.5.2 How to use file register R
• The file register (R) is a register that consists of 16 bits as well as the data register
(D).
• The file register applies to the standard RAM of the QCPU and the memory cards
(SRAM card, Flash card).
Stores the parameter program, device comment,

Program memory and device default value. (File register cannot be stored.)
Standard RAM Stores the file register from 1K to 32K.
Stores the parameter program, device comment,

Standard ROM and device default value. (File register cannot be stored.)
Stores the file register from 1K to 1018K.

Memory card The maximum number of the file register to be stored varies
depending on the memory card in use.
• The data in the file register remains after the reset operation or after the power is
turned off. To clear the data, write 0 to the file register by using the MOV(P)
instruction as such or write with GX Developer.
• Use [Write to PLC] of GX Developer or a sequence program to write to the standard
RAM or to the SRAM card.
• Use [Write to PLC (Flash ROM)] of GX Developer to write to the Flash card.
• Specify the area of the file register in 1K-point (1,024-point) unit using the parameter.
Application Example
• Set 32-K points of the file register R0 to R32767, and use them with the program.
• Follow the steps below to register the parameter.
1) Double-click [Parameter] on the project list.

1) Double-click!
2) [PLC parameter], [Network param], and

2) Double-click! [Remote pass] appear. Double-click [PLC
parameter].
5 - 47
3) The Qn(H) Parameter dialogue box appears.

Click the <PLC file> tab on the box.
3) Click!
4) Check the box beside "Use the same file name

as the program." of the file register field, and
select "Memory card(RAM)" for the
corresponding memory.
4) Select!
5) When complete, click the End button.
5) Click!
6) Right-click on the "Device memory" from the

project data list, and click [New].
6) Click!
5 - 48
7) Click!

8) Select!
9) The device memory main screen appears.

9) Enter "R0", and click!
Enter "R0" in the device edit box, and click the
Display button.
10) Enter values! 10) Check to see that the device name is
changed to "R". Enter "100", "200", "300",
and "400" in R1, R2, R3, and R4 columns,
respectively.
(To clear, enter "0".)
5 - 49
11) Select [Online] [Write to PLC] to display the

Write to PLC dialogue box, and select
"parameter" on the File selection tab.
12) Click the Execute button to start writing.

11) Click! 12) Click!
As the demonstration machine has two CPUs
installed, it is necessary to write the parameter after
setting the parameter for the Multiple CPU. (This
procedure is not required when only one CPU is
installed.)
For details on the setting procedure, refer to Multiple
CPU setting of the parameter in Section 3.2.
13) Select "memory card (RAM)" for "target

memory" on the Write to PLC dialogue box.
13) Click!
14) Click the "MAIN" box under the file register on

the File selection tab.
Click the Execute button to start writing.
14) Click!
• Check that 100 to 400 are written in the R1 to R4 columns by using the device batch
monitor.
The operating procedure is the same as the one described in Section 5.2.1.
• To write or clear the data of the file register with the program, write the program
below.
For the operating procedure, refer to Section 4.4.
Writing
X0starts when X0 is turned on, and the data is cleared when X1 is turned on.
0 MOV K173 R5
X1 The file register data of the SRAM card is retained

3 MOV K0 R5 with the battery. Resetting or turning off the power
does not clear the data. To clear, write "0".
5 - 50
5.6 External Setting of the Timer/Counter Set Value, and the External Display of the Current Value
The timer and the counter can be specified either by K (decimal constant) directly or by
D (data register) indirectly. Programming as described below allows the set value to be
changed with the external digital switch.
X0 Digital switch
0 BINP K4X20 D5 X2F to X20
D5 1 2 3 4
X4
4 T10
T10 D5 1 2 3 4
9 Y70 D5
SM400 T10
11 BCD T10 K4Y40
X1
Digital display
15 BINP K4X30 D6
Y4F to Y40
D6
X5
19 C10
Displays the current value of T10.
C10
24 Y71
X6
26 RST C10
SM400
31 BCD C10 K4Y50
• This program is saved in the text FD as Project name QTC

Read it to GX Developer, and write it to the PLC to see if it works.
Operating Procedure
The step (1) of the following procedure is the same as that of Operating Procedure
described in Section 5.3.
The steps (2) to (4) of the following procedure are the same as that of
Operating Procedure described in Section 4.4.
(1) Read data in FD

5 - 51
Operation Practice
(1) External setting of the timer set value and display of the current value
Set the timer set value in the digital switch (X20 to 2F), and turn the X0 switch
ON.
When the X4 switch is turned ON, Y70 turns ON after the set time specified
with the digital switch elapses. (e.g. Y70 turns ON after 123.4 s elapsed if you
entered 1 2 .)3 4
The digital display (Y40 to 4F) shows the current value of the timer T10.
(2) External setting of the counter set value and display of the current value
Set the counter set value for the digital switch (X30 to 3F), and turn the X1
switch ON.
Turn the X5 switch ON and OFF repeatedly. Y71 turns ON when the number
of
times that X5 is turned ON reaches the number specified with the digital
switch.
The digital display (Y50 to 5F) shows the current value of the timer C10 (the
number of the times that X5 is turned on).
Turning the X6 switch on clears the counter C10 to 0. If the contact C10 is
already turned on, the contact is released.
5 - 52
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST5
Program name MAIN
5.7 Practice Question
5.7.1 Practice Question (1) MOV
Temporarily send the eight input conditions (X0 to X7) to D0, and then output them
toY70 to Y77.
(e.g. Y70 turns ON when X0 is turned ON)
X0 Y70
X1 Y71
X2 Y72
X3 Y73
X4 Y74
X5 Y75
X6 Y76
X7 Y77
Fill in the blank square of the program below, create a program with GX Developer and
check to see if it works properly with the demonstration machine.
SM401
0 MOV 1) F3
D0
MOV D0 2)
F3
Hint
CPU
(Input module) D0 (Output module) 1)

X0 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y70 2)
X1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y71
X2 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y72
X3 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y73
K2X0 K2Y70
X4 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y74
X5 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y75
X6 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y76
X7 0/1 0/1 0/1 Y77
MOV MOV CPU takes in the input signal as "1" when the signal is ON,
and imports as "0" when it is OFF.
The output module turns ON upon outputting "1",
and turns OFF upon outputting "0".
Comparison
The program created by the sequence instruction without MOV instruction is shown on
the next page.
X0
0 Y70
X1
2 Y71
X2
4 Y72
X3
6 Y73
X4
8 Y74
X5
10 Y75
X6
12 Y76
X7
14 Y77
5 - 53
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST6
Program name MAIN
5.7.2 Practice Question (2) BIN,BCD conversion
Show the number of times that X1 is turned ON on the display connected to Y40 to
Y4F in BCD. The counter (C0) set value should be input with the digital switch (X20 to
X2F) after X0 is turned ON.
X1 1)
0 C0
X0
5 BIN 2) D0
SM401
9 3) C0 4)
X2
13 RST C0
F3
Hint
CPU
BCD value BIN value
BIN D0
BCD digital switch

X20 to X2F(K4X20)
Set value
BCD value
C0 BCD
X1:ON/OFF
BIN value BCD digital display
Y40 to Y4F(K4Y40)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5 - 54
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST7
Program name MAIN
5.7.3 Practice Question (3) FMOV
Create a program that works as follows:

1) 64 outputs (Y40 to Y7F) turn ON when X0 is turned ON.
2) 64 outputs (Y40 to Y7F) turn OFF when X0 is turned OFF.
X0
0 FMOV K255 1) 2)
X0
5 FMOV 3) K2Y40 K8
Hint
CPU The constant should be output from the CPU in binary form.
(Output cards)
255
1 Y40 Outputting 255 from Y40, for example.
1
Y41 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
1
1 Y42 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 + 128 = 255
1 Y43
1 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40
1 Y44
1 Y45 The question deals with 64-point (Y40 to Y7F) outputs.
How many blocks are required for 255 on an output unit basis?
Y46
Y47
MOV
1)
2)
3)
Comparison
The program created by the sequence instruction without FMOV instruction is shown
below. The number of steps used is 130.
X0
0 Y40
Y41
Y42
Y7F
5 - 55
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST8
Program name MAIN
5.7.4 Practice Question (4) Comparison instruction
Use the two BCD digital switches, perform (A-B) operation and show the result on the
BCD digital display (Y40 to Y4F).
(X3F to X30) (X2F to X20) (Y4F to Y40)

A B
Display the result of A - B calculation on the BCD display
of Y40 to Y4F. If the result is a negative number, however,
make sure that the display turns to 0 and the LED of Y70 turns on.
Fill in the blank square of the program below and check to see if it works properly with
X0
0 1) K4X20 D0
2) K4X30 D1
-P D0 D1
3) K0 D1 SET Y70
F3
MOV K0 K4Y40
4) K0 D1 BCD D1 K4Y40
RST Y70
F3
Hint
The constant should be output from the CPU in binary form.
− D0 D1 = D1 - D0 → D1
1)
2)
3)
4)
5 - 56
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST9
Program name MAIN
5.7.5 Practice Question (5) +,-
When X0 turns ON, create a program that imports the value specified by the digital
switch (X20 to X2F) into D3 and D2 (32-bit data), adds them to D1 and D0 and shows
the result on the display (Y40 to Y5F).
Also, when X1 turns ON, the program should import the value specified by the digital
switch (X20 to X2F) into D5 and D4, subtract them from D1 and D0 and show the
result on the display. If the result becomes a negative number, the program should turn
Y77 ON and show the absolute value on the display in two’s complement form.
Fill in the blank square of the program below and check to see if it works properly with
X0
0 DBIN K4X20 D2
Adds the external set value to D0.
1) D2 D0
Only displayed
9 D<= K0 D0 DBCD D0 K8Y40 when the result is a positive number.
X1
17 DBIN K4X20 D4 Subtracts the external set value
from D0.
2) D4 D0
X0
26 PLS M1
F3
X1
M1
30 D> K0 D0 DCML D0 D8 If the result is a negative number,
it is converted and displayed
D+P K1 D8 as a positive number (determines
the negative absolute value).
DBCD D8 K8Y40
Y77 Outputs that the number is a negative.

X7
50 DMOV K0 D0 Clears D0 and D1.
1)
2)
Reference
Complement (Deny transfer)
M1 D1 D0
D> K0 D0 DCML D0 D8
b31 b30 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b2 b1 b0
Before executing DCML
(negative value) 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
D + P K1 D8
D9 D8
The absolute value is determined
After executing DCML 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
by calculating two's complement
of D0 and D2 (32-bit data). D9 D8
After executing both D + P
(absolute value)
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0
If 16-bit data is a negative number, it is changed to the absolute value using NEG
(two’s complement) instruction.
REMARK
The CML instruction inverts S bit pattern and transfers it to D when the input
condition is turned ON.
Input condition S D
CML D0 D10
5 - 57
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST10
Program name MAIN
*, /
The multiplication/division data can be set by turning X0 ON. When X2 is turned ON,
the BIN multiplication of the value specified with the digital switch X20 to X27 and X30
to X37 is performed, and a division is performed when X3 is turned ON. The result of
the multiplication or the quotient of the division is displayed on the BCD display of Y40
to Y4F, and the remainder is displayed on the BCD display of Y60 to Y67.
(X30 to X37) × (X20 to X27) (Y40 to Y4F)
(X30 to X37) ÷ (X20 to X27) (Y40 to Y4F)……(Y60 to Y67)
X0
0 1) K2X30 D0
2) K2X20 D1
X2 X3
7 3) D0 D1 D2
X3 X2
12 4) D0 D1 D2
SM401
18 5) D2 K4Y40
6) D3 K2Y60
Hint
D0 D1 D3 D2
BIN-
multiplication
BIN value BIN value 0 BIN value
D0 D1 D2 D3
BIN-division BIN value BIN value BIN value BIN value
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
5 - 58
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QTEST11
Program name MAIN
5.7.7
*
Practice Question (7) D , D/
Create a program that performs the BIN-multiplication of the value specified with the
5-digit digital switch (X20 to X33) by 1100 when X2 is turned ON. If the result is less
than 99999999, show the result on the 8-digit display (Y40 to Y5F).
The program should perform the BIN-division of the value specified with the 8-digit
digital switch (X20 to X3F) by 40000 when X3 is turned ON. If X4 is ON, show the
quotient of the result on the 8-digit display (Y40 to Y5F). If X4 is OFF, show the
remainder on the same display.
(X20 to X33)×1100 (Y40 to Y5F)
Quotient (Y40 to Y5F) X4 ON
(X20 to X3F)÷40000
Remainder (Y40 to Y5F) X4 OFF
X2 X3
0 DBINP K5X20 D0
1) K1100 D2
2) D0 D2 D4
Y077
D< K99999999 D4 Y77

Y77
DBCDP D4 K8Y40
X3 X2
24 3) K8X20 D10
4) K40000 D12
5) D10 D12 D14

Y077
X4
DBCD 6) K8Y40
X4
DBCD 7) K8Y40
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
5 - 59
Answers for the practice questions in Chapter 5
Question Answer
1) K2 X0
5
2) K2 Y70
1) D0
2) K4 X20
6
3) BCD
4) K4 Y40
1) K2 Y40
7 2) K8
3) K0
1) BIN P
2) BIN P
8
3)
4)
1) D P
9
2) D P
1) BIN
2) BIN
3) P
10
4) P
5) BCD
6) BCD
1) DMOV P
2) D P
3) DBIN P
11 4) DMOV P
5) D/P
6) D14
7) D16
5 - 60
CHAPTER 6 USING OTHER FUNCTIONS
6.1 Clock Function
With the clock function, the following items can be set in the clock elements
incorporated in the CPU; year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of the week.
To enable the clock function, use GX Developer or a program.
To set or read the clock data, use GX Developer.
1) Click [Online] and then [Set time] to display the

Set time dialog box.
1) Click!
2) Input year, month, day, hour, minute and

second, and select the day of the week in the
2) Enter!
Set time dialog box.
3) Click! 3) Click the Setup button.
6-1
Reference
The following shows an example of using the clock function with a program.
( Project name QEX13)
• Writing clock data

X7
0 MOVP H0104 SD210 2001.04(April)
MOVP H0110 SD211 Date: 1st Hour: 10 o'clock
MOVP H4020 SD212 Minute: 40 Second: 20
MOVP H2000 SD213 Year: 2001 00 is Sunday
PLS SM210 Clock data set request
Settable items are items in
Set time a few minutes ahead of actual time, and then write it to the PLC. When actual
time has reached the set time, turn on the input switch X7. Then the clock is activated.
• Reading clock data

X7
11 SM213 Clock data read request
SM400
13 MOV SD211 K4Y50 Date and hour
MOV SD212 K4Y40 Minute and second
Turn off X07 to read time.
6-2
6.2 Test Function at Online
Exercise this function with the program Project name QEX14

.
As preparation, follow the procedure below.
X6 X1 For details on the operation method, refer to

0 Y70
Y70
Chapter 2.
X4 M10 K1500 1) Read the project from the user floppy disk (FD)
4 TO
0 using GX Developer.
BCD TO K4Y50
0
X6 T1 2) Write the parameter and program of the read
13 Y74
Y74
project to the CPU (PLC).
(The CPU must be at stop to do this.)
Y74 X6 K30 3) Set GX Developer to the monitor mode.
17 T1
0
23 END 4) Confirm a program displayed in the screen.
6-3
6.2.1 Turning device "Y" ON/OFF forcibly
Stop the CPU before proceeding with the

procedure below.
1) Click the button on the toolbar.
1) Click!
2) Click to set!
2) The Device test dialog box appears. Click
"Device" and input "Y70" in the list box.
3) Click the FORCE ON / FORCE OFF

button to forcibly turn "Y70" on/off.
3) Click!
Check Using Demonstration Machine

1) Confirm that the content displayed on the execution history area switches between
ON and OFF according to clicks of the FORCE ON / FORCE OFF button.
Also, confirm Y70’s LED on the demonstration machine switches between on and
off according to the same operation.
NOTE
If the CPU is in a RUN state, operation results of programs are given priority. For
this reason, stop the CPU first to make confirmation with the demonstration
machine.
POINT
To execute setting/resetting of contacts, changing a current value of word devices,
and forced outputs, it is also possible to use the test function while GX Developer is
monitoring ladders.
In the ladder-monitoring screen of GX Developer, double-click the contact or press
Enter key while holding the Shift key. This forcibly switches the contact
between closed and open.
To display the dialog box for changing current values, double-click the word device
or press Enter key while holding the Shift key in the ladder-monitoring
screen of GX Developer.
6-4
6.2.2 Setting and resetting device "M"
Activate the CPU before proceeding with the

procedure below.
1) Click!
2) Click to set! 2) The Device test dialog box appears. Click

"Device" and input "M10" in the list box.
3) Click the FORCE ON / FORCE OFF

3) Click!
button to set or reset "M10".
Turn X4 off and check the following items.

M10
1) When M10 is set, is de-energized and the current value of the timer
X4 M10 K1500 T0 is cleared to 0.
4 T0
K4 Confirm that the value on the digital display (Y50-Y5F) stops changing.
BCD T0 Y50
M10
2) When M10 is reset, is energized and the timer T0 starts counting from
0. This count value increases by 10 at a second.
(Monitoring screen with M10 set) Confirm that the value on the display (Y50-Y5F) increases by 10 at a
second.
POINT
With the same procedure, bit devices other than internal relays (M) can also be set
and reset forcibly.
6-5
6.2.3 Changing a current value of device "T"

procedure below.
1) Click!
2) The Device test dialog box appears. Click

"Device" in "Word device/buffer memory" area
and input "T0" in the list box.
2) Click to set!
3) Click "Setting value" and input "1000" in the list
box.
3) Click to set! 4) Click!
4) After the setting is completed, click the Set
button to forcibly change the current value of
T0 to 1000.

1) Confirm that the value on the digital display (Y50-Y5F) changes to 1000 by
pressing .
POINT
With the same procedure, word devices other than timers (T) can also be changed
in their current values.
6-6
6.2.4 Reading error steps

procedure below.
1) Click [Diagnostics] [PLC diagnostics].
1) Click!
2) The PLC diagnostics dialog box appears.

Click the Error Jump button to jump to the
sequence program step number where the
highlighted error occurred.
• An error number is displayed if an error was

found.
2) Jump to the step number

with the error! • "No error" is displayed if no error was found.
6-7
6.2.5 Remote RUN/STOP

procedure below.
1) Click [Online] [Remote operation].
1) Click!
2) The Remote operation dialog box appears.

Select "STOP" in the list box in the Operation
area.
2) Select!
3) After the setting is completed, click the
Execute button.
3) Click!
4) The message saying "Execute?" appears.

Click the Yes button.
The CPU stops.
5) Select "RUN" in step 2), and perform step 2) to

4) Click 4) again.
The CPU, which was set to STOP in the above

procedure, enters a RUN state again.
6-8
6.3 Forced I/O Assignment by Parameter Settings
1) Double-click "Parameter" in the project list.

1) Double-click!
2) "PLC parameter", "Network param", and

2) Double-click! "Remote pass" are displayed. Double-click
"PLC parameter".
3) The Qn(H) Parameter dialog box appears.

Click the "I/O assignment" tab.
3) Click!
4) Select "Empty" in the list box of "Type" column.

5) Input "QX42" in the "Model name" column.
6) Select "32points" in the list box of "Points"
column.
7) Input "0000" in the "StartXY" column.
4) Select! 6) Select! 8) After the setting is completed, click the END
5) Enter! 7) Enter! button.
8) Click! After this exercise is finished, initialize the settings by

the following procedure.
1) Click the Default button in the Qn(H) Parameter
dialog box to initialize the parameter settings.
2) Click on the toolbar to open the Write to PLC
dialog box, and then write only the parameters to
the CPU. (Do the same for the second CPU.)
6-9
Stop the CPU and click on the toolbar.
The Write to PLC dialog box opens. Click the parameter of the target data, and then
click the Select button Execute button sequentially to write only the
parameter to the CPU. After that, activate the CPU and confirm the following.
Perform the same parameter settings to second CPU.

(This is not necessary if there is only one CPU incorporated.)
For how to write parameters to second CPU, refer to Section 2.6.
1) A current value of the timer T0 disappears from the screen of the digital display
(Y50 to Y5F). Instead, the LEDs of Y70 to Y77 start flashing. These flashes
continue until the value reaches the set device value.
2) Outputting to Y70 and Y74 with X6 turned on does not m-+ake the LEDs of Y70
and Y74 flash.
[I/O numbers before forced assignment]

[Slot 0] [Slot 1]
Address 0, Address 4,
One address contains 16 points.
Modules with 64 points take 4 addresses.
Address 3 Address 7
Digital display
QX42 QY42P
Address 0 Address 4
Q61P-A1
Q02H Q02H
Power
CPU CPU Address 1 Address 5
supply [BCD T0 K4Y50]
Y5F to Y50
module Address 2 Address 6
Name plate
Address 3 Address 7
Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70

Name plate
[I/O numbers after forced assignment]
X is set to 32 points. Therefore another 32 points cannot be used.
This makes each of following addresses smaller by 2.
Address 0 Address 4, Address 6
Address 1 Address 5, Address 7 Digital display
QX42 QY42P
Address 0 Address 2
Q61P-A1
Q02H Q02H
Power
CPU CPU Address 1 Address 3
supply
Y5F to Y50
module Address 4
Name plate
[BCD T0 K4Y50]
Address 5
Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70

Name plate
POINT
• Note that address 7 has been replaced with address 5. This means that a current
value of the timer T0 is output to the newly assigned address 5, and LEDs of Y70
to Y77 flash as they are connected to the address 5.
• Results of outputting to Y70 or Y74 cannot be confirmed on any displays as
address 7 for output modules no longer exists.
To display normally, change the device number from K4Y50 to K4Y30 and from
Y70-Y77 to Y50-Y57.
6 - 10
6.4 Using Retentive Timers
When an input condition is turned on, the coil is energized. Then the value of a
retentive timer starts increasing. Once a current value has reached the set value, a
retentive timer goes time out and its contact turns on. If the input condition is turned off
during that increase, the coil is de-energized but the current value is kept. To restart
the increase, which means to accumulate values, turn input conditions on again to
re-energize the coil.
X6 contact
X6 K50
ST1
ST1 coil
ST1
Y73 3.0 s 2.0 s
ST1 a contact
X7
RST ST1 X7 contact
(to input RST instructions)
ST1
current
value 0 30 30 50 50 0
Before using as a retentive timer, An RTS instruction must be used to turn off the contact and
specify the number of points in clear the current value after the retentive timer goes time out.
parameters.
In the example operation below, the retentive timer is set to ST0 to ST31.
1) Double-click "Parameter" in the project list.

1) Double-click!
2) "PLC parameter", "Network param", and

2) Double-click! "Remote pass" are displayed. Double-click
"PLC parameter".
(To next page)
6 - 11
(From previous page)
3) The Qn(H) Parameter dialog box appears.

Click the "I/O assignment" tab.
3) Click!
4) Click "Dev. point" in the "Retentive timer" row,

and input "32" in there.
5) After the setting is completed, click the End

button.
4) Enter!
5) Click!
6 - 12
6.5 Batch Replacement of Devices
6.5.1 Batch replacement of device numbers
In the example operation below, Y70 to Y9F (48 in total) are replaced with Y50 to Y7F
(48 in total) in batch.
1) Click [Find/Replace] [Replace device].
1) Click!
2) The Replace device dialog box appears. Click

"Earlier device" and input "Y70" in the list box.
2) Enter!
3) Enter! 3) Click "New device" and input "Y50" in the list

box.
4) Click "No. of substitute points" and set "48" in

5) Click!
4) Set! the spin box.

Replace button.
(Before change) (After change)
0
X6 X1
Y70 0
X6 X1
Y50
6) Confirm that the target device numbers have
Y70 Y50
been properly replaced.
X4 M10 K1500 X4 M10 K1500
4 T0 4 T0
BCD TO K4Y50 BCD TO K4Y50
X6 T1 X6 T1
13 Y74 13 Y54
Y74 Y54
Y74 X6 K30 Y54 X6 K30
17 T1 17 T1
6 - 13
6.5.2 Batch switching of specified devices between normally open and normally close
Follow the procedure below to switch specified devices all at once between normally
open and normally close.
1) Click [Find/Replace] [Change open/close

contact] to select.
1) Click!
2) The Change open/close connect appears.

2) Enter!
Click "Device" and input "X4" in the list box.

Replace all button.
3) Click!
(Before change) (After change)

X6 X1 X6 X1 4) Confirm that normally open have been
0 Y70 0 Y70
Y70 Y70
switched to B contacts and vice versa.
X4 M10 K1500 X4 M10 K1500
4 T0 4 T0
BCD TO K4Y50 BCD TO K4Y50
X6 T1 X6 T1
13 Y74 13 Y74
Y74 Y74
Y74 X6 K30 Y74 X6 K30
17 T1 17 T1
NOTE
Before exercising the contents in Section 6.6 after this section, be sure to store the
program in a personal computer to a CPU.
For how to write to a CPU, refer to Section 2.5.
6 - 14
6.6 Write During RUN
This function allows programs to be written to CPUs that are currently running.

procedure below.
1) Change the circuit! 1) Change the ladder.

(In the example here, "X1" is changed to "X0".)
2) After the change is made, click "Convert"

"Convert (Online change)".
2) Click!
3) The "Caution" ears. Read through the

message, and click the Yes button if you
agree with it.
3) Click!
4) The message saying "RUN write processing

has completed" appears. Click the OK
4) Click button.
NOTE
Note that to execute the write during RUN operation, the PLC CPU and GX
Developer must share an identical program before the modification. So, if it is not
for sure that those two programs are identical, verify them before modifying with GX
Developer and executing write during RUN.
6 - 15
6.7 Registering Devices
Various devices, including ones in separate locations on the ladder, can be monitored
all together in one screen.
1) Click [Online], [Monitor], and [Entry data

monitor] sequentially.
1) Click!
2) The monitor screen for device registration

appears. Click the Register devices button.
2) Click!
3) The Register device dialog box appears. Click

"Device" and input "Y74" in the list box.
3) Set!
Register button.
4) Click
5) Click the Cancel button to close the dialog
5) Click! box.
(To next page)
6 - 16

6) Click!
7) Show! 7) The Monitor status dialog box appears and the

ON/OFF/Current value of the device is
displayed.
REMARK
To remove registered devices, click the Delete the device button.
6 - 17
6.8 Creating Comments
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QEX15
Program name MAIN
The following is an example of a printed out ladder with comments and devices for
which contacts are used.
T0 a contact is in step 5 and 27.

b contact is in step 30.
0.3S Timer Timer 0.6

S NO.1
Timer 0.6 0.3S Timer

S NO.1
0.9S Flicker
Starts Operation
0.9S Counts number of products

Flicker
Counts number of products
Counts number of products Counts number of products
Timer 0.6 External display of flicker

S NO.1
Timer 0.6
S NO.1
Activates trigger
Performs reset
Use a keyboard to input the above program or read it from a FD.
6 - 18
(1) Flowchart of creating comments
Set the range of devices on which comments are attached*
Read out a device on which comments are attached
Create comments
To attach comments to other devices
Write the project to a floppy disk
Read out the circuit with the comments and confirm it
Printout the circuit with comments and devices for which contacts are used
*: The above procedure must be taken to designate the device comment range and write it to a CPU.
6 - 19
(2) Creating comments
1) Double-click "Device comment" in the project

1) Double-click!
list.
2) "COMMENT" and "MAIN" appear. Double-click

2) Double-click!
"COMMENT" to display the COMMENT
screen.
3) Enter a comment!
3) Click a desired comment area, and input
desired character strings as shown on the left.
(To next page)
6 - 20
4) Enter! 5) Click!
4) Click "Device" and input "Y70" in the list box.
Enter!
5) Click the Display button to display a

comment list. In this list, the input device is
shown at the top accompanied below by its
following devices.

7) Enter! 8) Click!
7) Click "Device" and input "M1" in the list box.

9) Enter!

following devices.

(To next page)
6 - 21
10) Enter! 11) Click!
10) Click "Device" and input "T0" in the list box.

12) Enter!

T0 Timer 0.6S No.1
T1 0.3S timer
T2 shown at the top accompanied below by its
T3
following devices.
T4
T5
T6 12) Click a desired comment area, and input
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
T16
13) Enter! 14) Click!

13) Click "Device" and input "C2" in the list box.
15) Enter!
C2 Count number of products comment list. In this list, the input device is
C3
C4
C5 following devices.
C6
C7
C8 15) Click a desired comment area, and input
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
6 - 22
(3) Saving comments
1) Click [Project] [Save as] menu.
1) Click!
2) The Save the project with a new name dialog

box appears. Click the Save button.
2) Click!
6 - 23
(4) Displaying a ladder with comments in GX Developer screens
1) Click [View] [Comment] menu.
1) Click!
2) Comments appear in the ladder screen.

0.3S Timer Timer 0.
6S NO.1
Timer 0. 0.3S Timer

6S NO.1
0.9S Flicker
Starts Operation
0.9S Flicker Counts number of products
6 - 24
POINT
In addition to device comments, a ladder screen can be displayed with statements (comments on ladder
blocks) and notes (comments on outputs or instructions).
Statement
* Programs for counting number of products

Note * <Counts up to 1000
0.9S Flicker Counts number of products
* <Display of number of products
• Creating statements
Click and then double-click a ladder block where comments are to be attached.
The Enter line statements dialog box appears. Enter desired character strings, and then click the OK
button.
• Creating notes
Click and then double-click an output or instruction where comments are to be attached.
The Enter Note dialog box appears. Enter desired character strings, and then click the OK button.
• There are two types of statements and notes; "Embedded" and "Separate".
"Embedded" ...... The data of statements and notes is stored as a part of a program, so it is stored in a
CPU used in a factory as well. Note, however, that this takes a lot of space in program
memory of PLC CPUs.
"Separate" ......... The data of statements and notes is stored not as a part of a program but separately in
the peripheral device (personal computer). In this way, a program needs only one extra
step at a location. This requires less space in program memory on PLC CPUs.
Note, however, that after taking this way, changing programs at an FA site breaks
consistency between programs of GX Developer on the peripheral device (personal
computer) and PLC CPUs.
6 - 25
MEMO
6 - 26
CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES
7.1 Intelligent Function Module
(1) Intelligent function module type

On PLC CPUs (hereinafter referred to as QCPUs), some functions are not
supported or are limited in use. Intelligent function modules support those
functions instead of QCPUs.
Therefore users need to select an intelligent function module that is appropriate for
the purpose involved.
QCPUs are compatible with QCPU-compatible intelligent function modules and
AnS-compatible special function modules.
The following list shows examples of the intelligent function modules.
Table 7.1 Example of intelligent function module

Number of
Module
I/O
Name Functions current
occupied
consumption
points
Input module that converts
Analog-digital conversion 0 to 20mA 0 to 4000 (in standard
5VDC
module 16 points resolution mode)
0.63A
(Q64AD) 0 to ±10V 0 to ±4000 (in standard
resolution mode)
Output module that converts
5VDC
Digital-analog conversion 0 to 4000 0 to 20mA (in standard
0.33A
module 16 points resolution mode)
24VDC
(Q62DA) 0 to ±4000 0 to ±10V (in standard
0.12A
resolution mode)
(2) Using with CPUs

An intelligent function module can be installed on any I/O slots on a main base
unit and extension base unit.
I/O slot number 4
2 3
0 1
Intelligent function module

[Used No.]
Power QCPU
16 points of X/Y80 to 8F, 16 points of X/Y90 to 9F
supply
Figure 7.1 Installation of intelligent function module
REMARK
To use AnS series I/O modules or special function modules, install them on
QA1S65B or QA168B extension base unit.
[Main base unit]
[QA1S6 B Extension base unit]

Use this extension base unit for mounting
AnS series power supply modules,
I/O modules, and special function modules.
7-1
7.2 Data Communication between Intelligent Function Modules and CPUs
An intelligent function module and a CPU exchange mainly two formats of data.
__________
Bit data Signals that use input Xs and output Ys
________
Word data 16-bit data or 32-bit data
QCPU Internal configuration of intelligent function module
(PLC CPU)
External I/F
X/Y
Function
Y, M, T, C, D, etc.
Input X
CPU
Device memory
Output Y (Bit data)
Program
Buffer memory
Read data
Write data (Word data)
Figure 7.2 Internal configuration of intelligent function module

7.2.1 I/O signals to CPUs
For exchanging signals of 1-bit between a QCPU and an intelligent function module,
input Xs and output Ys are used.
X/Y here does not mean external I/Os but symbols that are used in a sequence
program to exclusively represent I/O signals of intelligent function modules. Also note
that I/O numbers are assigned according to the slot where the intelligent function
module is installed.
[X]
Intelligent Xs in a sequence program represent signals
QCPU function module that are input to a QCPU by an intelligent
X
READY signal function module. These signals are
X generated on an intelligent function module.
X Note that the Xs are used as contacts in a
X program. The followings are examples of the
signals.
(1) READY signal
This signal notifies a QCPU that an
intelligent function module started up
Figure 7.3 X from intelligent function normally at power-on and is ready for
module operation.
(2) Comparison result
This signal is used by high-speed counter
modules. The modules compare an input count
value with the set value to notify a QCPU the
results of the comparison; larger (>), smaller
(<) or match (=).
[Y]
Intelligent function module SETs, RSTs, or OUT-Ys represent output
QCPU signals transmitted from a QCPU to an
intelligent function module. These signals are
generated on a QCPU. Note that they are
Output enable
Y used as coils or contacts in a program.
Y
Write to user range
Y (Ex.) D/A conversion modules output an
Channel change
Y
enable instruction (output enable)
Synchronous output
before outputting analog values that
Figure 7.4 Y from CPU were converted from digital values.
7-2
7.2.2 Data communication with intelligent function modules
Data is transmitted or received in 16-bit or 32-bit units. Intelligent function modules

have buffer memory to store those data.
Intelligent function module Buffer memory address
0 D/A conversion enable/disable
1 CH.1 Digital value
QCPU
2 CH.2 Digital value
Read Data
Buffer 3
Readable and writable
memory to System area (Not used)
by QCPU
10
11 CH.1 Set value check code
Write 12 CH.2 Set value check code
....
Example of memory map: Q62DA Digital/Analog Conversion Module
Figure 7.5 Buffer memory
(1) QCPUs can read and write buffer memory. Also note that some modules can write
data to buffer memory from peripheral devices via an interface.
(2) In buffer memory, space of one word (16 bits) is reserved for each intelligent
function module’s unique address.
The smallest address is 0, and these addresses are used to specify a target
module to read or write. The minimum unit is one word. 17- to 32-bit data is
treated as 2-word (32-bit) data.
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Data part
Sign bit
1: Negative Indicated here is + 276.
0: Positive (Negative digital values are represented in complement of 2)
Figure 7.6 Example image of buffer memory content (D/A conversion module)
The buffer memory on Figure 7.6 shows an address of a D/A conversion module
in 16 bits. The number is obtained from digital quantity that a QCPU wrote to the
buffer memory. Digital values ranging from - 2048 to + 2047 can be set in signed
binary (16 bits long).
(3) Buffer memory is a RAM.
7-3
7.3 Communicating with Intelligent Function Modules
7.3.1 Communication methods with intelligent function modules
QCPUs provide the following methods for communicating with intelligent function
modules.
Table 7.2 Type of communication with intelligent function modules

Communication
Functions Setting method
method
Initial setting, Performs initial settings and automatic refresh settings of intelligent function
Automatic refresh modules.
setting These settings allow writing/reading data to/from intelligent function modules
regardless of communication program creation or buffer memory address.
Ex.) When A/D conversion module Q64AD is used.

•Initial setting : •A/D conversion enable/disable setting
•Sampling/averaging processing designation
•Time average/number of times average
designation
•Average time/average number of times Use GX Configurator
designation compatible with the intelligent
(Set data in initial settings is stored to the function module.
intelligent function module.)
•Automatic refresh setting : Set a device on a QCPU to store the following
data to.
•Digital output from Q64AD
•Max./min. value of Q64AD
•Error code
(Set data in automatic refresh settings is stored to
the intelligent function module parameter on a
QCPU.)
Device initial value Writes set data in device initial settings of intelligent function modules to the
Use GX Developer to
intelligent function modules at the following timings.
specify the range for
•At power-on of a QCPU
intelligent function module
•At reset
devices (U G ).
•At switch from STOP to RUN
FROM/TO Executes data read/write to buffer memory on an intelligent function module. Use this instruction in a
instruction sequence program.
Intelligent function Directly treats buffer memory on an intelligent function module as a device of
module device a QCPU. Specify as a device in a
(U G ) Unlike "FROM/TO instruction", this requires only one instruction for sequence program.
processing data that is read from an intelligent function module.
Intelligent function
Dedicated instructions used to simplify programming for using the functions of Use this instruction in a
module dedicated
intelligent function modules sequence program.
instruction
7-4
7.3.2 Using GX Configurator for communication
This section describes the procedure of using GX Configurator for communication with
intelligent function modules.
In the example operation below, Q64AD module/SW D5C-QADU is used.
Start
Install a module
Install an A/D conversion module on a specified slot.
Wiring
Connect external devices to an A/D conversion module.
Switch settings for intelligent function module

Use GX Developer for this setting.
Use the default setting range

Use the user range settings?
Use the user range
Offset/gain setting
Offset/gain settings are necessary to use
the user range settings.
NO
Use GX Configurator?
YES
Initial setting, automatic refresh setting

Use GX Configurator to simplify programs.
Programming, debug
Create and check sequence programs.
7-5
7.3.3 Data created by GX Configurator
The following data/files can be created with the GX Configurator package and also
used in GX Developer. Refer to the following figure to know in which operation each
data/file is needed.
QCPU GX Developer/QADU Disk

Q25HCPU
Project Project
MODE.
1)
RUN.
ERR.
Read/
USER.
BAT. save
BOOT.
3) 2)
A A A
Write Read/
save
Personal computer
USB
B A: Shows intelligent function module
parameters
RS-232
B: Shows data stored at text file creation.
<Parameter of intelligent function module>

(a) This parameter data is created in the auto refresh settings and stored to
the intelligent function module parameter file in a GX Developer-created
project.
Project
Program
Parameter
PLC parameter
Network parameter
Intelligent function module parameter
(b) For how to perform 1) to 3) on the above figure, refer to the followings.
1) Use GX Developer as follows.
[Project] [Open project]/[Save]/[Save as]
2) Open the GX Configurator’s screen for selecting a module on which
parameter settings are to be made.
[File] [Open file]/[Save as]
3) Use GX Developer as follows.
[Online] [Read from PLC]/[Write to PLC] "Intelligent function
module parameters"
Or, open the GX Configurator’s screen for selecting a module on which
parameter settings are to be made. [Online] [Read from PLC]/[Write
to PLC]
<Text files>
(a) These files are text format files created using Text file creation
operation in the initial settings, auto refresh settings and the monitor/test
screen.
Use these files to create user’s documents.
7-6
7.4 Exercise System of Intelligent Function Module
Use an A/D or D/A conversion module to convert analog signals/digital data that are
input with the volume or digital switch on the demonstration machine.
D/A conversion module
A/D conversion module
QX QY Q64 Q62
Q61P QCPU QCPU* 42 42P AD DA
-A1 (No.1) (No.2) (64 (64 (16 (16
points) points) points) points)
X0 Y40 X/Y80 X/Y90

to to to to
X3F Y7F X/Y8F X/Y9F
(Channel 1) (Channel 1)
V V
* Not used in this document (A/D conversion value (Value to be D/A converted
(Keep them at stop) (Input D/A output value) is displayed) is displayed)
I/O panel
Digital display Digital display
(Y5F to Y50) (Y4F to Y40)
Digital switch
(X2F to X20)
1 4 0 2
Voltmeter for Voltmeter for
input voltage output voltage
Input volume
7-7
7.5 Q64AD Analog/Digital Conversion Module
7.5.1 Names of parts
Part names of Q64AD are given below together with descriptions.

For details, refer to the User’s Manual.
Q64AD
Q64AD
1) RUN
2) ERROR
V+ 1
C V- 2
H
1
I+ 3
SLD 4
V+
5
C
H
V-
6
2 I+
7
SLD
8
V+
9
C V-
H
3 I+
10
SLD
11
V+ 12
C V- 13
H
4 I+ 14
SLD 15
A.G. 16
17
(FG)
A/D 18
0-±10V
0-20mA
Name and
No. Descriptions
appearance
Indicates operation status of an A/D conversion module.
ON: In normal operation
1) RUN LED Flicker: In offset/gain setting mode
OFF: 5V power failure or watchdog timer error
occurred
Indicates errors and status of an A/D conversion module.
ON: Error occurred
OFF: In normal operation
2) ERROR LED
Flicker: Switch settings error occurred
Values other than 0 has been set to the
switch 5 on an intelligent function module.
7-8
7.5.2 A/D conversion characteristics
(1) A/D conversion characteristics on voltage inputs

(when in a standard resolution mode with analog input range set to –10 to 10V)
4000
2004
2003
Digital output value
Digital output
2002
0 2001
2000
2.5mV
5.0000V
5.0025V
- 4000
- 10V 0 10V
Input voltage
Analog input voltage
Figure 7.12 A/D conversion characteristics (voltage input)
Analog-digital conversion modules convert analog values input from other devices
to digital quantity so that CPUs can operate those values. On voltage inputs, for
example, they convert - 10V to digital quantity of – 4000 and 10V to 4000. This
means that the modules convert input voltage of 2.5mV to digital quantity of 1, and
abandon values smaller than 2.5mV.
(2) A/D conversion characteristics on current inputs

(when in a standard resolution mode with analog input range set to 0 to 20mA)
4000
2005
2004
2003
Digital output value
Digital output
2002
2001
0 2000
5 A
10.000mA
10.005mA
- 4000 Input current

- 20mA 0 20mA
Analog input current
Figure 7.13 A/D conversion characteristics (current input)
The modules convert current input of 0mA to 0 for output, and 20mA to 4000. This
means that the modules convert input current of 5μA to digital quantity of 1, and
abandon values smaller than 5μA.
REMARK
A voltage/current value (max. resolution) that becomes digital value of 1 through
A/D conversion differs depending on the settings of the resolution mode (1/4000,
1/20000, 1/60000) or the output range.
7-9
7.5.3 Intelligent function module switch settings
Q series uses the I/O assignment settings of GX Developer to configure the switch
settings for intelligent function modules.
The intelligent function module switch settings provide switch 1 to 5, and use 16-bitdata.
When the intelligent function module switch settings are not configured, values of switch
1 to 5 are set to, which is 0.
(1) Setting items for module switches
Setting items
Input range setting Analog output range Setting value for output
range
Switch 1 4 to 20mA 0H
H
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
0 to 20mA 1H
1 to 5V 2H
0 to 5V 3H
Input range setting -10 to 10V 4H
Switch 2 0 to 10V 5H
H
User range setting FH
CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5
Switch 3 Vacant
Switch 4
H
00H : Temperature drift compensation

01 - FFH : No temperature drift compensation
0H : Standard resolution mode
1 - FH : High resolution mode
0H : Standard mode (A/D conversion)
1 - FH : Offset/gain setting mode
Switch 5 fixed to 0
REMARK
The settings for the offset/gain setting mode differ between the function version A
and function version B.
Explanations in this section are made based on the function version B.
7 - 10
(2) Setting module switches
The demonstration machine incorporates two CPUs, so it is necessary to perform

the parameter settings for multi-CPU system. (if there is only one CPU
incorporated, the parameter settings mentioned is not required.) For how to
perform the parameter setting, refer to the multi-CPU setting of parameters in
Section 3.2.
1) Click the "I/O assignment" tab in the PLC parameter

settings.
1) Click!
2) Perform I/O assignment on the slot "3(*-3)" where

2) Set!
Q64AD is installed.
Type: "Intelli" (required)
Model name: "Q64AD"
Points: "16points"
3) Click!
StartXY: "80" (Hexadecimal)
3) Click the Switch setting button. The Switch setting
for I/O and intelligent function module dialog box
appears.
4) The following is an example of the intelligent function

module switch settings of Q64AD.
The default value of each switch is "0".
Switch Set Value Item Description of
setting
4) Enter! 1 3 Input range CH1: 0 to 5V
2 (Do not input) Input range Default value
5) Click! 3 (Do not input) Vacant Default value
(Drift compensation mode
4 (Do not input) Default value
selection)
5 (Do not input) fixed to 0 Default value

6) Click the End button on the Qn(H) Parameter dialog
box to terminate the intelligent function switch settings.
6) Click!
7 - 11
7.5.4 Setting with GX Configurator
1) Activate GX Developer, and click [Tools], [Intelligent

function utility], and [Start] sequentially.
1) Click!
2) GX Configurator starts up.

Perform the settings of the A/D conversion module as
follows.
Start I/O No.: "80"
Module type: "A/D Conversion Module"
Module model name: "Q64AD"
3) Click the Initial setting button.
2) Set!
3) Click!
4) The Initial setting screen appears.

In the following example, A/D conversion enable/disable
4) Set! settings from CH2 to CH4 are set to "Disable".
(this means using only CH1)
5) Click the End setup button.
5) Click!
6) Click! 6) Click the Auto refresh button in GX Configurator.
(To next page)
7 - 12
7) Set "D10" in the PLC side Device area on the "CH1

Digital output values" row of Setting item.
8) Click the End setup button.
7) Set!
8) Click!
9) Confirm that "Available" is set in the Initial setting and

Auto refresh column of Q64AD.
9) Confirm!
10) After the setting is completed, click [Intelligent function

module parameter] and then click [Save parameter].
11) Click the Exit button.
10) Click!
11) Click!
7 - 13
7.5.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine
(1) Sequence program

The sequence program performs a sampling processing on analog voltages input
to Q64AD from CH1, and then converts the analog values to digital values.
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name Q64AD
Program name MAIN
AD module READY
AD conversion complete flag

X3 X80 X8E Displays digital conversion
0 >= D10 K0 BCD D10 K4Y50
value of CH2 on LED
9 END
X80: Module READY signal

X8E: A/D conversion complete flag
At power-on or reset of a PLC CPU, this flag turns on if A/D conversion is ready
to be executed. A/D conversion is executed once this flag turned on.
(2) Operation of the demonstration machine

The Write to PLC dialog box opens. Click the Param + Prog button and then
click the Execute button to write to a CPU. After that, activate a CPU and
confirm the following items.
Write only the parameter settings to a second CPU in the same way.
(This is not necessary if there is only one CPU incorporated.) For how to how to
write parameters to a second CPU, refer to Section 2.6.
1) Turn on X3, and change input voltages for an A/D conversion module by the
volume on the demonstration machine.
Analog values that were input to channel 1(CH1) on Q64AD are stored to buffer
memory (in digital value). With the automatic refresh settings, a QCPU reads
the stored digital values and stores them in its data register D10.
2) Whenever an analog value is smaller than "-1", 0 is set.
3) Analog-to-digital converted values appear on the digital display (Y50 to Y5F).
7 - 14
7.6 Q62DA Digital/Analog Conversion Module
7.6.1 Names of parts
Part names of Q62DA are given below together with descriptions.

Q62DA
Q62DA
1) RUN
2) ERROR
V+
1
C COM 2
H
1 I+ 3
4
V+ 5
C COM 6
H
2 I+ 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
IN 24VDC
16
3)
17
(FG)
18
D/A
0-±10V
0-20mA
No. Name and appearance Description

Indicates operation status of a D/A conversion module.
ON: In normal operation
1) RUN LED Flicker: In offset/gain setting mode
OFF: 5V power failure or watchdog timer error
occurred
Indicates errors and status of an D/A conversion module.
ON: Error occurred
OFF: In normal operation
2) ERROR LED
Flicker: Switch settings error occurred
Values other than 0 has been set to the switch
5 on an intelligent function module.
External power supply A terminal for connecting 24VDC external power supply
3)
terminal
7 - 15
7.6.2 D/A conversion characteristics
(1) D/A conversion characteristics on voltage outputs

(when in a standard resolution mode with analog output range set to –10 to 10V)
10V
Analog output voltage
Analog output voltage

0
5.0025V
2.5mV
5.0000V
- 10V 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004

- 4000 0 4000 Digital input
Digital input value
Figure 7.14 D/A conversion characteristics (current output)
Digital/analog conversion modules convert digital quantity that is input from a

QCPU to analog values, and then output it to exterior. For example, the modules
convert digital quantity of -4000 to analog quantity of -10V and 4000 to 10V before
output. This means that the modules convert the digital input value of 1 to analog
quantity of 2.5mA, and abandon digital input values in decimal places.
(2) D/A conversion characteristics on current outputs

(when in a standard resolution mode with analog output range set to 0 to 20mA)
20mA
Analog output current
Analog output current
0
10.005mA
5 A
10.000mA
-20mA 2000 2001 2002 2003
-4000 0 4000 Input
Digital input value
Figure 7.15 D/A conversion characteristics (current output)
For current outputs, the modules convert 0 to 0mA and 4,000 to 20mA. This
means that the modules convert the digital input value of 1 to analog quantity of
5μA, and abandon digital input values in decimal places.
REMARK
A voltage/current value (max. resolution) that becomes digital value of 1 through
D/A conversion differs depending on the settings of the resolution mode (1/4000,
1/20000, 1/60000) or the output range.
7 - 16
7.6.3 Intelligent function module switch settings
(1) Setting items for module switches
Setting items
Input range setting Analog output range Setting value for output
range
Switch 1 4 to 20mA 0H
H
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

0 to 20mA 1H
1 to 5V 2H
Input range setting 0 to 5V 3H
-10 to 10V 4H
Switch 2
H User range setting FH
CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5
Switch 3
H
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
HOLD/CLEAR function setting

0H : CLEAR
1 to FH HOLD
Switch 4
H
0H :Standard mode (Asynchronous)
01-FFH :Synchronous output mode
0H :Standard resolution mode
1-FH :High resolution mode
0H :Standard mode (D/A conversion)
1-FH :Offset/gain setting mode
Switch 5 Fixed to 0
REMARK
The settings for the offset/gain setting mode differ between the function version A
and function version B.
Explanations in this section are made based on the function version B.
7 - 17
(2) Setting module switches
The demonstration machine incorporates two CPUs, so it is necessary to

perform the parameter settings for multi-CPU system. (if there is only one CPU
incorporated, the parameter settings mentioned is not required.) For how to
perform the parameter setting, refer to the multi-CPU setting of parameters in
Section 3.2.
1) Click the "I/O assignment" tab in the PLC parameter
settings.
1) Click!
2) Perform I/O assignment on the slot "4(*-4)" on which

2) Set!
Q62DA is installed.
Type: "Intelli" (required)
Model name: "Q62DA"
3) Click! Points: "16points"
StartXY: "90" (Hexadecimal)
3) Click the Switch setting button. The Switch setting
for I/O and intelligent function module dialog box
appears.
4) The following is an example of the intelligent function

module switch settings of Q62DA.
The default value of each switch is "0".
Description of
Switch Set Value Item
setting
4) Enter! 1 3 Output range CH1: 0 to 5V
2 (Do not input) Vacant Default value
5) Click! 3 (Do not input) HOLD/CLEAR Default value
(Synchronous/asynchronous
4 (Do not input) Default value
mode selection)
5 (Do not input) fixed to 0 Default value

6) Click the End button on the Qn(H) Parameter dialog
box to terminate the intelligent function module switch
settings.
6) Click!
7 - 18
7.6.4 Setting with GX Configurator
1) Activate GX Developer, and click [Tools], [Intelligent

function utility], and [Start] sequentially.
1) Click!
2) Set D/A conversion module as follows.

Start I/O No.: "90"
Module type: "D/A Conversion Module"
Module model name: "Q62DA"
After the settings are completed, click the
Initial setting button.
2) Set!
3) In the following example, "CH1 D/A conversion

enable/disable setting" is set to "Enable" .
(this means using only CH1)
After the setting is completed, click the End button.
3) Set!
4) Click 4) Click the Auto refresh button in GX Configurator.
5) Set "D30" in the PLC side Device area on the "CH1

Digital output value" row of Setting item.
After the setting is completed, click the End setup
button.
5) Set!
(To next page)
7 - 19
6) Confirm that "Available" is set in the Initial setting and

Auto refresh column of Q62DA.
6) Confirm!
7) After the setting is completed, click [Intelligent function

module parameter] and then click [Save parameter].
8) Click the Exit button.
7) Click!
8) Click!
7 - 20
7.6.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine
(1) Sequence program

The sequence program converts values of the digital switches to analog signals.
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name Q62DA
Program name MAIN
X2
0 Y91 D/A CH1 output enable
X90 Set values exceeding 4,000
2 > K4X20 H4000 MOV K4000 D30
DA are treated as 4,000.
module <= K4X20 H4000 >= K4X20 H0 BIN K4X20 D30 Read the digital switch value (D30).
READY Displays D30 value
BCD D30 K4Y40
on the digital display (Y40 to Y4F).
23 END
X90: Module READY signal

At power-on or reset of a PLC CPU, this signal turns on if D/A conversion is ready
to be executed. D/A conversion is executed once this signal turned on.
Y91: CH.1 output enable/disable flag
Turning this flag on or off selects on each channel whether to output D/A
converted values or offset values.
ON: D/A converted value OFF: Offset value
(2) Operation of the demonstration machine

The Write to PLC dialog box opens. Click the Param + Prog button and then
click the Execute button to write to a CPU. After that, activate a CPU and
confirm the following items.
Write only the parameter settings to a second CPU in the same way.
(This is not necessary if there is only one CPU incorporated.) For how to write
parameters to second CPU, refer to Section 2.6.
1) Turn on X2 to enable D/A CH1 outputs.

2) Convert digital values set in the digital switches (X20 to X2F) to analog values.
Whenever the set value of the digital switch is outside the range of 0≤X≤4000,
4000 is D/A converted to be output.
The digital value to be converted to an analog value appears on the digital
display (Y40 to 4F).
3) The D/A OUTPUT voltmeter displays the voltage value that the D/A
conversion module outputs.
7 - 21
MEMO
7 - 22
CHAPTER 8 USING THE LOGIC TEST FUNCTION (GX SIMULATOR)
Offline debugging is possible by adding the logic test function (GX Simulator) to a
computer in which GX Developer is installed.
With the logic test function (GX Simulator), which allows sequence programs to be
developed and debugged on a single computer, checking a modified sequence
program is easier and quicker.
With the logic test function (GX Simulator)

substituting a PLC CPU, ladder monitoring,
device tests, etc. can be performed
without a PLC CPU.
(1) Functions supported by the logic test function (GX Simulator)

The functions supported by the logic test function (GX Simulator) include functions
executed from the logic test function (GX Simulator) menu and functions executed
from the GX Developer menu. For functions from the GX Developer menu, it is
necessary to use them together with the logic test function (GX Simulator).
Functions Meaning
Ladder monitor,
Monitors the operation status of the logic test function (GX Simulator).
Device monitor
Forcibly rewrites device values of the logic test function (GX Simulator)
Device test
during monitoring.
Writes parameter files and program files to the logic test function (GX
Write to PLC
Functions Simulator).
executed from PLC diagnostics Checks the logic test function (GX Simulator) status and errors.
the GX Skips (does not execute) program execution in the range between two
Skip execution
Developer menu designated steps.
Partial execution Executes the part of the program in a designated step or pointer range.
Step execution Executes the sequence program one step at a time.
Remote operation Operates the logic test function (GX Simulator) execution status.
Monitors the program execution status and number of executions as a
Program monitor list
table, and starts and stops the program execution in the table.
Conducts testing by monitoring the device memory status, forcing the
Monitor test
devices ON/OFF, and changing present values.
I/O system settings Simulates the operation of external devices by simple settings.
Functions
Tools Saves and reads the device memory and buffer memory.
executed from
Function equivalent to Issues a WDT error if a sequence program is written in such a way that it
the logic test
WDT runs an infinite loop.
function (GX
Error detail display
Simulator) menu Displays detailed error information at occurrence of an error.
function
Unsupported instruction Lists the instructions which are not supported by the logic test function
list display function (GX Simulator) if they are included in a sequence program.
8-1
8.1 Operating Procedure of Logic Test Function (GX Simulator)
This section describes how to use the logic test function (GX Simulator) for debugging.
Exercise this function with the program Project name QLLT .
1) Confirm that the project is open, and then click

the button.
1) Click!
2) The logic test function (GX Simulator) starts up.
Once the logic test function (GX Simulator) has

2) The logic test function started up, the parameter and program is
(GX Simulator) starts up! automatically written to the logic test function (GX
Simulator).
(This is equivalent to the write to PLC function.)
3) Click the window of GX Developer to activate it

3) Click to activate! (select it). The selected screen in Windows
switches from GX Simulator to GX Developer.
(To next page)
8-2
4) Ladder monitoring is executed without a PLC

connected (with a PLC in an offline state).
5) Use the logic test function (GX Simulator) to

monitor devices, change device values freely,
simulate how I/O modules and special modules
behave, etc.
5) Use the logic test function

(GX Simulator)! Note that if you changed a sequence program
according to debug results and intend to use the
logic test function (GX Simulator) to do another
debug, you need to stop the logic test function
(GX Simulator) first and click the button, and
then write the sequence program again.
6) After the debug is completed, click the

button to terminate the logic test function (GX
6) Click! Simulator).
When monitoring is in operation, terminate the

monitor mode before terminating the logic test
function (GX Simulator).
8-3
8.2 Monitoring Device Status and Testing Devices
This section describes how to monitor device status, turn bit devices on/off forcibly,
change word device values, etc.
Exercise this function with the program Project name QLLT .
(1) Turning bit devices on or off forcibly

In the example operation below, bit device "X" is monitored and "X0" is forcibly
turned on.
1) On the logic test function (GX Simulator)

window, click [Start] [Monitor Function]
[Device Memory Monitor] menu.
1) Click!
2) Check the Host Station and click the OK

button on the Transfer setup window.
2) Click!
3) Set!
3) Set X0 in the Device column on the Device
Memory Monitor window.
4) Click! 5) Status of bit device "X0" is displayed. Monitor

the status of "X0" in this window.
5) Monitor screen for "X0"

is displayed!
(To next page)
8-4
6) Double-click a device No. you wish to turn

on/off forcibly.
(In this example, "X0" is double-clicked.)
6) Double click!
7) Set! 7) Set X0 in the Device column of the Bit device

column on the Device write window.
8) Click the Force ON button.
1) Click!
9) Reflected! 9) The result of the device being turned on is

reflected on the ladder monitoring display.
Click the Force OFF button on the Device

write window to turn the device off.
8-5
(2) Changing word device values
In the example operation below, word device "C (current value)" is monitored and
"C0" is changed to "5".
1) On the logic test function (GX Simulator)

window, click [Start] [Monitor Function]
[Device Memory Monitor] menu.
1) Click!
2) Check the Host Station and click the OK

button on the Transfer setup window.
2) Click!
3) Set!
3) Set C0 in the Device column on the Device
Memory Monitor window.
4) Click!
(To next page)
8-6
5) Monitor screen for 5) Status of bit device "C(current value)" is

"C(current value)" is displayed! displayed. Monitor the status of "C(current
value)" in this window.
Note that the change on the value of "C0" is

6) Double-click! visibly recognizable in the logic test function (GX
Simulator) window and ladder monitoring screen.
6) Double-click the device No. to change its

device value.
(In this example, "C0" is double-clicked.)
7) Enter a value in the Setting value column of the

Word device/Buffer memory column on the
Device write window.
8) Click the Set button.
7) "5" is set!
8) Click!
9) The result of the device value being set to "5" is

9) Reflected! reflected on the ladder monitoring display.
8-7
8.3 I/O System Settings Function
The I/O system settings function allows GX Simulator to simulate how external
devices behave.
The following two setting methods are available for performing I/O system settings.
• Device value input: Specifies a device value that is to be set the set time after the
conditions are fulfilled.
• Timing chart input: Sets a timing chart that is followed once the conditions are
fulfilled.
Use the following example for exercise.
<<Example program>> Project name QLLT
X0 X1
0 Y70
Y70
M0
4 Y71
SM412 K9999
6 C0
SM400
11 MOV C0 K4Y80
14 END
<<Signal timing>>
M0
X0
X1
T
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
[Time unit: 10ms]
<<Operations to simulate>>
(1) The lamp Y71 on the demonstration machine lights when M0 turns on during the
device test by GX Developer.
(2) An exterior person confirms the lamp Y71 lighting, turns on X0, and then turns it
off. (T = 200) (T = 400)
(3) Confirm that the self-maintaining ladder in the sequence program is in operation,
and then turn on X1 to reset the maintaining status. After that, turn off X1 again.
(T = 600) (T = 800)
(4) Turn off M0.
(T = 1000)
In the example operation below, settings listed in the following table are made.
Signal name Setting method
M0 Device value input
X0, X1 Timing chart input
8-8
8.3.1 Device value input
In the example operation below, a simulation where M0 turns off 10 s after M0 turns on
is set.
1) Click [Start] and then [I/O System Settings] in

the window of the logic test function (GX
Simulator).
1) Click!
2) Double-click "Device Value Input (No.1-No.25)"

in the I/O System Settings tree.
2) Double-click!
3) Click the upper button in the No.1 area.
3) Click!
4) Set Device Name (M), Device Number (0), and

4) Set! Select ON/OFF (ON).
5) Click!
(To next page)
8-9
6) The set contents are displayed.
Note that this can be set by directly typing

"M0=ON" on a keyboard.
6) Set content is displayed!
7) Enter "1000" (10 s) in the text box of "Time".
7) Enter!
8) Click the upper button in the Input No. area.
8) Click!
9) Set Device Name (M) and Device Number (0).
9) Set! 10) Click the Add button.
10) Click!
11) Click!

12) Set content is displayed! Note that this can be set by directly typing "M0"
on a keyboard.
13) Click the "OFF" radio button.

13) Click!
14) Check!
14) Click the Enable checkbox to enable the
settings.
8 - 10
8.3.2 Timing chart value input
In the example operation below, the following simulation is set.

M0 turns ON X0 turns ON 2 s later, and turns OFF 4 s later.
X1 turns ON 6 s later, and turns OFF 8 s later
1) Click [Start] and then [I/O System Settings] in
the window of the logic test function (GX
Simulator).
1) Click!
2) Double-click "Timing Chart Input" in the I/O

System Settings tree.
2) Double-click!
3) Click the upper button in the No. area.
3) Click!
4) Set Device Name (M), Device Number (0), and

4) Set!
Select ON/OFF (ON).
5) Click!
Note that this can be set by directly typing

"M0=ON" on a keyboard.
6) Set content is displayed!
(To next page)
8 - 11
7) Click the Edit-Timing Chart Format button.

The Timing Chart Format Input dialog box
appears.
7) Click!
8) Click [Device] and then click [Enter Device].
8) Click!
9) Set Device Name (X) and Device Number (1).

9) Set!
10) Click the "OFF" radio button.
10) Click! 11) Click the Enter button.
11) Click! X1 is registered.
12) Follow the procedures 9) to 11) again to
13) Click!
register "X0" (default: OFF).
13) Click the Close button.
14) The registered device is displayed.
14) The registered device is displayed!
15) Click the button to display 20th scan.
16) Click 20th scan of the X0 line to specify it.
17) Click , or click [Edit], [Bit Device], and

17) Click!
16) Click! [Device ON] sequentially.
15) Click!
(To next page)
8 - 12
18) The timing at which X0 turns on is set.
18) When to turn on is set!

20) Click! [Device OFF] sequentially.
21) Click!
19) Click!
22) The timing at which X0 turns off is set.

23) Click!
[Device ON] sequentially to set the timing at
which X1 turns ON.
22) Click!
(To next page)
8 - 13

[Device OFF] sequentially to set the timing at
27) Click!
26) Click! which X1 turns off.
25) Click! 28) Click the OK button.

28) Click!
29) The set timing chart is displayed in green.
30) Click the Enable checkbox to enable the

29) Displayed in green! settings.
30) Check!
31) After the settings are complete, click [File] and

then [Save as] to save the I/O system
settings.
31) Click!
32) Enter a file name.

"A: SCHOOL LLT LLT.LIM" is entered here
as an example.
32) Enter a file name! 33) Click!

33) Click the Open button.
8 - 14
8.3.3 Executing the I/O system settings
1) Click on the icon line of the I/O SYSTEM

SETTINGS dialog box or click [File] and
[Execute I/O System Settings] sequentially.
1) Click!
2) Click!

3) Click!
4) Click the button in the GX Developer

window.
4) Click
(To next page)
8 - 15
7) Enter!
7) Enter "M0".
8) Click the FORCE ON button.
9) Click!
8) Click! 9) Click the Close button.
10) The simulation set in the I/O system settings

starts. To do this, refer to <<Signal timing>>
at the beginning of Section 8.3.
(1) X0 turns on 2 s after M0 turned ON.
X0 turns off 4 s after M0 turned ON.
(While X0 is ON, the self-maintaining
ladder operates and Y70 stays ON.)
Self-maintaining circuit
(1) Turns on 2 seconds after M0 turned on
　　　
Turns off 4 seconds after M0 turned on
(2) X1 turns ON 6 s after M0 turned on.

Y70 turns on
X1 turns OFF 8 s after M0 turned on.
Bit device output (While X1 is ON, Y70 in the
self-maintaining ladder stays OFF.)
(3) M0 turns OFF 5 s after it turned ON.

(2) Turns on 6 seconds after M0 turned on
　　　
Turns off 8 seconds after M0 turned on
Bit device output

Y70 turns off
Bit device output

(3) Turns off 10 seconds after M0 turned on
REFERENCE
The logic test function (GX Simulator) takes 100ms to execute one scan. Time
taken for one scan is the set time for constant scan. (Default is set to 100ms.)
This is designed to operate user-created sequence programs equally regardless of
the performance of personal computers.
To change the default time of 100ms, configure the parameter setting in GX
Developer and set any value as time for constant scan.
(QCPU must be operating to do this.)
8 - 16
CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE
9.1 Typical Troubles
The following bar graph shows the ratio of faulty parts and causes of PLC errors.
[Source: Inspection made by JEMA (The Japan Electrical Manufacture’s Association)]
Figure 9.1 Faulty parts on PLCs (multiple answers allowed)

(%)
80 Collected from 223 factories
73.1
60
40 34.1
20.6 19.3
20
14.3
9.4
2.7
0.9
0
I/O Power CPU Peripheral Commu- Memory Other No
supply devices nication answer
Figure 9.2 Causes of PLC faults (multiple answers allowed)

(%)
50 Collected from 223 factories
40.4
40
30
26.0 24.7 24.2
20 19.3
12.6 12.1
10
6.3
1.3
0
Unknown Noise Short of Manufacture Other Vibration No
cause load Poor Incorrect shock answer
connection programming
9-1
9.2 Maintenance
To keep PLCs in the best operating condition, conduct the following daily inspection
and periodic inspection.
(1) Daily inspection

The items that must be inspected daily are listed in table 9.1.
Table 9.1 Daily inspection

Item Inspection item Inspection Judgment criterion Remedy
Check that fixing
The module fixing hook
screws are not loose
1 Installation of base unit must be engaged and Retighten the screws.
and the cover is not
installed securely.
dislocated.
Check that the module
The module fixing hook Securely engage the
Installation of I/O is not dislocated and
2 must be engaged and unit fixing hook. Or
module the unit fixing hook is
installed securely. tighten with the screw.
engaged securely.
Check for loose Screws should not be Retighten the terminal
terminal screws. loose. screws.
The proper clearance
Check for distance
should be provided
between solderless Correct.
3 Connecting conditions between Solderless
terminals.
terminals.
Retighten the
Check the connector Connections should no
connector fixing
part of the cable. be loose.
screws.
Power supply The LED must be ON.
Check that the LED is
module "POWER" (Abnormal if the LED is
ON.
LED*1 OFF)
The LED must be ON.
CPU module Check that the LED is
(Abnormal if the LED is
"RUN" LED ON in RUN status.
OFF)
The LED must be Off.
CPU Check that the LED is
"ERROR" LED OFF.
ON or flickering.)
The LED must be Off.
CPU module Check that the LED is
"BAT.ARM" LED OFF.
ON)
The LED must be ON
Module indication LED
when the input power is

turned ON.
The LED must be
4 extinguished when the Refer to QCPU (Q
Check that the LED mode) User’s Manual
Input LED input power is turned
turns ON and OFF.
OFF.
(Abnormal if the LED
does not turn ON or
turn OFF as indicated
above.)
The LED must be ON
when the input power is
turned ON.
The LED must be
extinguished when the
Check that the LED
Output LED input power is turned
turns ON and OFF.
OFF.
(Abnormal if the LED
does not turn ON or
turn OFF as indicated
above.)
9-2
(2) Periodic inspection
The items that must be inspected one or two times every 6 months to 1 year are
listed below. Also perform this inspection when following changes are made; the
equipment is moved or modified, layout of the wiring is changed, the power supply
module is changed, etc.
Table 9.2 Periodic Inspection

Item Inspection item Inspection Judgment criterion Remedy
Ambient When the sequencer is
environment
Measure with a 0 to 55 °C
Ambient temperature used in the board, the
thermometer and a
1 Ambient humidity 5 to 95%RH*1 ambient temperature in
hygrometer.
Corrosive gas must not the board becomes the
Ambience Measure corrosive gas.
be present. ambient temperature.
Measure a voltage 85 to 132VAC
across the terminals of Change the power
2 Power voltage
100/200VAC and 170 to 264VAC supply.
24VDC.
Retighten the screws.
Move the module to
Looseness, The module must be If the CPU, I/O, or
Installation
check for looseness

rattling installed fixedly. power supply module is
3 and rattling.
loose, fix it with screws.
Adhesion of dirt Dirt and foreign matter
Check visually. Remove and clean.
and foreign matter must not be present.
Try to further tighten
Looseness of Screws must not be Retighten the terminal
screws with a
terminal screws. loose. screws.
screwdriver.
Connection
Proximity of
Solderless terminals
solderless
4 Check visually. must be positioned at Correct.
terminals to each
proper intervals.
other.
Retighten the
Looseness of Screws must not be
Check visually. connector fixing
connectors loose.
screws.
Even if the lowering of
a battery capacity is not
Check on the monitor
shown, replace the
mode of the GX (Preventive
5 Battery battery with a new one
Developer that M51 or maintenance)
if a specified service life
SM52 is turned OFF.
of the battery is
exceeded.
Spare product Use the normal product
Install the product on Operation must meet
6 on the actual PLC as a
and the actual PLC. the specifications.
spare product.
Compare the stored
Check on stored The two programs must Correct if there are
7 program with the
program be identical. differences.
running program.
Rotational status Rotation must be Exchange and clean if
Fan (heat exchanger)
8 Rotational sound without sounds or any abnormality is
filter
Clogging clogging. found.
The value must be
Check the offset/gain identical with the Correct if there are
9 Analog I/O
value. specifications (design differences.
value).
*1: When AnS Series Module is included in the system, the judgment criteria will be
from 10 to 90 % RH.
9.3 Consumable Products
Backup batteries on PLCs are consumable products.
9-3
9.4 Service Life of Output Relay
The relays of modules relaying on contacts to output are subject to consumption due to
the switching operation.
When a relay that is directly mounted on the print board of an output module is
consumed, it is necessary to replace the output module itself.
1000
500
200
100
Limit number of switching (unit: 10,000)
50
20
10
DC30V
t=0ms
5 DC100V
t=7ms
AC100V COS φ =0.7
AC200V COS φ =0.7

AC100V COS φ =0.35
DC24V
2 t=7ms AC200V COS φ =0.35
1
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10
Switching current (unit: A)
Figure 9.3 Life characteristics of output relay's contact
9-4
9.5 Spare Products
Alternative products are easily purchased through the Mitsubishi service centers or
local Mitsubishi representatives in Japan. So the purchasing documents can be
prepared even after an accident. Note, however, that for foreign-related products such
as exported products it is necessary to send alternative products beforehand.
To ease maintenance, refer to the following tips at design work.
(1) Module type easily replaced

The building block type modules feature easy replacement. Their structures make
it possible to replace just the faulty module to complete the replacement.
(2) Memory type

To use the standard RAMs or SRAM memory cards, the backup battery is
required.
The standard ROMs, Flash cards, and ATA cards do not require the battery for
use, and besides, they prevent unintentional program changes due to
human-related mistakes. They are recommended to be employed especially in
products for export.
(3) Reducing the number of module types

Reducing the number of module types is an efficient way for reducing the umber
of spare product types.
(4) Reserving some I/O points

By not using all the I/O points on 16-, 32-, and 64-point I/O modules but reserving
10% to 20% of them, it is possible to just make changes on wiring and programs
(I/O signals) instead of replacing the faulty module with a spare module. This is
efficient when there are no spare modules.
(5) Creating a document

The fact that PLC programs are easily modified may lead to inconsistency
between an operating program and documents (i.e. ladder diagram, program list).
Keep updating the document.
To do this, using a printer is efficient.
(6) Being experienced in peripheral devices

Being experienced in DOS/V personal computers, PUs, printers, etc. helps quick
recovery from an accident.
9-5
(7) Spare products
Table 9.3 Spare products
No. Product Quantity Remark
name
Storage lives of lithium batteries are about 5 years. So it
is recommended not to keep the stock all the time but to
1 Battery One or two
purchase them when needed. However, keep stock of 1
or 2 for accidental situation.
2 Floppy disk As required Backup FDs for the startup software and FDs for user
Note that I/O modules tend to have an error during test
One per operation.
3 I/O module
module type Also note that the contacts of relay output modules are
subject to consumption in long-term use.
CPU One used
4 CPU modules and memory cards are the core parts of a
module model
PLC. This means that an error on them causes the
Memory One used
5 system to go down.
card model
Same as above. As power supply modules are highly
Power
One used subject to temperature rise, their service lives tend to be
6 supply
model shorter than supposed in a high ambient temperature
module
environment.
Peripheral A PU is recommended as a spare of DOS/V personal
7 As required
devices computer.
9-6
9.6 Using Maintenance Supporters
The following shows examples of maintenance supporters, which are devices that
automatically notify an operator or maintenance person faults or operation status of
PLC-used systems or devices.
1. Error indication by commercial lamp

Connect an error LED lamp to the output module of a PLC so that the lamp
flashes at an error occurrence.
Lamp flicker
Output module (Y50 to Y6F)
Error indication lamp
Control panel
SM1 SM412
Lamp (Y50) flashes
Y50
when an error is detected
(Error detection) (1 second clock)
2. Displaying an error code on a commercial digital display

Connect the digital display to the output module of a PLC so that the error code
number of the detected error is indicated on the digital display.
Display in numerical values

Error Code Output module (Y70 to Y8F)
Error indication lamp
error code error code

0 0 3 2
Control panel
SM1 Display an error code number

BCD SD0 K2Y70 on the digital display
(Error detection) (error code) when an error is detected
9-7
3. Displaying the description of a detected error on the screen
The details of an error occurred on a PLC can be displayed on an external CRT
screen, plasma screen, liquid crystal screen, etc.
Displaying on a screen
Starting first step in progress

Arm Conveyer
Error occurrence! *00070
MELSEC-Q supports a wide variety of GOTs (Graphic Operation Terminals).

In addition to the error display function, GOTs feature a lot of useful functions such as
the graphic monitoring, ladder monitoring, device monitoring, touch-panel switch, and
printing function.
(Refer to the catalogs for details.)
9-8
APPENDIX
Appendix 1 I/O Control Mode
The CPU supports two types of I/O control modes; the direct mode and refresh mode.
Appendix 1.1 Direct mode
In the direct mode, input signals are imported to a PLC every time they are input and
treated it as input information. The operation results of a program are output to the
output data memory and the output modules. The following diagram shows the flow of
I/O data in the direct mode.
CPU module
CPU
(Operation processing)
Data memory for inputs (X)
2) 1) Input
Test operation using GX Developer
module
3) Rink refresh of MELSECNET/H
Write from serial communication modules, etc.
X0
4) Data memory for outputs (Y)
Y75
Y70 Executes the OUT instruction in the sequence Output
5) module
program.
Test operation using GX Developer
Writes from the serial communication modules,
etc.
• When the input contact instruction is performed:

An OR operation is performed in the input information 1) from the input module and
input information 2) in the data memory. Then this data is used as input information
3) at sequence program execution.
• When the output contact instruction is performed:
Output information 4) is read from the output (Y) data memory, and a sequence
program is executed.
• When the OUT instruction is performed:
The sequence program's operation result 5) is output to the output module, and is
stored in the output (Y) data memory.
• When the QCPU performs I/O in the direct mode, a sequence program uses DX for
inputs and DY for outputs.
App - 1
Appendix 1.2 Refresh mode
In the refresh mode, all changes occurred to an input module are imported to the input
data memory in a PLC CPU at a time before each time a scan is performed. The data
memory is used when performing the operation.
The operation results made in a program for output (Y) are stored to the output data
memory each time the operation is made. All the data stored in the output data
memory is batch-output to the output module after the execution of the END
instruction.
The following diagram shows the flow of I/O data in the refresh mode.
CPU module
CPU
(Operation processing)
When inputs
3) Data memory are refreshed Input
for input (X) 1) module
X0
4)
When outputs
Y75 Data memory are refreshed Output
Y70 for output (Y) 2) module
5)
• Input refresh
Input data in the input module is batch-read 1) before the execution of 0 step, and
stored to the data memory for input (X).
• Output refresh
Data 2) in the data memory for output (Y) is batch-output to the output module before
the execution of 0 step.
• When the input contact instruction is performed:
Input data is read from the input (X) data memory 3), and a sequence program is
performed.
• When the output contact instruction has been performed:
Output data 4) is read from the output (Y) data memory, and a sequence program is
performed.
• When the output OUT instruction is performed:
The sequence program operation result 5) is stored in the output (Y) data memory.
App - 2
Appendix 1.3 Comparisons between the direct mode and refresh mode
In the example ladder given below, input X0 turning on leads to output Y70 turning on.
Item Direct mode Refresh mode
DX0 X0
1, Ladder example Y70 Y70
Program is performed Program is performed

Input instruction (LD DX0)
Input instruction (LD X0)
Output instruction (OUT Y70) Output instruction (OUT Y70)
0 END 0 0 0 END 0 END 0 END 0

Input refresh
Output refresh
Minimum delay Minimum delay
2. Response lag X0
X0
Internal input
from when input Y70
Delay
is changed to Y70
(Execution time of the instruction) Delay
when output is (1 scan)
Maximum delay Maximum delay
changed
X0
accordingly X0
Y70 Internal input
Delay
(1 scan)
Y70
Delay
(2 scans)
• The delay time ranges from 0 scan (only

execution time of the instruction) to 1 scan. • The delay time ranges from 1 scan to 2 scans.
• The delay can be anywhere from 0 to 1 scan. • The delay 1 to 2 scans.
3. Execution time • Longer time than the refresh mode is needed as • Generally, only short time is needed as a PLC
of the I/O a PLC accesses I/O modules in the direct accesses data memory.
instructions mode.
• The longer of the execution time of the I/O • The shorter of the execution time of the I/O
instruction is, the longer the scan time is. instruction is, the shorter the scan time is.
4. Scan time
• The actual scan time is the time of program • The actual scan time is the total time of program
execution. execution, input transfer, and output transfer.
App - 3
Appendix 2 Instruction Table
For SFC-related instructions, refer to QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual

(SFC) SH-080023 .
Appendix 2.1 Sequence instructions
(1) Contact instruction
basic steps
Number of
Category
Subset
Instruction Execution
Symbol Processing details
symbol condition
• Starts logic operation (Starts a contact logic

LD
operation)
• Starts logical NOT operation (Starts b contact logic
LDI
operation)
1
AND • Logical product (a contact series connection) 3
ANI • Logical product NOT (b contact series connection)
Contact
OR • Logical sum (a contact parallel connection)

ORI • Logical sum NOT (b contact parallel connection)
LDP • Starts leading edge pulse operation
LDF • Starts trailing edge pulse operation
ANDP • Leading edge pulse series connection
2
ANDF • Trailing edge pulse series connection 3
ORP • Leading edge pulse parallel connection
ORF • Trailing edge pulse parallel connection
REMARK
1) 1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device being used.
Device Number of Steps
Internal device, file register (R0 to R32767) 1
Direct access input (DX) 2
Devices other than above 3
2) 2: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU
module being used.
Number of Steps
Device
QCPU QnACPU
Internal device, file register (R0 to R32767) 1 1
Direct access input (DX) 2 2
Devices other than above 3 3
3) 3: The subset is effective only with QCPU.
App - 4
(2) Connection instructions
basic steps
Number of
Category
Subset
symbol condition
• AND between logical blocks (Series connection

ANB ANB between logical blocks)
1
• OR between logical blocks (Series connection
ORB ORB between logical blocks)
MPS • Memory storage of operation results
MPS • Read of operation results stored with MPS
MRD
MRD instruction 1
MPP • Read and reset of operation results stored with
Connection
MPP
MPS instruction
INV • Inversion of operation result 1
• Conversion of operation result to leading edge
MEP
pulse
1
• Conversion of operation result to trailing edge
MEF
pulse
Vn • Conversion of operation result to leading edge
EGP
pulse (Stored at Vn)
1
Vn • Conversion of operation result to trailing edge
EGF
pulse (Stored at Vn)
App - 5
(3) Output instructions
basic steps
Number of
Category
Subset
symbol condition
OUT • Device output *1

*2
SET SET D • Set device *1
*2
RST RST D • Reset device *1
• Generates 1 cycle program pulse at leading

PLS PLS D
Output
edge of input signal

2
• Generates 1 cycle program pulse at trailing
PLF PLF D
edge of input signal
FF FF D • Reversal of device output 2
DELTA DELTA D
• Pulse conversion of direct output 2
DELTAP DELTAP D
REMARK
1) *1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device being used.
For details of the number of steps, refer to a page having the
explanation of each instruction.
2) *2: The execution condition applies only when an annunciator (F) is in use.
(4) Shift instructions
basic steps
Number of
Category
Subset
symbol condition
SFT SFT D
Shift • 1-bit shift of device 2
SFTP SFTP D
App - 6
(5) Master control instructions
basic steps
Number of
Category
Subset
symbol condition
Master MC MC n D • Starts master control 2

control MCR MCR n • Resets master control 1
(6) Termination instructions
basic steps
Number of
Category
Subset
symbol condition
Program FEND FEND • Termination of main program

1
end END END • Termination of sequence program
(7) Other Instructions
basic steps
Number of
Category
Subset
symbol condition
• Terminates sequence operation after

input condition has been met
Stop STOP STOP • Sequence program is executed by placing 1
the RUN/STOP key switch back in the
RUN position
NOP • Ignored (For program deletion or space)
• Ignored (To change pages during Ignored
NOPLF NOPLF
Ignored printouts) 1
• Ignored (Subsequent programs will be
PAGE PAGE n
controlled from step 0 of page n)
App - 7
Appendix 2.2 Basic instructions
(1) Comparison operation instruction
basic steps
Number of
Subset
Category Symbol Processing details
symbol condition
• Conductive status when (S1) = (S2)

LD S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1) ≠ (S2)
AND S1 S2
3
OR
S1 S2
• Conductive status when (S1) ≠ (S2)

LD S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1) = (S2)
AND S1 S2
3
OR
S1 S2
• Conductive status when (S1) > (S2)

LD S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1) ≤ (S2)
AND S1 S2
3
OR
S1 S2
16-bit data
comparisons • Conductive status when (S1) ≤ (S2)
LD S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1) > (S2)
AND S1 S2
3
OR
S1 S2
• Conductive status when (S1) < (S2)

LD S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1) ≥ (S2)
AND S1 S2
3
OR
S1 S2
• Conductive status when (S1) ≥ (S2)

LD S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1) < (S2)
AND S1 S2
3
OR
S1 S2
App - 8
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
LDD D S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1,

S2)
ANDD D S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≠ *1
ORD (S2+1, S2)

D S1 S2
LDD D S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≠ (S2+1,

S2)
ANDD D S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) = *1
ORD (S2+1, S2)

D S1 S2
LDD D S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1,

S2)
ANDD D S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≤ *1
ORD (S2+1, S2)

32-bit data D S1 S2
comparisons LDD D S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≤ (S2+1,
S2)
ANDD D S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) > *1
ORD (S2+1, S2)

D S1 S2
LDD D S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1,

S2)
ANDD D S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≥ *1
ORD (S2+1, S2)

D S1 S2
LDD D S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≥ (S2+1,

S2)
ANDD D S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) < *1
ORD (S2+1, S2)

D S1 S2
REMARK
*1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU
module being used.
Number of Steps
Device
QCPU QnACPU
• Word device: Internal device (except for file register ZR)
• Bit device: Devices whose device Nos. are multiples of 16, whose
digit designation is K8, and which use no index 5
3
modification.
• Constant : No limitations
QCPUs need the increased number of steps but provide faster processing speed.
App - 9
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
LDE E S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1,

S2)
ANDE E S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≠ 3
ORE (S2+1, S2)

E S1 S2
LDE E S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≠ (S2+1,

S2)
ANDE E S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) = 3
ORE (S2+1, S2)

E S1 S2
LDE E S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1,

S2)
ANDE E S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≤ 3
Real number ORE (S2+1, S2)

E S1 S2
data
LDE E S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≤ (S2+1,
comparisons
S2)
ANDE E S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) > 3
ORE (S2+1, S2)

E S1 S2
LDE E S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1,

S2)
ANDE E S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≥ 3
ORE (S2+1, S2)

E S1 S2
LDE E S1 S2 • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≥ (S2+1,

S2)
ANDE E S1 S2
• Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) < 3
ORE (S2+1, S2)

E S1 S2
App - 10
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
LD$ $ S1 S2 • Compares character string S1 and character

string S2 one character at a time. *
AND$ $ S1 S2 • Conductive status when (character string
3
S1) = (character string S2)
OR$ • Non-Conductive status when (character
$ S1 S2
string S1) ≠ (character string S2)
AND$ $ S1 S2
• Conductive status when (character string
3
S1) ≠ (character string S2)
$ S1 S2
string S1) = (character string S2)
AND$ $ S1 S2
3
S1) > (character string S2)
Character
$ S1 S2
string S1) ≤ (character string S2)
string data
• Compares character string S1 and character
comparisons LD$ $ S1 S2
AND$ $ S1 S2
3
S1) ≤ (character string S2)
$ S1 S2
string S1) > (character string S2)
AND$ $ S1 S2
3
S1) < (character string S2)
$ S1 S2
string S1) ≥ (character string S2)
string S2 one character at a time.
AND$ $ S1 S2
3
S1) ≥ (character string S2)
$ S1 S2
string S1) < (character string S2)
REMARK
1) *: The conditions under which character string comparisons can be made are
as shown below.
• Match: All characters in the strings must match
• Larger string: If character strings are different, determines the string
with the largest number of character codes
If the lengths of the character strings are different,
determines the longest character string
• Smaller string: If the character strings are different, determines the
string with the smallest number of character codes
If the lengths of the character strings are different,
determines the shortest character string
App - 11
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n • Compares n points of data from S1 with n

points of data from S2 in 1-word units,
BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n
and stores the results of the comparison
at n points from the bit device designated
BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n by (D).
Block data BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n

5
comparisons BKCMP P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n
BKCMP P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n
App - 12
(2) Arithmetic operation instruction
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
+ + S D • (D)+(S) (D)
3
+P +P S D
BIN 16-bit + + S1 S2 D • (S1)+(S2) (D)

addition
4
+P +P S1 S2 D
and
S D • (D) (S) (D)
subtraction
3
operations P P S D
S1 S2 D • (S1) (S2) (D)

4
P P S1 S2 D
D+ D+ S D • (D+1,D)+(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
*1
D+P D+P S D
BIN 32-bit D+ D+ S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)

addition
*2
D+P D+P S1 S2 D
and
• (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
subtraction D D S D
*1
operations D P D P S D
D D S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)

*2
D P D P S1 S2 D
BIN 16-bit S1 S2 D • (S1) (S2) (D+1,D)

*3
multiplica-
P P S1 S2 D
tion and
/ / S1 S2 D • (S1)/(S2) Quotient (D), Remainder (D+1)
division
4
operations /P /P S1 S2 D
BIN 32-bit D D S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)

(D+3,D+2,D+1,D) 4
multiplica-
D P D P S1 S2 D
tion and
D/ D/ S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1)/(S2+1,S2)
division
Quotient (D+1,D), Remainder (D+3,D+2) 4
operations D/P D/P S1 S2 D
App - 13
REMARK
1) *1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU
module being used.
Number of Steps
Device
QCPU QnACPU
3
modification.
module being used.
Number of Steps
Device
QCPU QnACPU
4
modification.
module being used.
Number of Steps
Device
QCPU QnACPU
4
modification.
App - 14
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
B+ B+ S D • (D)+(S) (D)
3
B+P B+P S D
BCD
B+ B+ S1 S2 D • (S1)+(S2) (D)
4-digit 4
addition B+P B+P S1 S2 D
and B B S D • (D) (S) (D)
subtraction 3
B P B P S D
operations
B B S1 S2 D • (S1) (S2) (D)
4
B P B P S1 S2 D
DB+ DB+ S D • (D+1,D)+(S+1,S) (D+1,D)

3
DB+P DB+P S D
BCD
DB+ DB+ S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
8-digit 4
addition DB+P DB+P S1 S2 D
and DB DB S D • (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
subtraction 3
DB P DB P S D
operations
DB DB S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
4
DB P DB P S1 S2 D
BCD B B S1 S2 D • (S1) (S2) (D+1,D)

4-digit 4
B P B P S1 S2 D
multiplica-
tion and B/ B/ S1 S2 D • (S1)/(S2) Quotient (D), Remainder (D+1)
division 4
B/P B/P S1 S2 D
operations
BCD DB DB S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
8-digit (D+3,D+2,D+1,D) 4
DB P DB P S1 S2 D
multiplica-
tion and DB/ DB/ S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1)/(S2+1,S2)
division
Quotient (D+1,D), Remainder (D+3,D+2) 4
DB/P DB/P S1 S2 D
operations
App - 15
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
E+ E+ S D • (D+1,D)+(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
3
Floating E+P E+P S D
decimal
E+ E+ S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
point data 4
addition E+P E+P S1 S2 D
and E E S D • (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
subtrac- 3
E P E P S D
tion
operations E E S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
4
E P E P S1 S2 D
Floating
decimal
E
* E S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1)
* (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
3
point data *
E P E P S1 S2 D
Multiplica- E/ E/ S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1)/(S2+1,S2) Quotient (D+1,D)
tion
and 4
E/P E/P S1 S2 D
division
operations
BIN block $+ $+ S D • Links character string designated with (S) to
addition character string designated with (D), and 3
$+P $+P S D
and stores the result from (D) onward.
subtrac- $+ $+ S1 S2 D • Links character string designated with (S2) to
tion character string designated with (S1), and 4
operations $+P $+P S1 S2 D
stores the result from (D) onward.
BK+ BK+ S1 S2 D n • Adds data of n points from (S1) and data of n
Character points from (S2) in batch. 5
BK+P BK+P S1 S2 D n
string data
BK BK S1 S2 D n • Subtracts data of n points from (S1) and data
combinations
of n points from (S2) in batch. 5
BK P BK P S1 S2 D n
App - 16
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
INC INC D • (D)+1 (D)

2
INCP INCP D
DINC DINC D • (D+1,D)+1 (D+1,D)

*1
BIN data DINCP DINCP D
increment DEC DEC D • (D) 1 (D)
2
DECP DECP D
DDEC DDEC D • (D+1,D) 1 (D+1,D)

*1
DDECP DDECP D
REMARK
module being used.
Number of Steps
Device
QCPU QnACPU
2
modification.
App - 17
(3) Data conversion instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
BCD conversion
BCD BCD S D · (S) (D)
3
BIN(0 to 9999)
BCD BCDP BCDP S D
conversion DBCD DBCD S D BCD conversion
· (S+1, S) (D+1, D)
BIN(0 to 99999999)
3
DBCDP DBCDP S D
BIN conversion
BIN BIN S D · (S) (D)
3
BCD(0 to 9999)
BIN BINP BINP S D
conversion DBIN DBIN S D · (S+1, S)
BIN conversion
(D+1, D)
BCD(0 to 99999999)
3
DBINP DBINP S D
Conversion Conversion to floating point
FLT FLT S D · (S+1, S) (D)
from BIN to 3
FLTP FLTP S D BIN(-32768 to 32767)
floating
DFLT DFLT S D Conversion to floating point
decimal · (S+1, S) (D+1, D) 3
point DFLTP DFLTP S D Real number(-2147483648 to 2147483647)
Conversion INT INT S D · (S+1, S)

BIN conversion
(D)
from 3
Real number(-32768 to 32767)
INTP INTP S D
floating
DINT DINT S D · (S+1, S)
BIN conversion
decimal (D+1, D)
3
Real number(-2147483648 to 2147483647)
point to BIN DINTP DINTP S D
DBL DBL S D Conversion

Conversion · (S) (D+, 1)
3
BIN(-32768 to 32767)
between DBLP DBLP S D
BIN 16-bit WORD WORD S D Conversion
· (S+1, S) (D)
and 32-bit 3
BIN(-32768 to 32767)
WORDP WORDP S D
GRY Conversion to gray code

GRY S D · (S) (D)
Conversion 3
BIN(-32768 to 32767)
GRYP GRYP S D
from BIN to
Conversion to gray code
gray code
DGRY DGRY S D · (S+1, S) (D+1, D)
3
DGRYP DGRYP S D Real number(-2147483648 to 2147483647)
App - 18
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
Conversion to gray code

GBIN GBIN S D · (S) (D)
Conversion 3
Gray code(-32768 to 32767)
GBINP GBINP S D
from gray
DGBIN DGBIN S D Conversion to gray code
code to BIN · (S+1, S) (D+1, D) 3
DGBINP DGBINP S D Gray code(-2147483648 to 2147483647)
NEG NEG D · (D) (D)

BIN data 2
NEGP NEGP D
Complement DNEG DNEG D · (D+1, D) (D+1, D)

BIN data 2
to 2 DNEGP DNEGP D
ENEG ENEG D · (D+1, D) (D+1, D)

Real number data 2
ENEGP ENEGP D
BKBCD BKBCD S D n • Batch converts BIN data n points from (S) to

BCD data and stores the result from (D) 4
BKBCDP BKBCDP S D n
Block onward.
conversions BKBIN BKBIN S D n • Batch converts BCD data n points from (S) to
BIN data and stores the result from (D) 4
BKBINP BKBINP S D n
onward.
App - 19
(4) Data conversion instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
16-bit MOV MOV S D ⋅ (S) (D)

data 1
transfer MOVP MOVP S D
32-bit DMOV DMOV S D ⋅ (S+1,S) (D+1,D)

data 3
transfer DMOVP DMOVP S D
Floating EMOV EMOV S D · (S+1, S) (D+1, D)

decimal Real number data
point 3
EMOVP EMOVP S D 2
data
transfer
Character $MOV $MOV S D • Transfers character string designated by (S)
string to device designated by (D) onward. 3
data $MOVP $MOVP S D
transfer
16-bit CML CML S D ⋅ (S) (D)
data
1
negation CMLP CMLP S D
transfer
32-bit DCML DCML S D ⋅ (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
data
3
negation DCMLP DCMLP S D
transfer
BMOV BMOV S D n (S) (D)
Block
n
4
transfer BMOVP BMOVP S D n
Multiple FMOV FMOV S D n
(D)
transfers (S)
n 4
of same FMOVP FMOVP S D n
block
16-bit XCH XCH S D ⋅ (S) (D)
data 3
exchange XCHP XCHP S D
32-bit DXCH DXCH S D ⋅ (S+1,S) (D+1,D)

data 3
exchange DXCHP DXCHP S D
Block BXCH BXCH S D n (S) (D)

data n
4
exchange BXCHP BXCHP S D n
Exchange SWAP b15 to b8 b7 to b0

SWAP D (S) 8 bits 8 bits
of upper
3
and lower SWAPP SWAPP D b15 to b8 b7 to b0
bytes (D) 8 bits 8 bits
App - 20
REMARK
module being used.
Number of Steps
Device
QCPU QnACPU
3
modification.
*2: The subset is effective only with QCPU.
App - 21
(5) Program branch instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
CJ CJ Pn • Jumps to Pn when input conditions are met 2

• Jumps to Pn from the scan after the meeting
SCJ SCJ Pn 2
of input condition
Jump
JMP JMP Pn • Jumps unconditionally to Pn 2
• Jumps to END instruction when input
GOEND GOEND 1
condition is met
(6) Program execution control instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
Disable
DI DI • Prohibits the running of an interrupt program 1
interrupts
Enable • Resets interrupt program execution
EI EI 1
interrupts prohibition
Interrupt
disable/ • Prohibits or permits interrupts for each
IMASK IMASK S 2
enable interrupt program
setting
• Returns to sequence program following an
Return IRET IRET 1
interrupt program
(7) I/O refresh instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
I/O
RFS RFS D n • Refreshes the relevant I/O area during scan 3
refresh
App - 22
(8) Other convenient instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
(S)+0
Up Down Up
(S)+1
UDCNT1 UDCNT1 S D n Cn current value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -2 -1 0
4
Up/down Cn contact
counter (S)+0
UDCNT2 UDCNT2 S D n (S)+1 4
Cn current value 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1
Cn contact
· (ON time of TTMR) n (D)

Teaching
TTMR TTMR D n 3
timer
n=0:1, n=1:10, n=2:100
• The 4 points from the bit device designated

by (D) operate as shown below,
depending.
on the ON/OFF status of the input conditions
Special
STMR STMR S n D for the STMR instruction: 3
timer
(D)+0: Off delay timer output
(D)+1: One shot after off timer output
(D)+2: One shot after on timer output
(D)+3: On delay timer output
Nearest • Rotates a rotary table with n1 divisions from
path ROTC ROTC S n1 n2 D the stop position to the position designated 5
control by (S+1) by the nearest path.
Ramp • Changes device data designated by D1 from
RAMP RAMP n1 n2 D1 n3 D2 6
signal n1 to n2 in n3 scans.
• Counts the pulse input from the device
Pulse designated by (S) for the duration of time
SPD SPD S n D 4
density designated by n, and stores the count in the
device designated by (D).
Pulse · (n1)Hz (D)
PLSY PLSY n1 n2 D 4
output Output n2 times
Pulse
n1
width n2
PWM PWM n1 n2 D 4
modulati
on (D)
• Store 16 times of n lows in the device

Matrix
MTR MTR S D1 D2 n specified by (S) to the device specified by 5
input
(D2) in sequence.
App - 23
Appendix 2.3 Application instructions
(1) Logical operation instruction
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
WAND WAND S D ⋅ (D) (S) (D)

3
WANDP WANDP S D
WAND WAND S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1) (S2) (D)

4
WANDP WANDP S1 S2 D *2
Logical DAND DAND S D ⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)

*1
product DANDP DANDP S D
DAND DAND S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)

*1
DANDP DANDP S1 S2 D *2
BKAND BKAND S1 S2 D n (S1) (S2) (D)

5
n
BKANDP BKANDP S1 S2 D n
WOR WOR S D ⋅ (D) (S) (D)

3
WORP WORP S D
WOR WOR S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1) (S2) (D)

4
WORP WORP S1 S2 D *2
Logical DOR DOR S D ⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)

*1
sum DORP DORP S D
DOR DOR S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)

*1
DORP DORP S1 S2 D *2
BKOR BKOR S1 S2 D n (S1) (S2) (D)

5
BKORP BKORP S1 S2 D n n
REMARK
*1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module
being used.
Number of Steps
Device
QCPU QnACPU
modification. 4
App - 24
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
WXOR WXOR S D ⋅ (D) (S) (D)

3
WXORP WXORP S D
WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1) (S2) (D)

4
WXORP WXORP S1 S2 D *2
Exclusive DXOR DXOR S D ⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)

*1
OR DXORP DXORP S D
DXOR DXOR S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)

*1
DXORP DXORP S1 S2 D *2
BKXOR BKXOR S1 S2 D n (S1) (S2) (D)

5
n
BKXORP BKXORP S1 S2 D n
WXNR WXNR S D ⋅ (D) (S) (D)

3
WXNRP WXNRP S D
WXNR WXNR S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1) (S2) (D)

4
WXNRP WXNRP S1 S2 D *2
NON
exclusive DXNR DXNR S D ⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
*1
logical DXNRP DXNRP S D
sum
DXNR DXNR S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
*1
DXNRP DXNRP S1 S2 D *2
(S1) (S2) (D)

BKXNOR BKXNOR S1 S2 D n
n 5
BKXNORP BKXNORP S1 S2 D n
REMARK
*1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module
being used.
Number of Steps
Device
QCPU QnACPU
4
modification.
App - 25
(2) Rotation instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
ROR ROR D n b15 (D) b0 SM700

3
RORP RORP D n Rotates n bits to the right
Right
rotation
RCR RCR D n b15 (D) b0 SM700
3
RCRP RCRP D n Rotates n bits to the right
ROL ROL D n SM700 b15 (D) b0

3
ROLP ROLP D n Rotates n bits to the left
Left
rotation
RCL RCL D n SM700 b15 (D) b0
3
RCLP RCLP D n Rotates n bits to the left
(D+1) (D)
DROR DROR D n b31 to b16 b15 to b0 SM700
3
DRORP DRORP D n Rotates n bits to the right
Right
rotation (D+1) (D)
DRCR DRCR D n b31 to b16 b15 to b0 SM700
3
DRCRP DRCRP D n Rotates n bits to the right
(D+1) (D)
DROL DROL D n SM700 b31 to b16 b15 to b0
3
DROLP DROLP D n Rotates n bits to the left
Left
rotation (D+1) (D)
DRCL DRCL D n SM700 b31 to b16 b15 to b0
3
DRCLP DRCLP D n Rotates n bits to the left
App - 26
(3) Shift instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
SFR SFR D n b15 bn b0

3
SFRP SFRP D n b15 b0 SM700
n-bit 0 to 0
shift
SFL SFL D n b15 bn b0
3
SFLP SFLP D n SM700 b15 b0
0 to 0
n
BSFR BSFR D n (D)
3
BSFRP BSFRP D n SM700
1-bit 0
shift n
BSFL BSFL D n
(D)
3
BSFLP BSFLP D n SM700
0
n
DSFR DSFR D n (D)
3
DSFRP DSFRP D n 0
1-word
shift n
DSFL DSFL D n
(D)
3
DSFLP DSFLP D n
0
(4) Bit processing instructions

basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
(D)
BSET BSET D n
b15 bn b0
3
BSETP BSETP D n 1
Bit set/
reset (D)
BRST BRST D n
b15 bn b0
3
BRSTP BRSTP D n 0
App - 27
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
(S1)
TEST TEST S1 S2 D b15 to b0 (D)
4
TESTP TESTP S1 S2 D Bit designated in (S2)
Bit tests
(S1)
DTEST DTEST S1 S2 D b31 to b0 (D)
4
DTESTP DTESTP S1 S2 D Bit designated in (S2)
Batch (S) ON (S) OFF

BKRST BKRST S n OFF OFF
reset of Reset n 3
bit OFF
ON
BKRSTP BKRSTP S n ON OFF
devices
(5) Data processing instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
(S2)
(S1)
SER SER S1 S2 D n
n
5
SERP SERP S1 S2 D n (D) : Match No.
Data (D+1): No. of matches
searches 32 bits
DSER DSER S1 S2 D n (S2)
(S1)
n 5
DSERP DSERP S1 S2 D n (D) : Match No.
(D+1): No. of matches
SUM SUM S D (S)

b15 b0
3
Bit SUMP SUMP S D (D): No. of 1s
checks
DSUM DSUM S D (S+1) (S)
3
DSUMP DSUMP S D (D):No. of 1s
Decode of 8 to 256
DECO DECO S D n (D)
Decode (S) Decode 4
2n bits
DECOP DECOP S D n n
Decode of 256 to 8
ENCO ENCO S D n (S)
Encode Encode (D) 4
ENCOP ENCOP S D n 2n bits n
App - 28
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
7-segment SEG SEG S D b3 to b0

(S) (D) 3
decode 7SEG
SEGP SEGP S D
DIS DIS S D n • Separates 16-bit data designated by (S) into

4-bit units, and stores at the lower 4 bits of n 4
DISP DISP S D n points from (D). (n) ≤ (4)
UNI UNI S D n • Links the lower 4 bits of n points from the

device designated by (S) and stores at the 4
UNIP UNIP S D n device designated by (D). (n) ≤ (4)
• Separates the data at the devices below
NDIS NDIS S1 D S2
that designated by (S1) into bits designated
below (S2) and stores in sequence from the
NDISP NDISP S1 D S2
4
Separating • Links the data at the devices below that
NUNI NUNI S1 D S2
and linking designated by (S1) in the bits designated
below (S2) and stores in sequence from the
NUNIP NUNIP S1 D S2
• Breaks n-points of 16-bit data from the
WTOB WTOB S D n
device designated by (S) into 8-bit units,
and stores in sequence at the device
WTOBP WTOBP S D n
designated by (D).
4
• Links the lower 8 bits of 16-bit data of
BTOW BTOW S D n
n-points from the device designated by (S)
into 16-bit units, and stores in sequence at
BTOWP BTOWP S D n
the device designated by (D).
• Searches the data of n-points from the

MAX MAX S D n
device designated by (S) in 16-bit units, and
stores the maximum value at the device
MAXP MAXP S D n
designated by (D).
4
• Searches the data of n-points from the
MIN MIN S D n
stores the minimum value at the device
MINP MINP S D n
designated by (D).
Search
• Searches the data of 2 n-points from the
DMAX DMAX S D n
stores the maximum value at the device
DMAXP DMAXP S D n
designated by (D).
4
• Searches the data of 2 n-points from the
DMIN DMIN S D n
stores the minimum value at the device
DMINP DMINP S D n
designated by (D).
App - 29
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
SORT S1 n S2 D1 D2
• Sorts data of n-points from device
· S2: Number of comparisons made
SORT during one run designated by (S1) in 16-bit units.
· D1: Device to turn ON when sort is
completed (n (n-1)/2 scans required)
· D2: For system use
Sort 6
DSORT S1 n S2 D1 D2
• Sorts data of 2 n-points from device
· S2: Number of comparisons made
DSORT during one run designated by (S1) in 32-bit units.
· D1: Device to turn ON when sort is
completed (n (n-1)/2 scans required)
· D2: For system use
WSUM WSUM S D n • Adds 16 bit BIN data of n-points from the

device designated by (S), and stores it in
WSUMP WSUMP S D n the device designated by (D).
Total value
4
calculations
DWSUM DWSUM S D n • Adds 32 bit BIN data of n-points from the
device designated by (S), and stores it in
DWSUMP DWSUMP S D n the device designated by (D).
App - 30
(6) Structure creation instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
FOR FOR n • Executes n times between FOR and 2

Number NEXT .
NEXT NEXT 1
of
BREAK BREAK D Pn • Forcibly ends the execution of the
repeats
FOR to NEXT cycle and jumps 3
BREAKP BREAKP D Pn pointer to Pn.
• Executes sub-routine program Pn when *1

CALL CALL Pn S1 to Sn
input condition is met. 2
(S1 to Sn are arguments sent to +
CALLP CALLP Pn S1 to Sn subroutine program. 0 ≤ (n) ≤ (5) n
RET RET • Returns from sub-routine program 1
*1
FCALL FCALL Pn S1 to Sn • Performs non-execution processing of
2
sub-routine program Pn if input
+
FCALLP FCALLP Pn S1 to Sn conditions have not been met.
Sub n
routine ECALL Pn S1 to Sn • Executes sub-routine program Pn from
*2
program ECALL within designated program name when
: Program name 3
calls input conditions have not been met.
+
ECALLP Pn S1 to Sn (S1 to Sn are arguments sent to
ECALLP n
: Program name subroutine program. 0 ≤ (n) ≤ (5)
EFCALL Pn S1 to Sn
EFCALL • Performs non-execution processing of *2
: Program name sub-routine program Pn from within 3
designated program name if input +
EFCALLP Pn S1 to Sn
EFCALLP conditions have not been met. n
: Program name
• Performs link refresh and general data

COM COM 1
processing.
IX IX S • Conducts index modification for 2

Device modification ladder individual devices used in device
IXEND IXEND modification ladder. 1
Fixed index
modification IXDEV IXDEV • Stores modification value used for index 1
modification performed between IX
IXSET Pn D
and IXEND in the device below that
IXSET 3
designated by (D).
Modification value designation
*1: n indicates number of arguments for sub-routine program.

*2: n indicates the total of the number of arguments used in the sub-routine
program and the number of program name steps.
The number of program name steps is calculated as "number of
characters in the program / 2". (decimal fraction is rounded up).
App - 31
(7) Data table operation instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
(S) (D) Pointer+1

FIFW FIFW S D Pointer
3
FIFWP FIFWP S D Device of
pointer+1
(S) Pointer Pointer-1 (D)

FIFR FIFR S D
3
FIFRP FIFRP S D
(S) Pointer-1 (D)

FPOP FPOP S D Pointer
Data table
3
processing
FPOPP FPOPP S D
Device of pointer+1
(S) (D) Pointer+1

FINS FINS S D n Pointer
4
FINSP FINS S D n
Designate using n
FDEL FDEL S D n (S) Pointer Pointer-1 (D)
4
FDELP FDELP S D n
Designate using n
App - 32
(8) Buffer memory access instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
FROM FROM n1 n2 D n3 • Reads data in 16-bit units from special

5
FROMP FROMP n1 n2 D n3 function module.
Data
read DFRO DFRO n1 n2 D n3 • Reads data in 32-bit units from special
5
DFROP DFROP n1 n2 D n3 function module.
TO TO n1 n2 S n3 • Writes data in 16-bit units to special function

5
TOP module.
Data TOP n1 n2 S n3
write DTO DTO n1 n2 S n3 • Writes data in 32-bit units to special function
5
DTOP module.
DTOP n1 n2 S n3
(9) Display instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
• Outputs ASCII code of 8 points (16

With SM701 off
PR PR S D characters) from device designated by (S)
to output module.
ASCII With SM701 on • Outputs ASCII code from device designated
PR 3
print PR S D by (S) to 00H to output module.
• Converts comments from device designated
PRC PRC S D by (S) to ASCII code and outputs to output
module.
• Displays ASCII code of 8 points (16

characters) from the device designated by
LED LED S
(S) at the LED display device on the front of
Display the CPU module. 2
• Displays the comments from the device
LEDC LEDC S designated by (S) at the LED display device
on the front of the CPU module.
Reset LEDR LEDR • Resets annunciator and display unit display. 1
App - 33
(10) Debugging and failure diagnosis instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
• CHK instruction is executed when

CHKST is executable.
CHKST CHKST • Jumps to the step following the CHK
instruction when CHKST is in a
non-executable status. 1
• During normal conditions SM80: OFF,
Check CHK SD80: 0
CHK
Check condition • During abnormal conditions SM80: ON,
SD80: Failure No.
• Starts update in ladder pattern being
CHKCIR CHKCIR
checked by CHK instruction.
1
• Ends update in ladder pattern being
CHKEND CHKEND
checked by CHK instruction.
SLT SLT • Executes status latch.

Status
1
latch • Resets status latch to enable
SLTR SLTR
re-execution.
STRA STRA • Applies trigger to sampling trace.

Sampling
1
trace • Resets sampling trace to enable
STRAR STRAR
re-execution.
PTRA PTRA • Applies trigger to program trace.

1
• Resets program trace to enable
Program PTRAR PTRAR
re-execution.
trace
PTRAEXE PTRAEXE
• Executes program trace. 1
PTRAEXEP PTRAEXEP
App - 34
(11) Character string processing instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
• Converts 1-word BIN value designated by

BINDA BINDA S D
(S) to a 5-digit, decimal ASCII value, and
3
stores it at the word device designated by
BIN to BINDAP BINDAP S D
(D).
decimal
ASCII DBINDA DBINDA S D
3
stores it at word devices following the word
DBINDAP DBINDAP S D
device number designated by (D).

BINHA BINHA S D
(S) to a 4-digit, hexadecimal ASCII value,
3
and stores it at word devices following the
BIN to BINHAP BINHAP S D
word device number designated by (D).
hexadecimal
ASCII • Converts 2-word BIN value designated by
DBINHA DBINHA S D
(S) to a 8-digit, hexadecimal ASCII value,
3
and stores it at word devices following the
DBINHAP DBINHAP S D
word device number designated by (D).
• Converts 1-word BCD value designated by

BCDDA BCDDA S D
3
BCD to BCDDAP BCDDAP S D
decimal
ASCII • Converts 2-word BCD value designated by
DBCDDA DBCDDA S D
(S) to an 8-digit, decimal ASCII value, and
3
DBCDDAP DBCDDAP S D
• Converts a 5-digit, decimal ASCII value

DABIN DABIN S D
designated by (S) to 1-word BIN value, and
3
stores it at a word device number
Decimal DABINP DABINP S D
designated by (D).
ASCII to
BIN • Converts a 10-digit, decimal ASCII value
DDABIN DDABIN S D
3
DDABINP DDABINP S D
designated by (D).
• Converts a 4-digit, hexadecimal ASCII value

HABIN HABIN S D
3
HABINP HABINP S D
Hexadecimal designated by (D).
ASCII to BIN • Converts an 8-digit, hexadecimal ASCII
DHABIN DHABIN S D
value designated by (S) to 2-word BIN
3
value, and stores it at a word device
DHABINP DHABINP S D
number designated by (D).
App - 35
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
• Converts a 4-digit, decimal ASCII value

DABCD DABCD S D
designated by (S) to 1-word BCD value, and
3
Decimal DABCDP DABCDP S D
designated by (D).
ASCII to
• Converts an 8-digit, decimal ASCII value
BCD DDABCD DDABCD S D
designated by (S) to 2-word BCD value, and
3
DDABCDP DDABCDP S D
designated by (D).
Device
COMRD COMRD S D
comment • Stores comment from device designated by
3
read (S) at a device designated by (D).
COMRDP COMRDP S D
operation
Character
LEN LEN S D • Stores data length (number of characters) in
string
character string designated by (S) at a 3
length
LENP LENP S D device designated by (D).
detection
• Converts a 1-word BIN value designated by

STR STR S1 S2 D (S2) to a decimal character string with the
total number of digits and the number of
4
decimal fraction digits designated by (S1)
BIN to STRP STRP S1 S2 D and stores them at a device designated by
decimal (D).
character • Converts a 2-word BIN value designated by
string DSTR DSTR S1 S2 D (S2) to a decimal character string with the
total number of digits and the number of
4
decimal fraction digits designated by (S1)
DSTRP DSTRP S1 S2 D and stores them at a device designated by
(D).
• Converts a character string including

VAL VAL S D1 D2
decimal point designated by (S) to a 1-word
BIN value and the number of decimal 4
Decimal VALP fraction digits, and stores them into devices
VALP S D1 D2
character designated by (D1) and (D2).
string to • Converts a character string including
BIN DVAL DVAL S D1 D2
decimal point designated by (S) to a 2-word
BIN value and the number of decimal 4
DVALP fraction digits, and stores them into devices

DVALP S D1 D2
designated by (D1) and (D2).
App - 36
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
Floating
decimal ESTR ESTR S1 S2 D • Converts floating decimal point data
point to designated by (S1) to character string, and 4
character stores them in a device designated by (D).
ESTRP ESTRP S1 S2 D
string
Character
EVAL EVAL S D
string to • Converts character string designated by
floating (S1) to floating decimal point data, and 3
decimal stores them in a device designated by (D).
EVALP EVALP S D
point
• Converts 1-word BIN values of the device

ASC ASC S D n
Hexadecimal number and later designated by (S) to
4
BIN to ASCII ASCII, and stores only n characters of them
ASCP ASCP S D n at the device number designated by (D).
• Converts only n ASCII characters of the

ASCII to HEX HEX S D n
device number and later designated by (S)
Hexadecimal 4
to BIN values, and stores them at the device
BIN HEXP HEXP S D n
number designated by (D).
App - 37
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
RIGHT RIGHT S D n • Stores n characters from the end of a

character string designated by (S) at the
RIGHTP RIGHTP S D n device designated by (D).
4
LEFT LEFT S D n • Stores n characters from the beginning of a
character string designated by (S) at the
LEFTP LEFTP S D n device designated by (D).
• Stores the designated number of characters
MIDR MIDR S1 D S2
Character in the character string designated by (S1)
string from the position designated by (S2) at the
MIDRP MIDRP S1 D S2
processing device designated by (D).
4
• Stores the designated number of characters
MIDW MIDW S1 D S2
in the character string designated by (S1)
from the position designated by (S2) at the
MIDWP MIDWP S1 D S2
INSTR INSTR S1 S2 D n • Searches character string (S1) from the nth

character of character string (S2), and 5
INSTRP INSTRP S1 S2 D n stores matched positions at (D).
Floating • Converts floating decimal point data (S1) to

EMOD EMOD S1 S2 D
decimal BCD data with number of decimal fraction
4
point to digits designated by (S2), and stores at
EMODP EMODP S1 S2 D
BCD device designated by (D).
BCD to • Converts BCD data (S1) to floating decimal

EREXP EREXP S1 S2 D
floating point data with the number of decimal
4
decimal fraction digits designated by (S2), and
EREXPP EREXPP S1 S2 D
point stores at device designated by (D).
App - 38
(12) Special function instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
SIN SIN S D ⋅ Sin(S+1,S) (D+1,D)

3
SINP SINP S D
COS COS S D ⋅ Cos(S+1,S) (D+1,D)

3
COSP COSP S D
Trigono-
metric TAN TAN S D ⋅ Tan(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
3
functions
TANP TANP S D
(Floating
decimal ASIN ASIN S D ⋅ Sin 1(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
3
point ASINP ASINP S D
data)
ACOS ACOS S D ⋅ Cos 1(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
3
ACOSP ACOSP S D
ATAN ATAN S D ⋅ Tan 1(S+1,S) (D+1,D)

3
ATANP ATANP S D
RAD RAD S D · (S+1,S) (D+1,D)

Conversion Conversion from 3
angles to radians
between RADP RADP S D
angles and (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DEG DEG S D ·
radians Conversion from 3
radians to angles
DEGP DEGP S D
Square SQR SQR S D ⋅ (S+1,S) (D+1,D)

3
root SQRP SQRP S D
Exponent EXP EXP S D ⋅ e(S+1,S) (D+1,D)

3
operations
EXPP EXPP S D
Natural LOG LOG S D ⋅ Log e(S+1,S) (D+1,D)

3
logarithm
LOGP LOGP S D
Random RND RND D • Generates a random number (from 0 to less

number than 32767) and stores it at the device
generation RNDP RNDP D designated by (D).
Random 2
SRND SRND D • Updates random number series according
number
to the 16-bit BIN data stored in the device
series
SRNDP SRNDP D designated by (S).
update
App - 39
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
BSQR BSQR S D
(S) (D)+0
· Integral part
3
+1 Decimal fraction
Square BSQRP BSQRP S D
root BDSQR BDSQR S D

· (S+1, S) (D)+0 Integral part
3
+1 Decimal fraction
BDSQRP BDSQRP S D
BSIN BSIN S D · Sin(S) (D)+0 Sign

+1 Integral part 3
BSINP BSINP S D +2 Decimal fraction
BCOS BCOS S D · Cos(S) (D)+0 Sign

+1 Integral part 3
BCOSP BCOSP S D +2 Decimal fraction
BTAN BTAN S D · Tan(S) (D)+0 Sign

+1 Integral part 3
Trigonometric BTANP BTANP S D +2 Decimal fraction
function BASIN BASIN S D · Sin-1(S) (D)+0 Sign

+1 Integral part 3
BASINP BASINP S D +2 Decimal fraction
BACOS BACOS S D · Cos-1(S) (D)+0 Sign

+1 Integral part 3
BACOSP BACOSP S D +2 Decimal fraction
BATAN BATAN S D · Tan-1(S) (D)+0 Sign

+1 Integral part 3
BATANP BATANP S D +2 Decimal fraction
App - 40
(13) Data control instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
• When (S3)<(S1)
LIMIT LIMIT S1 S2 S3 D ................Store value of (S1) at (D)
• When (S1) ≤ (S2) ≤ (S3)
5
................Store value of (S3) at (D)
Upper LIMITP LIMITP S1 S2 S3 D • When (S2)<(S3)
and ................Store value of (S2) at (D)
lower
• When ((S3)+1, (S3))<((S1)+ 1, S1)
limit
DLIMIT DLIMIT S1 S2 S3 D .... Store value of ((S1)+1, (S1)) at ((D)+1, (D))
controls
• When ((S1)+1, (S1)) ≤ ((S3)+1, (S3))<(S2+1, S2)
5
.... Store value of ((S3)+1, (S3)) at ((D)+1, (D))
• When ((S2), (S2)+1)<((S3), (S3)+1)
DLIMITP DLIMITP S1 S2 S3 D
.... Store value of ((S2)+1, (S2)) at ((D)+1, (D))
BAND BAND S1 S2 S3 D • When (S1) ≤ (S3) ≤ (S2) ... 0 (D)

• When (S3)<(S1) ............... (S3)-(S1) (D) 5
BANDP BANDP S1 S2 S3 D • When (S2)<(S3) ............... (S3)-(S2) (D)
Dead • When ((S1)+1, (S1)) ≤ ((S3)+1, (S3)) ≤

band DBAND DBAND S1 S2 S3 D
((S2)+1, (S2)) .................... 0 (D)+1, (D))
controls • When ((S3)+1, (S3))<((S1)+1, (S1))
5
...((S3)+1, (S3)) - ((S1)+1, (S1)) ((D)+1, (D))
• When ((S2)+1, (S2))<((S3)+1, (S3))
DBANDP DBANDP S1 S2 S3 D
...((S3)+1, (S3)) - ((S2)+1, (S2)) ((D)+1, (D))
ZONE ZONE S1 S2 S3 D • When (S3)=0...................... 0 (D)

• When (S3)>0 ..................... (S3)+(S2) (D) 5
ZONEP ZONEP S1 S2 S3 D • When (S3)<0 .................... (S3)-(S1) (D)
Zone • When ((S3)+1, (S3))=0 ...... 0 ((D)+1, (D))

DZONE DZONE S1 S2 S3 D
controls • When ((S3)+1, (S3))>0
...((S3)+1, (S3))+((S2)+1, (S2)) ((D)+1, (D)) 5
• When ((S3)+1, (S3))<0
DZONEP DZONEP S1 S2 S3 D
...((S3)+1, (S3)) + ((S1)+1, (S1)) ((D)+1, (D))
App - 41
(14) Switching instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
Block RSET RSET S • Converts extension file register block

number 2
number to number designated by (S).
designations RSETP RSETP S
QDRSET QDRSET File name *2

• Sets file names used as file registers. +
QDRSETP QDRSETP File name n
File set
QCDSET QCDSET File name *2
• Sets file names used as file registers. +
QCDSETP QCDSETP File name n
* :n ([number of file name characters] / 2) indicates a step. (decimal fraction
is rounded up)
(15) Clock instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
· (Clock element) (D)+0 Year

DATERD DATERD D +1 Month
+2 Day
+3 Hour 2
+4 Min.
Read/
DATERDP DATERDP D +5 Sec.
write +6 Day of week
clock · (D)+0 Year (Clock element)
data DATEWR DATEWR S +1 Month

+2 Day
+3 Hour 2
+4 Min.
DATEWRP DATEWRP S +5 Sec.
+6 Day of week
DATE+ DATE+ S1 S2 D (S1) (S2) (D)

Hour Hour Hour
4
Clock data Min. + Min. Min.
DATE+P DATE+P S1 S2 D Sec. Sec. Sec.
addition/
subtraction DATE DATE S1 S2 D (S1) (S2) (D)
Hour Hour Hour
4
Min. - Min. Min.
DATE P DATE P S1 S2 D Sec. Sec. Sec.
SECOND (S) (D)

SECOND S D
Hour Sec. (lower)
Min. Sec. (upper)
Clock data SECONDP SECONDP S D Sec.
3
transaction (S) (D)
HOUR HOUR S D
Sec. (lower) Hour
Sec. (upper) Min.
HOURP HOURP S D Sec.
App - 42
(16) Peripheral device instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
• Stores message designated by (S) at

Input/ QnACPU.
MSG MSG S 2
output to This message is displayed at the peripheral
peripheral device.
devices • Data input from the peripheral device is
PKEY PKEY D 2
stored at device designated by (D).
(17) Program control instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
PSTOP PSTOP Program name *2

• Places designated program in standby
+
status.
PSTOPP PSTOPP Program name n
POFF POFF Program name • Turns OUT instruction coil of designated *2

Program program OFF, and places program in +
control POFFP POFFP Program name standby status. n
instruc- *2
PSCAN PSCAN Program name
• Registers designated program as scan
tions +
PSCANP PSCANP
execution type.
Program name n
PLOW PLOW Program name *2

• Registers designated program as low speed
+
execution type.
PLOWP PLOWP Program name n
*: n ([number of file name characters] / 2) indicates a step. (decimal
fraction is rounded up).
App - 43
(18) Other instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
WDT WDT • Resets watchdog timer during sequence

WDT reset 1
program.
WDTP WDTP
Timing (D)
DUTY DUTY n1 n2 D n1 scan n2 scan 4
clock
SM420 to SM424, SM430 to SM434
0 Lower 8 bits
ZRRDB ZRRDB n D Higher 8 bits ZR0
1
2 Lower 8 bits
Higher 8 bits ZR1 3
3
ZRRDBP ZRRDBP n D n 8 bits (D)
Direct
(S) 0 Lower 8 bits
read/write ZRWRB ZRWRB n S 1 Higher 8 bits ZR0
operations 2 Lower 8 bits 3
3 Higher 8 bits ZR1
in 1-byte ZRWRBP ZRWRBP n S n 8 bits
units
ADRSET ADRSET S D (S) (D)
Indirect address of
designated device 3
ADRSETP ADRSETP S D Device name
Numerical • Takes in ASCII data for 8 points of input

key input module designated by (S), converts to
KEY KEY S n D1 D2 5
from hexadecimal value following device number
keyboard designated by (D1), and stores.
Batch
ZPUSH ZPUSH D • Saves the contents of index registers Z0 to
save of
Z15 to a location starting from the device
index
ZPUSHP ZPUSHP D designated by (D).
register
2
Batch
ZPOP ZPOP D • Reads the data stored in the location
recovery
starting from the device designated by (D)
of index
ZPOPP ZPOPP D to index registers Z0 toZ15.
register
Batch
write EROMWR EROMWR S D1 n D2
operation
• Writes a batch of data to E2PROM file
to 5
2
register.
E PROM
EROM
file EROMWRP S D1 n D2
WRP
register
App - 44
Appendix 2.4 Instructions for data link
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
J.ZCOM Jn
Network JP.ZCOM Jn
ZCOM Refreshes the designated network. 5
refresh
G.ZCOM Un
GP.ZCOM Un
J.READ Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)
G.READ Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)

QnA link READ 9
instruction: JP.READ Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)
Reading GP.READ Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)

Reads the word device data of another
data from J.SREAD Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3) station to host station.
another G.SREAD Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3)
station SREAD 10
JP.SREAD Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3)
GP.SREAD Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3)
J.WRITE Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)
G.WRITE Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)

QnA link WRITE 10
instruction: JP.WRITE Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)
Writing GP.WRITE Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)

Writes the data of host station to the word
data to J.SWRITE Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3) device of other stations.
other G.SWRITE Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3)
stations SWRITE 11
JP.SWRITE Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3)
GP.SWRITE Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3)
QnA link J.SEND Jn (S1) (S2) (D1)
instruction: G.SEND Un (S1) (S2) (D1)

SEND Sends data (message) to other stations. 8
Sending JP.SEND Jn (S1) (S2) (D1)
data GP.SEND Un (S1) (S2) (D1)
QnA link J.RECV Jn (S1) (S2) (D1)
instruction: G.RECV Un (S1) (S2) (D1)

Receives data (message) sent to the host
RECV 8
Receiving JP.RECV Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) station.
data GP.RECV Un (S1) (S2) (D1)
QnA link J.REQ Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)
instruction: G.REQ Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)

Transient Sends a transient request to other stations
REQ 8
requests and executes it.
JP.REQ Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)
from other
GP.REQ Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)
stations
App - 45
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
QnA link
instruction:
Reading JP.ZNFR Jn S1 S2 D1
data from
special Reads data from the special function
ZNFR 8
function modules at remote I/O stations.
modules
at remote GP.ZNFR Un S1 S2 D1
I/O
stations
QnA link
instruction: J.ZNTO Jn S1 S2 D
Writing
data to JP.ZNTO Jn S1 S2 D
special Writes data from the special function
ZNTO 8
function modules at remote I/O stations.
modules G.ZNTO Un S1 S2 D
at remote
I/O
GP.ZNTO Un S1 S2 D
stations
A-series
compatible
J.ZNWR Jn n1 (D1) (S) n2 (D2)
link
instruction:
Writes the data of host station to the word
Writing ZNWR 32
device of other stations.
device
data to JP.ZNWR Jn n1 (D1) (S) n2 (D2)
other
stations
A-series
compatible
J.ZNRD Jn n1 (D1) (S) n2 (D2)
link
instruction:
Reads the word device data of another
Reading ZNRD 32
station to host station.
device
data from JP.ZNRD Jn n1 (D1) (S) n2 (D2)
other
stations
App - 46
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
A-series
compatible
link
G.RFRP Un n1 D1 n2 D2
instruction:
Reading
data from Reads data from the special function
RFRP 11
special modules at remote I/O stations.
function
modules
GP.RFRP Un n1 D1 n2 D2
at remote
I/O
stations
A-series
compatible
link
G.RTOP Un n1 D1 n2 D
instruction:
Writing
data to Writes data from the special function
RTOP 11
special modules at remote I/O stations.
function
modules
GP.RTOP Un n1 D1 n2 D
at remote
I/O
stations
Reading Z.RTREAD n D
routing RTREAD Reads data set at routing parameters. 7
information ZP.RTREAD n D
Registering Z.RTWRITE n S Writes routing data to the area designated by

routing RTWRITE 8
routing parameters.
information ZP.RTWRITE n S
App - 47
Appendix 2.5 QCPU instructions
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
• Reads the module information stored in the

Reading UNIRD UNIRD n1 D n2
area starting from the I/O No. designated by
module (n) by the points designated by (n2), and 4
information stores it in the area starting from the device
UNIRDP UNIRDP n1 D n2
designated by (d).
• Stores the trace data set with peripheral
device, by the number of times set when
Trace set TRACE TRACE 1
SM800, SM801and SM802 turn on, to the
sampling trace file in the IC memory card.
Trace
TRACER TRACER • Resets the data set by TRACE instruction. 1
reset
Writing data
to SP.FW
SP.FWRITE U0 S0 D0 S1 S2 D1 • Writes data to the designated file. 11
designated RITE
file
Reading
data from
SP.FREAD SP.FREAD U0 S0 D0 S1 S2 D1 • Reads data from the designated file. 11
designated
file
Loading • Transfers the program stored in a memory

program card or standard memory (other than drive
PLOADP PLOADP S D 3
from 0) to drive 0 and places the program in
memory standby status.
Unloading
program
PUNLO • Deletes the standby program stored in
from PUNLOADP S D 3
ADP standard memory (drive 0).
program
memory
• Deletes standby program stored in standard
memory (drive 0) designated by (S1). Then,
Load + transfers the program stored in a memory
PSWAPP PSWAPP S1 S2 D 4
unload card or standard memory (other than drive
0) designated by (S2) to drive 0 and places
it in standby status.
High-speed
RBMOV RBMOV S D n • Transfers n points of 16-bit data from the
block
device designated by (S) to the location 4
transfer of
RBMOVP RBMOVP S D n starting from the device designated by (D).
file register
App - 48
basic steps
Number of
Subset
symbol condition
Write to
host S.TO S.TO n1 n2 n3 n4 D
• Writes the device data of the host station to
station
the shared memory area of the host station 5
CPU
CPU module.
shared S.TOP S.TOP n1 n2 n3 n4 D
memory
Read from
another FROM FROM n1 n2 D n3
• Reads device data from the CPU shared
station
memory area of another station CPU 5
CPU
module to the host station.
shared FROMP FROMP n1 n2 D n3
memory
Automatic
• Performs the automatic refresh of the
refresh of
intelligent function module, general data
CPU COM COM 1
processing, and the automatic refresh of the
shared
CPU shared memory.
memory
App - 49
Appendix 3 Special Relay List
Special relays, SM, are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the PLC. For this
reason, they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal
internal relays. However, they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control
the CPU and remote I/O modules.
The headings in the list that follows have the following meanings.
Item Function of item
No. • Indicates the number of the special relay.
name • Indicates the name of the special relay.
Meaning • Indicates the contents of the special relay.
Explanation • Contains detailed information about the contents of the special relay.
• Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and when setting is
performed if it is set by the system.
<Set by>
S: Set by system
U: Set by user (in sequence program or test operation at a peripheral
device)
S/U: Set by both system and user
Set by <When set> indicated only if setting is done by system.
(When set) Each END: Set during each END processing
Initial: Set only during initial processing (when power supply is
turned ON, or when going from STOP to RUN)
Status change: Set only when there is a change in status
Error occurrence: Set when error is generated
Instruction execution: Set when instruction is executed
Request: Set only when there is request from a user(through SM,
etc.)
Correspondi • Indicates special relay (M9 ) corresponding to the ACPU.
ng ACPU (Indicates as "Change" when there has been a change in contents)
M9 • Items indicated as "New" have been newly added for Q/QnACPU
Indicates the applicable CPU type name.
+ Rem: Indicates all the CPU and MELSECNET/H remote I/O
modules.
: Indicates all types of CPU
Applicable
QCPU: Indicates the Q-series CPU
CPU
QnA: Indicates the QnA series and Q2ASCPU.
Remote: Indicates the MELSECNET/H remote I/O modules.
Each CPU type name: Indicates the relevant specific CPU module. (Example:
Q4ARCPU, Q3ACPU)
For details on the following items, refer to these manuals:
• Networks • Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual
(PLC to PLC network)
• Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual
(Remote I/O network)
• For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual
• SFC QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC)
POINT
(1) SD1200 to SD1255 are used for QnACPU.
These relays are vacant with QCPU.
(2) SM1500 or later is exclusively used for Q4ARCPU.
App - 50
Special Relay List
(1) Diagnostic information
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
No. Name Meaning Explanation
(When set)
M9
• ON if diagnosis results show error occurrence (Includes the
Diagnostic OFF: No error S (Error
SM0 annunciator being ON and detecting an error by CHK instruction) New
errors ON: Error occurrence)
• Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored
• Comes ON when an error occurs as a result of self-diagnosis.
OFF: No self-diagnosis
Self-diagnostic (excludes the annunciator being ON and detecting an error by CHK S (Error
SM1 errors M9008
error instruction) occurrence)
ON: Self-diagnosis
• Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter.
OFF: No error common +
Error common information S (Error Rem
SM5 • When SM0 is ON, ON if there is error common information New
information ON: Error common occurrence)
information
OFF: No error common
Error individual information S (Error
SM16 • When SM0 is ON, ON if there is error individual information New
information ON: Error common occurrence)
information
SM50 Error reset OFF ON: Error reset • Performs error reset operation U New
• ON if battery voltage at CPU module or memory card drops below
Battery low OFF: Normal rated value. S (Error
SM51 M9007
latch ON: Battery low Remains ON if the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter. occurrence)
• Synchronizes with the BAT. ALARM/BAT. LED.
OFF: Normal • Same as SM51, but goes OFF subsequently when battery voltage S (Error
SM52 Battery low M9006
ON: Battery low returns to normal. occurrence)
• Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms occurs
during use of the AC power supply module. Reset when power is
switched OFF, then ON.
OFF: AC DOWN not
AC DOWN detected S (Error
SM53 during use of the DC power supply module. Reset when power is M9005 QCPU
detection ON: AC DOWN occurrence)
detected
during use of the DC power supply module. Reset when power is QnA
• Goes ON if MINI (S3) link error is detected at even one of the
OFF: Normal S (Error
SM54 MINI link errors installed MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master modules. M9004 QnA
ON: Error occurrence)
Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter.
Operation OFF: Normal • ON when operation error is generated S (Error
SM56 M9011
errors ON: Operation error • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. occurrence)
• Comes ON even if there is only one output module with a fuse blown,
OFF: Normal
Fuse blown and remains ON even after return to normal S (Error
SM60 ON: Module with fuse M9000
detection • Fuse blown state is checked even for remote I/O station output occurrence)
blown
modules.
+
• Comes ON if there is a discrepancy between the actual I/O modules
Rem
and the registered information when the power is turned on, and
I/O module OFF: Normal S (Error
SM61 remains ON even after return to normal. M9002
verification error ON: Error occurrence)
• I/O module verification is also performed for remote I/O station
modules.
Annunciator OFF: Not detected S (Instruction
SM62 • Goes ON if even one annunciator F goes ON. M9009
detection ON: Detected execution)
OFF: Not detected • Goes ON if error is detected by CHK instruction. S (Instruction
SM80 CHK detection New
ON: Detected • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. execution)
SM90 Corresponds to SD90 M9108
SM91 Corresponds to SD91 M9109
SM92 Startup of Corresponds to SD92 M9110
watchdog timer OFF: Not started
SM93 Corresponds to SD93 • Goes ON when measurement of step M9111
for step (watchdog timer
SM94 Corresponds to SD94 transition watchdog timer is commenced. M9112
transition reset) U
SM95 Corresponds to SD95 • Resets step transition watchdog timer when M9113
(Enabled only ON: Started (watchdog
SM96 Corresponds to SD96 it goes OFF. M9114
when SFC timer started)
SM97 program exists) Corresponds to SD97 New
SM98 Corresponds to SD98 New
SM99 Corresponds to SD99 New
OFF: Normal • Goes ON when at least one module is in the status where the
Detection of ON: There is a module external power supply is OFF. Remains ON even after return to
S (Error QCPU
SM120 external power whose external normal. New
occurrence) remote
supply OFF power supply is *Applicable only for Q-series module.
OFF. (For future use)
App - 51
Special Relay List
(2) System information
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
Set by
ACPU
No. Name Meaning Explanation (When
set)
M9
LED OFF • When this relay goes from OFF to ON, the LEDs corresponding to the
SM202 OFF ON: LED OFF U New
command individual bits at SD202 go off
S (Status
SM203 STOP contact STOP status • Goes ON at STOP status M9042
change)
S (Status
SM204 PAUSE contact PAUSE status • Goes ON at PAUSE status M9041
change)
S (Status
SM205 STEP-RUN contact STEP-RUN status • Goes ON at STEP-RUN status M9054
change)
OFF: PAUSE disabled • If this relay is ON when the remote PAUSE contact goes ON, the
PAUSE enable coil U M9040
ON: PAUSE enabled PAUSE state is entered.
SM206 OFF: Device test not yet
Device test request S
executed • Comes ON when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer. New remote
acceptance status (Request)
ON: Device test executed
• When this relay goes from OFF to ON and after END instruction
Clock data set OFF: Ignored
SM210 execution of subsequent scan, clock data stored in SD210 to SD213 U M9025
request ON: Set request
are written to the CPU module.
OFF: No error • ON when error is generated in clock data (SD210 to SD213) value, S
SM211 Clock data error M9026
ON: Error and OFF if no error is detected. (Request)
• Displays clock data as month, day, hour, minute, and second at the Q3A
OFF: Ignored
SM212 Time data display LED display at front of CPU module.(Enabled only for Q3ACPU and U M9027 Q4A
ON: Display
Q4ACPU) Q4AR
Clock data read OFF: Ignored • When this relay is ON, clock data is read to SD210 through SD213 as +
SM213 U M9028
request ON: Read request BCD values. Rem
OFF: No. 1 CPU reset • Goes OFF when reset of the No. 1 CPU is canceled.
No. 1 CPU reset cancel • Comes ON when the No. 1 CPU is resetting (including the case where
SM240
flag ON: No. 1 CPU the PLC is removed from the base).
resetting The other PLCs are also put in reset status.
SM241
resetting The other PLCs result in "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error code: 7000).
SM242
QCPU
No. 4 CPU reset cancel • Comes ON when the No. 4 CPU is resetting (including the case where S (Status
SM243 New function
flag ON: No. 4 CPU the PLC is removed from the base). change)
Ver. B
OFF: No. 1 CPU normal • Goes OFF when the No. 1 CPU is normal (including a continuation
No. 1 CPU error
SM244 ON: No. 1 CPU during error).
flag
stop error • Comes ON when the No. 1 CPU is during a stop error.
No. 2 CPU error
flag
No. 3 CPU error
flag
No. 4 CPU error
flag
Max. loaded I/O OFF: Ignored • When this relay goes from OFF to ON, maximum loaded I/O number is +
SM250 U New
read ON: Read read to SD250. Rem
• By turning this relay ON after setting the head I/O number of the
replaced I/O module to SD251, the I/O module can be replaced online
(with power on). (Only one module can be replaced for each setting.)
OFF: No replacement • Turn this relay ON in the test mode of the program or peripheral device
SM251 I/O change flag U (END) M9094
ON: Replacement for an I/O module change during RUN, or in the test mode of the Q2A(S1)
peripheral device for an I/O change during STOP. Q3A
• Do not execute a RUN/STOP mode change until I/O module change is Q4A
finished. Q4AR
OFF: Replacement
prohibited
SM252 I/O change OK • Goes ON when I/O replacement is OK. S (END) New
ON: Replacement
enabled
OFF: Refresh arrival
• Effective for the batch refresh (also effective for the low speed cyclic) U (Every
All stations refresh station
SM254 • Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or to receive all slave END New QCPU
command ON: Refresh all
stations. processing)
stations
App - 52
Special Relay List (Continued)
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
Set by
ACPU
No. Name Meaning Explanation (When
set)
M9
• Goes ON for standby network
OFF: Operative network
SM255 (If no designation has been made concerning active or standby, active S (Initial) New
ON: Standby network
MELSECNET/10 is assumed.)
module 1 OFF: Reads • For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.), designate whether to
SM256 U New
information ON: Does not read read from the link module.
OFF: Writes • For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.), designate whether to
SM257 U New
ON: Does not write write to the link module.
ON: Standby network
MELSECNET/10 is assumed.)
SM261 U New
SM262 U New
OFF: Operative network • Goes ON for standby network (If no designation has been made
SM265 S (Initial) New
ON: Standby network concerning active or standby, active is assumed.)
MELSECNET/10
OFF: Reads • For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.), designate whether to
SM266 module 3 U New
ON: Does not read read from the link module.
information
SM267 U New
ON: Standby network
MELSECNET/10 is assumed.) )
SM271 U New
SM272 U New
• Goes ON when a CC-Link error is detected in any of the installed S (Status QCPU
New
OFF: Normal QJ61QBT11. Goes OFF when normal operation is restored. change) remote
SM280 CC-Link error
ON: Error • Goes ON when a CC-Link error is detected in any of the installed S (Error
New QnA
A(1S)J61QBT11. Stays ON even after normal operation is restored. occurrence)
OFF: SFC programs not
Presence/absence used • Turns ON when an SFC program is registered
SM320 S (Initial) M9100
of SFC program ON: SFC programs • OFF when an SFC program is not registered.
used
• Initial value is set at the same value as SM320.
OFF: SFC programs (Goes ON automatically if SFC program is present.)
M9101
Start/stop SFC stop • Turn this relay OFF before the SFC program processing to suspend S (Initial)
SM321 format
program ON: SFC programs SFC program. U
change
start • Turn this relay from OFF to ON to start program execution.
• Turn this relay from ON to OFF to stop program execution.
• Initial value can be ON or OFF by setting the parameter.
• Turns this relay off to clear execution status of SFC program when
SFC program is stopped. The block which received a start request
M9102
SFC program start OFF: Initial Start starts from its initial step. S (Initial)
SM322 format
status ON: Continue • Turn this relay on to make the execution block restart from the U
change
execution step that was suspended when SFC program was stopped.
(ON is valid only when Continue is specified in the parameter.)
• SM902 is not automatically latch-specified.
OFF: Continuous • Turn this relay off to make all the blocks take 1 step per 1 scan.
Presence/absence
transition not • Turn this relay on to make all the blocks take steps continuously at 1
of continuous
SM323 effective scan. U M9103
transition for entire
ON: Continuous • For specifying blocks, the continuous transition bit takes priority.
block
transition effective (Specification is checked when a block is started.)
OFF: When transition is • OFF during operation in the continuous transition mode, and ON
Continuous S
executed during continuous transition or when continuous transition is not
SM324 transition (Instruction M9104
ON: When no executed.
prevention flag execution)
transition • Always ON during operation in the no continuous transition mode.
Selects the operational outputs of the active steps at the time of a block
Output mode at OFF: OFF stop. S (Initial)
SM325 M9196
block stop ON: Preserves • All coil outputs go OFF when this relay is OFF. U
• Coil outputs are preserved when this relay is ON.
Selects the device status when the stopped CPU restarts running after
SFC device clear OFF: Clear device
SM326 the sequence program or SFC program has been modified when the U New
mode ON: Preserves device
SFC program exists.
Selects operation output of held steps when terminating a block by end
Output during end OFF: OFF step execution. S (Initial)
SM327 New
step execution ON: Hold • All coil outputs go OFF when this relay is OFF. U
• Coil outputs are preserved when this relay is ON.
App - 53
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
(When set)
M9
• Asynchronous mode
Mode in which the operation of the low speed execution
type program is performed continuously within the excess
Operation mode for low OFF: Asynchronous time.
SM330 speed execution type mode • Synchronous mode U (END) New
program ON: Synchronous mode Mode in which the operation of the low speed execution
type program is not performed continuously and operation
is performed from the next scan even if there is excess
time.
• The status of the intelligent function module access
ON indicates completion instruction executed immediately before is stored.
S (Status
SM390 Access execution flag of intelligent function (This data is overwritten when the intelligent function New QCPU
change)
module access module access instruction is executed again.)
• Used by the user in a program as a completion bit.
(3) System clocks/counters
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
(When set)
M9
ON S(Every END
SM400 Always ON • Always ON M9036
OFF processing)
ON S(Every END
SM401 Always OFF • Always OFF M9037
OFF processing)
• After RUN, ON for 1 scan only
After RUN, ON for 1 ON S(Every END
SM402 1 scan • This connection can be used for scan execution type M9038
scan only OFF processing)
programs only.
• After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only
OFF for 1 scan only ON S(Every END
SM403 1 scan • This connection can be used for scan execution type M9039
after RUN OFF processing)
programs only.
ON for 1 scan only after • After RUN, ON for 1 scan only
ON S(Every END
SM404 low speed execution 1 scan • This connection can be used for low speed execution type New
OFF processing)
type program RUN programs only.
OFF for 1 scan only
• After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only
after low speed ON S(Every END
SM405 1 scan • This connection can be used for low speed execution type New
execution type program OFF processing)
programs only.
RUN
• Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at 5-ms
0.005 sec. S (Status
SM409 0.01 second clock 0.005 sec. interval. New QCPU
change)
• When turned OFF or reset, goes from OFF to start.
0.05 sec.
SM410 0.1 second clock 0.05 sec. M9030
• Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at each
0.1 sec. designated time interval.
SM411 0.2 second clock 0.1 sec. M9031
• When turned OFF or reset, goes from OFF to start. S (Status
0.5 sec. Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the change)
SM412 1 second clock 0.5 sec. M9032
designated time has elapsed during the execution of the
1 sec. program.)
SM413 2 second clock 1 sec. M9033
M9034
n sec. • Alternates between ON and OFF at intervals of seconds S (Status
SM414 2n second clock n sec. format
specified in SD414. change)
change
n(ms) • Alternates between ON and OFF at intervals of the time S (Status
SM415 2n (ms) clock n(ms) New QCPU
(unit: ms) specified in SD415. change)
SM420 User timing clock No. 0 M9020
• Relay repeats ON/OFF switching at fixed scan intervals.
• When turned ON or reset, goes from OFF to start. S (Every END
SM422 User timing clock No. 2 • The ON/OFF intervals are set with the DUTY instruction. M9022
processing)
SM423 User timing clock No. 3 DUTY n1 n2 SM420 M9023
n2 scan n2 scan
SM430 User timing clock No. 5
SM431 User timing clock No. 6 n1 scan
S (Every END
SM432 User timing clock No. 7 • For use with SM420 to SM424 low speed programs New
processing)
App - 54
(4) Scan information
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
(When set)
M9
OFF: Completed or not
Low speed program executed • Goes ON when low speed execution type program is S(Every END
SM510 New
execution flag ON: Execution under executed. processing)
way
• When this relay goes from OFF to ON, the module service
Reads module service OFF: Ignored +
SM551 interval designated by SD550 is read to SD551 through U New
interval ON: Read Rem
552.
(5) Memory cards
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
(When set)
M9
Memory card usable OFF: Not available
SM600 • ON when memory card is ready for use by user. S (Initial) New
flag ON: Available
Memory card protect OFF: No protect
SM601 • Goes ON when memory card protect switch is ON. S (Initial) New
flag ON: Protect
OFF: No drive 1
SM602 Drive 1 flag • Turns ON when the mounted memory card is RAM. S (Initial) New
ON: Drive 1
OFF: No drive 2
SM603 Drive 2 flag • Turns ON when the mounted memory card is ROM. S (Initial) New
ON: Drive 2
Memory card in-use OFF: Not used
SM604 • Goes ON when memory card is in use. S (Initial) New
flag ON: In use
OFF: Remove/insert
Memory card
enabled • Goes ON when memory card cannot be inserted or
SM605 remove/insert prohibit U New
ON: Remove/insert removed.
flag
prohibited
OFF: Remove/insert • Turned ON by user to enable the removal/insertion of
Memory card
disabled memory card.
SM609 remove/insert enable U/S New
ON: Remove/insert • Turned OFF by the system after the memory card is
flag
enabled removed.
• Always ON S (Initial) New QCPU
Memory card B usable OFF: Not available Q2A

SM620 (S1)
flag ON: Available
• ON when memory card B is ready for use by user. S (Initial) New Q3A
Q4A
Q4AR
Memory card B protect OFF: No protect Q2A

SM621 (S1)
flag ON: Protect
• Goes ON when memory card B protect switch is ON. S (Initial) New Q3A
Q4A
Q4AR
OFF: No drive 3 Q2A

SM622 Drive 3 flag (S1)
ON: Drive 3
• Goes ON when drive 3 (card 2 RAM area) is present. S (Initial) New Q3A
Q4A
Q4AR

OFF: No drive 4
SM623 Drive 4 flag
ON: Drive 4
• Goes ON when drive 4 (card 2 ROM area) is present. S (Initial) New
Q2A
Memory card B in-use OFF: Not used (S1)
SM624 • Goes ON when memory card B is in use. S (Initial) New
flag ON: In use Q3A
OFF: Remove/insert Q4A
Memory card B
enabled • Goes ON when memory card B cannot be inserted or Q4AR
SM625 remove/insert prohibit U New
ON: Remove/insert removed.
flag
prohibited
App - 55
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
(When set)
M9
OFF: File register not
S (Status
SM640 File register use used • Goes ON when file register is in use. New
change)
ON: File register in use
OFF: Comment not
S (Status
SM650 Comment use used • Goes ON when comment file is in use. New
change)
ON: Comment in use
OFF: Internal memory
execution • Goes ON while boot operation is in process. S (Status
SM660 Boot operation New
ON: Boot operation in • Goes OFF if boot designation switch is OFF. change)
progress
OFF: Within access • Goes ON when access is made to area outside the range of
Memory card A file
range file register R of memory card A. (Set within END
SM672 register access range S/U New
ON: Outside access processing.)
flag
range • Reset at user program.
Q2A
OFF: Within access • Goes ON when access is made to area outside the range of
Memory card B file (S1)
range file register R of memory card B. (Set within END
SM673 register access range S/U New Q3A
ON: Outside access processing.)
flag Q4A
range • Reset at user program.
Q4AR
(6) Instruction-related special relays
Corresponding
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
CPU
(When set)
M9
OFF: Carry OFF S (Instruction
SM700 Carry flag • Carry flag used in application instruction M9012
ON: Carry ON execution)
• When SM701 is OFF, output conducted until NUL (00H)
OFF: Outputs until NUL
Number of output code is encountered.
SM701 ON: 16 characters U M9049
characters selection • When SM701 is OFF, 16 characters of ASCII code are
output
output.
OFF: Search next • Designates method to be used by search instruction.
SM702 Search method U New
ON: 2-part search • Data must be arranged for 2-part search.
OFF: Ascending order • The sort instruction is used to designate whether data
SM703 Sort order U New
ON: Descending order should be sorted in ascending order or in descending order.
OFF: Non-match found • Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for the S (Instruction
SM704 Block comparisons New
ON: All match BKCMP instruction. execution)
• When SM707 is OFF, real number instructions are
Selection of real
OFF: Speed oriented processed at high speed.
SM707 number instructions U New Q4AR
ON: Accuracy oriented • When it is ON, real number instructions are processed with
processing type
high accuracy.
CHK instruction priority OFF: Conditions priority • Remains as originally set when OFF. S (Instruction
SM710 New
ranking flag ON: Pattern priority • CHK priorities updated when ON. execution)
OFF: Other than during
divided • In processing of AD57(S1), goes ON when canvas screen is
Divided transmission S (Instruction
SM711 processing divided for transfer, and goes OFF when split processing is M9065
status execution)
ON: During divided completed.
processing
OFF: Batch processing
Transmission • In processing of AD57(S1), goes ON when canvas screen is S (Instruction
SM712 ON: Divided M9066
processing selection divided for transfer. execution)
processing
QnA
OFF: Communication
request to remote
terminal module
Communication request • Used to determine whether communications requests to
enabled S (Instruction
SM714 registration area BUSY remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32-S3 M9081
ON: Communication execution)
signal can be executed or not.
request to remote
terminal module
disabled
0: During DI S (Instruction
SM715 EI flag • ON when EI instruction is being executed. New
1: During EI execution)
OFF: Comment read
Comment read not completed • Turns on only during one scan when the processing of the S (Status
SM720 New
completion flag ON: Comment read COMRD or PRC instruction is completed. change)
completed
OFF: File not accessed QCPU
• Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the S (Status
SM721 File being accessed ON: File being New
S.FWRITE, S. FREAD, COMRD, PRC, or LEDC instruction. change)
accessed
BIN/DBIN instruction OFF: Error OK • Turned ON when "OPERATION ERROR" is suppressed for
SM722 U New
error disabling flag ON: Error NG BIN or DBIN instruction.
App - 56
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
(When set)
M9
OFF: Request for
communication wit
intelligent device
BUSY signal for CCLink • Used for determination whether to enable or disable the
station enabled S (Instruction
SM730 communication request communication request for the intelligent device station New QnA
ON: Request for execution)
registration area connected with A(1S)J61QBT11.
communication wit
intelligent device
station disabled
OFF: Instruction not
PKEY instruction • ON when PKEY instruction is being executed.
executed S (Instruction
SM736 execution in progress Goes OFF when CR is input, or when input character string New
ON: Instruction execution)
flag reaches 32 characters.
execution
OFF: Keyboard input
Keyboard input • Goes ON when keyboard input is being conducted.
reception enabled S (Instruction
SM737 reception flag for PKEY Goes OFF when keyboard input has been stored at the New
ON: Keyboard input execution)
instruction CPU.
reception disabled
OFF: Instruction not
MSG instruction executed S (Instruction
SM738 • Goes ON when MSG instruction is executed. New
reception flag ON: Instruction execution)
execution
OFF: Forces match
PID bumpless • Specify whether the set value (SV) will be matched with the
SM774 ON: Does not force U New
processing process value (PV) in the manual mode.
match
OFF: Performs link
Selection of link refresh • Select whether link refresh processing will be performed or
refresh
SM775 processing during COM not when only general data is processed at the execution of U New
ON: Performs no link
instruction execution the COM instruction.
refresh
OFF: Local device
• Set whether the local device of the subroutine program
Enable/disable local disabled U (Status
SM776 called at execution of the CALL instruction is valid or New
device at CALL ON: Local device change)
invalid.
enabled
OFF: Local device
Enable/disable local
disabled • Set whether the local device at execution of the interrupt U (Status
SM777 device in interrupt New
ON: Local device program is valid or invalid. change)
program
enabled
OFF: CC-Link dedicated
instruction
• Switches ON when the number of the CC-Link dedicated
CC-Link dedicated executable U (Status
SM780 instructions that can be executed simultaneously reaches New QnA
instruction executable ON: CC-Link dedicated change)
32. Switches OFF when the number goes below 32.
instruction not
executable
(7) Debug
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
(When set)
M9
S (Status
Trace preparation • Switches ON when the trace preparation is completed. New QCPU
OFF: Not ready change)
SM800
Sampling trace ON: READY • Switches ON when the sampling trace preparation is S (Status
New QnA
preparation completed. change)
• Trace started when this goes ON.
Trace start U M9047 QCPU
OFF: Suspend • Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF)
SM801
ON: Start • Sampling trace started when this goes ON.
Sampling trace start U M9047 QnA
• Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF)
Trace execution in S (Status
• Switches ON during execution of trace. M9046 QCPU
progress OFF: Suspend change)
SM802
Sampling trace ON: Start S (Status
• Switches ON during execution of sampling trace. M9046 QnA
execution in progress change)
• Trace is triggered when this relay switches from OFF to
Trace trigger ON. U M9044 QCPU
(Identical to TRACE instruction execution status)
SM803 OFF ON: Start
• Sampling trace is triggered when this relay switches from
Sampling trace trigger OFF to ON. U M9044 QnA
(Identical to STRA instruction execution status)
S (Status
After trace trigger • Switches After trace is triggered. New QCPU
OFF: Not after trigger change)
SM804
After sampling trace ON: After trigger S (Status
• Switches After sampling trace is triggered. New QnA
trigger change)
App - 57
Corresponding CPU
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
(When set)
M9
S (Status
Trace completed • Switches ON at completion of trace. M9043 QCPU
OFF: Not completed change)
SM805
Sampling trace ON: End S (Status
• Switches ON at completion of sampling trace. M9043 QnA
completed change)
Status latch OFF: Not ready S (Status
SM806 • Goes ON when status latch is ready. New
preparation ON: READY change)
SM807 Status latch command OFF ON: Latch • Runs status latch command U New
Status latch OFF: Not ready S (Status
SM808 • Goes ON when program trace is ready. M9055
completion ON: Ready change)
SM809 Status latch clear OFF ON: Clear • Enable next status latch U New
Program trace OFF: Not ready S (Status
SM810 • Goes ON when program trace is ready. New
preparation ON: READY change)
OFF: Suspend • Program trace started when this goes ON. S (Status
SM811 Start program trace New QnA
ON: Start • Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF) change)
Program trace OFF: Suspend
SM812 • ON when program trace execution is underway. U New
execution under way ON: Start
• Program trace trigger goes ON when this goes from OFF
S (Status
SM813 Program trace trigger OFF ON: Start to ON. New
change)
(Identical to PTRA instruction execution status)
After program trace OFF: Not after trigger S (Status
SM814 • Goes ON after program trace trigger. New
trigger ON: After trigger change)
Program trace OFF: Not completed S (Status
SM815 • Goes ON at completion of program trace. New
completion ON: End change)
OFF: Not ready
SM820 Step trace preparation • Goes ON after step trace is registered and ready. U New
ON: READY
M9182
OFF: Suspend • When this goes ON, step trace is started. S (Status
SM821 Step trace starts format
ON: Start • Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF) change)
change
Step trace execution OFF: Suspend • Goes ON when step trace execution is underway. S (Status
SM822 M9181
underway ON: Start • Goes OFF at completion or suspension. change)
• Goes ON if even 1 block within the step trace being
OFF: Not after trigger S (Status
SM823 After step trace trigger executed is triggered. New
ON: Is after first trigger change)
• Goes OFF when step trace is started.
• Goes ON if all blocks within the step trace being executed
OFF: Is not after all triggers S (Status
SM824 After step trace trigger are triggered. New
ON: Is after all triggers change)
• Goes OFF when step trace is started.
OFF: Not completed • Goes ON at step trace completion. S (Status
SM825 Step trace completed M9180
ON: End • Goes OFF when step trace is started. change)
S (Status
Trace error • Switches ON if error occurs during execution of trace. New QCPU
OFF: Normal change)
SM826
ON: Errors • Switches ON if error occurs during execution of sampling S (Status
Sampling trace error New
trace. change)
OFF: Normal • Switches ON if error occurs during execution of status S (Status
SM827 Status latch error New QnA
ON: Errors latch. change)
OFF: Normal • Switches ON if error occurs during execution of program S (Status
SM828 Program trace error New
ON: Errors trace. change)
(8) Latch area

Corresponding
Corresponding
ACPU
Set by
CPU

(When set)
M9
OFF: No power cut file • Goes ON if a file being accessed is present when power is S/U (Status
SM900 Power cut file OFF New QnA
ON: Power cut file present disconnected. change)
OFF: Keyboard input not
registered • Goes ON at registration of keyboard input. S (Instruction
SM910 RKEY registration flag New
ON: Keyboard input OFF if keyboard input is not registered. execution)
registered
App - 58
(9) A to Q/QnA conversion correspondences
Special relays SM1000 to SM1255 are the relays which correspond to ACPU
special relays M9000 to M9255 after A to Q/QnA conversion.
These special relays are all set by the system, and cannot be set by the user
program.
To turn them ON/OFF by the user program, change the special relays in the
program into those of QCPU/QnACPU.
However, some of SM1084 and SM1200 to SM1255 (corresponding to M9084
and M9200 to M9255 before conversion) can be turned ON/OFF by the user
program, if they could be turned ON/OFF by the user program before conversion.
For details on the ACPU special relays, see the user's manuals for the individual
CPUs, and MELSECNET or MELSECNET/B Data Link System Reference
Manuals.
POINT
The processing time may be longer when converted special relays are used with the
QCPU. Uncheck "A-series CPU compatibility setting" within the PC system setting in
GX Developer parameters when converted special relays are not used.
REMARK
The following are additional explanations about the Special Relay for Modification
column.
1) When a special relay for modification is provided, the device number should be
changed to the provided QCPU/QnACPU special relay.
2) When is provided, the converted special relay can be used for the device
number.
3) When is provided, the device number does not work with QCPU/QnACPU.
Special Relay List
Corresponding
ACPU Special Special
CPU
Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details
Relay Conversion Modification
• Turned on when there is one or more output modules of

OFF: Normal which fuse has been blown, and remains ON if the condition
M9000 SM1000 –––– Fuse blown ON: Module with blown is restored to normal thereafter.
fuse Output modules of remote I/O stations are also checked fore
fuse condition.
• Turned on if the status of I/O module is different form entered
status when power is turned on, and remains ON if the
I/O module condition is restored to normal thereafter.
OFF: Normal
M9002 SM1002 –––– verification I/O module verification is also performed for remote I/O
ON: Error
error station modules.
Reset is enabled only when special registers SD1116 to
SD1123 are reset.
• Goes ON if MINI (S3) link error is detected at even one of the
OFF: Normal
M9004 SM1004 –––– MINI link error installed MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master modules, and QnA
ON: Error
remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter.
• Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms
occurs during use of the AC power supply module. Reset
when power is switched OFF, then ON.
OFF: AC DOWN not • Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms
AC DOWN
M9005 SM1005 –––– detected occurs during use of the DC power supply module. Reset
detection
ON: AC DOWN detected when power is switched OFF, then ON.
Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms occurs
during use of the DC power supply module. Reset when power
is switched OFF, then ON.
• Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the
OFF: Normal
M9006 SM1006 –––– Battery low specified, and turns OFF when the battery voltage returns to
ON: Battery low
normal thereafter.
• Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the
Battery low OFF: Normal
M9007 SM1007 –––– specified, and remains ON if the battery voltage returns to
latch ON: Battery low
normal thereafter.
Self-diagnostic OFF: No error
M9008 SM1008 SM1 • Turned on when error is found as a result of self-diagnosis.
error ON: Error
App - 59
Corresponding CPU
OFF: No F number
Annunciator • Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is executed.
M9009 SM1009 SM62 detected
detection Switched off when SD1124 data is zeroed.
ON: F number Detected
• Turns on when operation error occurs during execution of
Operation error OFF: No error
M9011 SM1011 SM56 application instruction, and remains ON even if the condition
flag ON: Error
is restored to normal thereafter.
OFF: Carry OFF
M9012 SM1012 SM700 Carry flag • Carry flag used in application instruction
ON: Carry ON
• Clears the data memory including the latch range (other than
Data memory OFF: Ignored
M9016 SM1016 special relays and special registers) in remote run mode from
clear flag ON: Output cleared
computer, etc. when SM1016 is on.
• Clears the unlatched data memory (other than special relays
Data memory OFF: Ignored
M9017 SM1017 and special registers) in remote run mode from computer,
clear flag ON: Output cleared
etc. when SM1017 is on.
User timing • Relay which repeats on/off at intervals of predetermined
M9020 SM1020 ––––
clock No. 0 scan.
User timing • When power is turned on or reset is per-formed, the clock
M9021 SM1021 ––––
clock No. 1 starts with off.
n2 scan n2 scan
User timing • Set the intervals of on/off by DUTY instruction.
M9022 SM1022 ––––
clock No. 2
User timing n1 scan
M9023 SM1023 ––––
clock No. 3
User timing
M9024 SM1024 ––––
clock No. 4
OFF: Ignored • Writes the clock data stored in SD1025 to SD1028 to the
Clock data set
M9025 SM1025 –––– ON: Set request present CPU module after the END instruction is executed in the
request
used scan in which SM1025 turned from OFF to ON.
Clock data OFF: No error • Switched ON by clock data (SD1025 to SD1028) error, and
M9026 SM1026 ––––
error ON: Error OFF if no error is detected.
• Clock data is read from SD1025 to SD1028 and month, day,
Time data OFF: Ignored
M9027 SM1027 –––– hour, minute and minute are indicated on the CPU module
display ON: Display
front LED display.
Clock data OFF: Ignored • Reads clock data to SD1025 to SD1028 in BCD when
M9028 SM1028 ––––
read request ON: Read request SD1028 is on.
• The SM1029 relay is turned on using a sequence program to
process all data communication requests accepted during
Batch
OFF: Batch processing not one scan in the END processing of that scan.
processing of
conducted • The batch processing of the data communication requests
M9029 SM1029 data
ON: Batch processing can be turned on and off during running.
communication
conducted • The default is OFF (processed one at a time for each END
s requests
processing in the order in which data communication
requests are accepted).)
0.1 second
M9030 SM1030 –––– 0.05 sec. 0.05 sec.
clock
0.2 second • 0.1 second, 0.2 second, 1 second and 2 second, clocks are
M9031 SM1031 –––– 0.1 sec. 0.1 sec.
clock generated.
• Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even
M9032 SM1032 –––– 1 second clock 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
during scan if corresponding time has elapsed.
• Starts with off when power supply is turned on or CPU
M9033 SM1033 –––– 2 second clock 1 sec. 1 sec. module reset is performed.
M9034 SM1034 –––– 1 minute clock 30 sec. 30 sec.
M9036 SM1036 –––– Always ON • Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application
instruction in sequence program.
• SM1038 and SM1037 are turned on and off without regard to
M9037 SM1037 –––– Always OFF
position of key switch on CPU module front. SM1038 and
SM1039 are under the same condition as RUN status except
ON for 1 scan when the key switch is at STOP position, and turned off and
M9038 SM1038 –––– 1 scan
only after RUN on. Switched off if the key switch is in STOP position.
RUN flag (After SM1038 is on for one scan only and SM1039 is off for one
M9039 SM1039 –––– RUN, OFF for 1 scan scan only if the key switch is not in STOP position.
1 scan only)
PAUSE enable OFF: PAUSE disabled
M9040 SM1040 SM206 • When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or pause contact
coil ON: PAUSE enabled
has turned on and if SM204 is on, PAUSE mode is set and
PAUSE status OFF: PAUSE not in effect SM206 is turned on.
M9041 SM1041 SM204
contact ON: PAUSE in effect
App - 60
Corresponding CPU
STOP status OFF: STOP not in effect

M9042 SM1042 SM203 • Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STOP position.
contact ON: STOP in effect
OFF: Sampling trace in • Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed the
Sampling trace progress number of times preset by parameter after STRA
M9043 SM1043 SM805
completed ON: Sampling trace instruction is executed.
completed Reset when STRAR instruction is executed.
• Turning on/off SM803 can execute STRA / STRAR
instruction. (SM803 is forcibly turned on/off by a peripheral
OFF→ON: Same as device.)
STRA execution
When switched from OFF to ON: STRA instruction
M9044 SM1044 SM803 Sampling trace ON→OFF: Same as
STRAR When switched from ON to OFF: STRAR instruction
execution The value stored in SD1044 is used as the condition for the
sampling trace.
At scanning, at time Time (10 ms unit)
• The SM1045 relay is turned on to reset the WDT when the
Watchdog
OFF: Does not reset WDT ZCOM instruction and data communication request batch
M9045 SM1045 timer (WDT)
ON: Resets WDT processing are executed.
reset
(used when the scan time exceeds 200 ms)
OFF: Trace not in progress
M9046 SM1046 SM802 Sampling trace • Switched on during sampling trace.
ON: Trace in progress
OFF: Sampling trace
Sampling trace suspended • Sampling trace is not executed unless SM801 is turned ON.
M9047 SM1047 SM801
preparations ON: Sampling trace Sampling trace is suspended when SM801 goes OFF.
started
Selection of • When SM701 is OFF, characters up to NULL (00H) code are
OFF: Output until NUL
number of output.
M9049 SM1049 SM701 encountered
characters • When SM701 is ON, ASCII codes of 16 characters are
ON: 16 characters output
output output.
CHG
• Switched ON to disable the CHG instruction.
instruction OFF: Enabled
M9051 SM1051 • Switched ON when program transfer is requested.
execution ON: Disable
Automatically switched OFF when transfer is complete.
disable
• When SM1052 is ON, the SEG instruction is executed as an
SEG OFF: 7SEG segment
I/O partial refresh instruction.
M9052 SM1052 instruction display
When SM1052 is OFF, the SEG instruction is executed as a
switch ON: I/O partial refresh
7-SEG display instruction.
OFF: STEP RUN not in
STEP RUN • Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STEP RUN
M9054 SM1054 SM205 effect
flag position.
ON: STEP RUN in effect QnA
Status latch OFF: Not completed • Turned on when status latch is completed.
M9055 SM1055 SM808
completion flag ON: Completed Turned off by reset instruction.
OFF: Other than when P, I
Main side P, I set being requested
M9056 SM1056
set request ON: P, I set being • Provides P, I set request after transfer of the other program
requested (for example subprogram when main program is being run) is
OFF: Other than when P, I complete during run. Automatically switched off when P, I
Sub side P, I set being requested setting is complete.
M9057 SM1057
set request ON: P, I set being
requested
Main side P, I Momentarily ON at P, I set
M9058 SM1058
set request completion
• Turned ON once when the P, I set has been completed, and
Sub program then turned OFF again.
Momentarily ON at P, I set
M9059 SM1059 P, I set
completion
completion
OFF: Other than when P, I
Sub program 2 set being requested
M9060 SM1060
P, I set request ON: P, I set being • Provides P, I set request after transfer of the other program
requested (for example subprogram when main program is being run) is
OFF: Other than when P, I complete during run. Automatically switched off when P, I
Sub program 3 set being requested setting is complete.
M9061 SM1061
P, I set request ON: P, I set being
requested
OFF: Divided processing
Divided • Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57(S1)/AD58 is
not underway
M9065 SM1065 SM711 execution done by divided processing, and turned off at completion of
ON: During divided
detection divided processing.
processing QnA
Divided
OFF: Batch processing • Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57(S1)/AD58 is
M9066 SM1066 SM712 processing
ON: Divided processing done by divided processing.
request flag
A8UPU/A8PUJ OFF: Read time not • Turned ON to shorten the search time in the A8UPU/A8PUJ.
M9070 SM1070 required shortened (In this case, the scan time is extended by 10 %.)
search time ON: Read time shortened * A8UPU and A8PUJ are not used with QCPU/QnACPU.
App - 61
Corresponding CPU
OFF: Empty spaces in

communication
Communication request registration
• Indication of communication enable/disable to remote
request area
M9081 SM1081 SM714 terminal modules connected to the MELSECNET/MINI-S3 QnA
registration area ON: No empty spaces in
master module, A2C or A52G.
BUSY signal communication
request registration
area
• It is set whether the error checks below are performed or not
when the END instruction is processed (to set the END
OFF: Error check executed instruction processing time).
M9084 SM1084 Error check
ON: No error check • Check for breakage of fuse
• Collation check of I/O module
• Check of battery
• Turns ON when the detail factor of the operation error is
Operation error OFF: No error
M9091 SM1091 stored into SD1091. Remains ON if the condition is restored
details flag ON: Error
to normal thereafter.
• The I/O module can be changed online (with power on) when
SM251 is turned ON after the head I/O number of the I/O
module is set to SD251.
(One module only is allowed to be changed by one setting.)
OFF: Replacement • To be switched on in the program or peripheral device test
M9094 SM1094 SM251 I/O change flag QnA
ON: No replacement mode to change the module during CPU RUN. To be
switched on in peripheral device test mode to change the
module during CPU STOP.
• RUN/STOP mode must not be changed until I/O module
change is complete.
Presence/ OFF: SFC programs not
• Turned on if the SFC program is registered. Turned off if it is
M9100 SM1100 SM320 absence of used
not.
SFC program ON: SFC programs used
• Turned on by user to start SFC program.
Start/stop SFC OFF: SFC programs stop
M9101 SM1101 SM321 Turned OFF to stop SFC program by disabling operational
program ON: SFC programs start
outputs of execution steps.
• Selects a start step of restarting SFC program with SM322.
ON: Makes the execution block restart from the execution
step that was suspended when SFC program was
stopped.
OFF: Clears execution status of SFC program when SFC
SFC program OFF: Initial Start
M9102 SM1102 SM322 program is stopped. The block 0 starts from its initial
start status ON: Continue
step.
• Once turned on, this relay remains on even if power supply is
cut by latch with system.
To start with the initial step of blocks at power-on, turn this
relay off with the sequence block.
• Set whether continuous transition will be performed in 1 scan
Presence/ OFF: Continuous transition
for all the steps on which transition conditions are met.
absence of not effective
M9103 SM1103 SM323 ON: Transits continuously (continuous transition enabled).
continuous ON: Continuous transition
OFF: Transits 1 step at 1 scan (continuous transition
transition effective
disabled).
• ON when continuous transition is not executed during
Continuous operation in the continuous transition mode, and OFF when
OFF: When transition is
transition transition of 1 step is completed.
M9104 SM1104 SM324 completed
suspension By writing AND condition as the transition condition of
ON: When no transition
flag SM324, continuous transition can be prevented from being
performed on the corresponding step.
Step transition
watchdog timer
M9108 SM1108 SM90 start
(equivalent of
SD90)
Step transition
watchdog timer
(equivalent of • Turns ON when the measurement of the step transition
OFF: Watchdog timer reset
SD91) watchdog timer is started.
ON: Watchdog timer reset
Step transition Turning this relay OFF resets the step transition watchdog
start
watchdog timer timer.
(equivalent of
SD92)
Step transition
watchdog timer
(equivalent of
SD93)
App - 62
Corresponding CPU
Step transition
watchdog timer
(equivalent of
SD94)
Step transition • Turns ON when the measurement of the step transition
watchdog timer OFF: Watchdog timer reset
watchdog timer is started.
M9113 SM1113 SM95 start ON: Watchdog timer reset
Turning this relay OFF resets the step transition watchdog
(equivalent of start
timer.
SD95)
Step transition
watchdog timer
(equivalent of
SD96)
Active step
OFF: Trace start • Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is completed.
M9180 SM1180 SM825 sampling trace
ON: Trace completed Reset when sampling trace is started.
completion flag
OFF: Trace not being
Active step
executed • Set when sampling trace is being executed. Reset when
M9181 SM1181 SM822 sampling trace
ON: Trace execution sampling trace is completed or suspended.
execution flag
underway
• Selects sampling trace execution enable/disable.
Active step OFF: Trace ON: Sampling trace execution is enabled.
M9182 SM1182 SM821 sampling trace disable/suspend OFF: Sampling trace execution is disabled.
permission ON: Trace enable Sampling trace execution is disabled. If turned off during
sampling trace execution, trace is suspended.
• Selects the operation output when block stop is executed.
ON: Retains the ON/OFF status of the coil being used by
Operation using operation output of the step being executed at
OFF: Coil output OFF
M9196 SM1196 SM325 output at block block stop.
ON: Coil output ON
stop OFF: All coil outputs are turned off.
(Operation output by the SET instruction is retained
regardless of the ON/OFF status of M9196.)
I/O numbers
SM SM
to be
1197 1198
displayed
M9197 SM1197 X/Y
OFF OFF
Switch 0 to 7F0
Switches I/O numbers in the fuse blow module storage
between blown X/Y
ON OFF registers (SD1100 to SD1107) and I/O module verify error
fuse and I/O 800 to FF0
storage registers (SD1116 to SD1123) according to the
verification X/Y combination of ON/OFF of the SM1197 and SM1198.
error display OFF ON 1000 to
17F0
M9198 SM1198
X/Y
ON ON 1800 to
1FF0
Data recovery • Recovers the setting data stored in the CPU module at restart
OFF: Data recovery
of online when sampling trace/status latch is executed.
disabled
M9199 SM1199 sampling • SM1199 should be ON to execute again.
ON: Data recovery
trace/status (Unnecessary when writing the data again from peripheral
enabled
latch devices.)
ZNRD
instruction • Depends on whether or not the ZNRD (word device read)
(LRDP OFF: Not accepted instruction has been received.
M9200 SM1200 ––––
instruction for ON: Accepted • Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNRD instruction.
ACPU) • Use the RST instruction to reset.
completion
QnA
ZNRD
• Depends on whether or not the ZNRD (word device read)
instruction
instruction execution is complete.
(LRDP OFF: Not completed
M9201 SM1201 –––– • Used as a condition contact for resetting SM1202 and
instruction for ON: End
SM1203 after the ZNRD instruction is complete.
ACPU)
• Use the RST instruction to reset.
completion
App - 63
Appendix 4 Special Register List
Special registers, SD, are internal relays with fixed applications in the PLC. For this
reason, it is not possible to use these registers in sequence programs in the same way
that normal registers are used. Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN
values if no special designation has been made to the contrary.
Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation
has been made to the contrary.
The heading descriptions in the following special register lists are shown in the
following table.
Item Function of item
Number • Indicates the number of special register.
Name • Indicates the name of the special register.
Meaning • Indicates the contents of the special register.
Explanation • Indicates the detailed contents of the special register.
• Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user, and if it is set by the system,
when setting is performed.
<Set by>
S : Set by system
U : Set by user (Sequence program or test operations at a peripheral device)
S/U : Set by both system and user
<When set>
Set by
indicated only for registers set by system.
(When set)
Each END : Set during each END processing
Initial : Set only during initial processing (when power supply is turned
ON, or when going from STOP to RUN)
Status change : Set only when there is a change in status
Error : Set when error occurs
Instruction execution : Set when instruction is executed
Request : Set only when there is a user request (through SM, etc.)
• Indicates corresponding special register in ACPU
Corresponding
(When the contents are changed, the special register is represented as changed)
ACPU
• New indicates the special register newly added to the QnACPU or Q series CPU
D9
module.
For details on the following items, refer to the following manuals:

• Networks • Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference
Manual (PLC to PLC network)
• Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H
• QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual
• SFC QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC)
POINT
(1) SD1200 to SD1255 are used for QnACPU.
These relays are vacant with QCPU.
(2) SM1500 or later is exclusively used for Q4ARCPU.
App - 64
(1) Diagnostic information
Set by Corresponding
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation (When ACPU
CPU
set) D9
D9008
Diagnostic Diagnosis • Error codes for errors found by diagnosis are stored as BIN data.
SD0 S (Error) format
errors error code • Contents identical to latest fault history information.
change
• Year (last two digits) and month that SD0 data is updated is stored
as BCD 2-digit code.
SD1
B15 to B8 B7 to B0 (e.g.) Oct. 1995
Year (0 to 99) Month (1 to 12) H9510
Clock time Clock time
for for • The day and hour that SD0 is updated is stored as BCD 2-digit code.
SD2 diagnosis diagnosis B15 to B8 B7 to B0 (e.g.) 25th, 10 o'clock S (Error) New
error error Day (1 to 31) Hour (0 to 23) H2510
occurrence occurrence
• The minute and second that SD0 data was updated is stored as
BCD 2-digit code.
SD3
B15 to B8 B7 to B0 (e.g.) 35, 48
Min. (1 to 59) Sec. (0 to 59) H3548
Category codes which help indicate what type of error information is
being stored in the common information areas (SD5 through SD15)
and the individual information areas (SD16 through SD26) are stored
here.
B15 to B8 B7 to B0
Individual info category code Common info category code Rem
• The common information category codes store the following codes:

0 : No error
1 : Unit/module No./ PLC No. *
2 : File name/Drive name
3 : Time (value set)
Error 4 : Program error location
Error
information 5 : Switch cause (for Q4AR only)
SD4 information S (Error) New
category For a multiple CPU system, the module number or PLC number
categories
code is stored depending on the error that occurred.
(Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has
been stored. )
PLC No. 1: 1, PLC No. 2: 2, PLC No. 3: 3, PLC No. 4: 4
• The individual information category codes store the following codes:
0 : No error
1 : (Vacancy)
2 : File name/Drive name
3 : Time (value actually measured)
4 : Program error location
5 : Parameter number
6 : Annunciator F number
7 : CHK instruction malfunction number
App - 65
Special Register List (Continued)
Corresponding
CPU
set) D9
SD5 • Common information corresponding to the error codes (SD0) is
SD6 stored here.
SD7 • The following four types of information are stored here:
SD8 1) Unit/module No.
Number Contents
SD9
SD5 Slot No./PLC No.* 1 * 2
SD10 SD6 I/O No.
SD11 SD7
SD8
SD12
SD9
SD13 SD10
SD14 SD11 (Vacancy)
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
*1 : For a multiple CPU system, the slot number or PLC number is

stored depending on the error that occurred.
Slot 0 in the multiple CPU system is the one on the slot on the
right of the rightmost CPU module. (Refer to the
corresponding error code for which number has been stored. )
S (Error) New Rem
PLC No. 1: 1, PLC No. 2: 2, PLC No. 3: 3, PLC No. 4: 4
*2 : If a fuse blown or I/O verify error occurred in the module
loaded in the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station, the network
number is stored into the upper 8 bits and the station number
into the lower 8 bits.
SD15 Use the I/O No. to check the module where the fuse blown or
I/O verify error occurred.
2) File name/Drive name

(e.g.) File name
Number Contents
ABCDEFGH. IJK
SD5 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to B0
SD6 42H(B) 41H(A)
SD7 File name 44H(D) 43H(C)
SD8 (ASCII code: 8 characters) 46 H(F) 45H(E)
SD9 48 H(H) 47H(G)
SD10 Extension * 3 2EH (. ) 49H(I) 2D H(. )
SD11 (ASCII code: 3 characters) 4BH(K) 4AH(B)
SD12
SD13
(Vacancy)
SD14
SD15
*3 For extensions, refer to REMARK at Appendix 66.
App - 66
Corresponding
CPU
set) D9
SD5
SD6 (Continued)
3) Time (value set)
SD7
Number Contents
SD8 SD5 Time: In 1 μ s units (0 to 999 μ s)
SD9 SD6 Time: In 1 ms units (0 to 65535 ms)
SD10 SD7
SD8
SD11 SD9
SD12 SD10
SD11 (Vacancy)
SD13
SD12
SD14 SD13
SD15 SD14
SD15
4) Program error location

Number Contents
SD5 S (Error) New Rem
SD6 File name
SD7 (ASCII code: 8 characters)
SD8
SD9 Extension * 3 2E H(. )
SD11 Pattern * 4
SD12 Block No.
SD13 Step No./Transition No.
SD14 Sequence step No. (L)
SD15 Sequence step No. (H)
Error Error *4: Contents of pattern data

common common 15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 (Bit No.)
information information 0 0 to 0 0
(Not used) SFC block designated (1)/not designated (0)

SFC step designated (1)/not designated (0)
SFC transition designated (1)/not designated (0)
5) Switch cause
Number Contents
SD5 Switching factor (0: Auto/1: Manual)
SD6 Switching direction (0: Standby to control/1: Control to standby)
SD7 Tracking flag * 6
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11 (Vacancy)
SD12
SD13
SD14 S (Error) New Q4AR
SD15
*6: Tracking flag contents
Shows whether or not the tracking data is valid.
15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 (Bit No.)
0 0 to 0 0
(Not used) Initial work data

Disable (0)/Enable (1)
System data (SFC active step data)
Disable (0)/Enable (1)
Switching factor Disable (0)/Enable (1)
App - 67
Corresponding
CPU
set) D9
SD16 • Individual information corresponding to error codes (SD0) is stored
SD17 here.
SD18 • The following six types of information are stored here:
SD19 1) File name/Drive name
(e.g.) File name
SD20 Number Contents
ABCDEFGH. IJK
SD16 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to B0
SD21
SD17 42H(B) 41H(A)
SD22 SD18 File name 44H(D) 43H(C)
SD23 SD19 (ASCII code: 8 characters) 46 H(F) 45H(E)
SD20 48 H(H) 47H(G)
SD24
SD21 Extension*3 2E H (. ) 49H(I) 2D H(. )
SD25 SD22 (ASCII code: 3 characters) 4BH(K) 4AH(B)
SD26 SD23
SD24
(Vacancy)
SD25
SD26
2) Time (value actually measured)

Number Contents
SD16 Time: In 1 μ s units (0 to 999 μ s)
SD17 Time: In 1 ms units (0 to 65535 ms)
SD18
SD19
SD20
SD21
SD22 (Vacancy)
SD23
SD24
SD25
SD26
3) Program error location

Number Contents
Error Error SD16
individual individual SD17 File name S (Error) New Rem
information information
SD19
SD20 Extension*3 2E H(. )
SD22 Pattern*4
SD23 Block No.
SD24 Step No./Transition No.
SD25 Sequence step No. (L)
SD26 Sequence step No. (H)
*4: Contents of pattern data
15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 (Bit No.)
0 0 to 0 0
(Not used) SFC block designated (1)/not designated (0)

SFC step designated (1)/not designated (0)
SFC transition designated (1)/not designated (0)
4) Parameter No. 5) Annunciator number 6) Intelligent function

/CHK instruction module
malfunction parameter error
number (for QCPU only)
Number Contents Number Contents Number Contents
SD16 Parameter No.*5 SD16 No. SD16 Parameter No.* 5
SD17 SD17 SD17 Error code of intelligent
SD18 SD18 function module
SD19 SD19 SD18

SD20 SD20 SD19
SD21 SD21 SD20
(Vacancy) (Vacancy)
SD22 SD22 SD21
(Vacancy)
SD23 SD23 SD22
SD24 SD24 SD23
SD25 SD25 SD24
SD26 SD26 SD25
SD26
*5: For details of the parameter numbers, refer to the

user's manual of the CPU used.
App - 68
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU
(When set) CPU
D9
Error
number that
SD50 Error reset • Stores error number that performs error reset U New Rem
performs
error reset
• All corresponding bits go 1(ON) when battery voltage drops.
• Subsequently, these remain 1(ON) even after battery voltage
has been returned to normal.
Bit pattern B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
indicating 0<------------------->
Battery low where CPU error
SD51 Memory card A alarm S (Error) New
latch battery
voltage drop Memory card A error
occurred Memory card B alarm
Memory card B error
• When the QCPU is used, the memory card B is standard and
therefore the corresponding bits always remain OFF.
Bit pattern
• Same configuration as SD51 above
indicating
• Turns to 0 (OFF) when the battery voltage returns to normal
where
SD52 Battery low thereafter. S (Error) New
battery
• When the QCPU is used, the memory card B is standard and
voltage drop
therefore the corresponding bits always remain OFF.
occurred
Number of • Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85% (AC
AC DOWN time for AC power)/65% (DC power) of the rating during operation of the
SD53 S (Error) D9005 Rem
detection DOWN CPU module, the value is incremented by 1 and stored in
detection BIN code.
1) When any of X(n+0)/X(n+20), X(n+6)/X(n+26),
X(n+7)/X(n+27) and X(n+8)/X(n+28) of the mounted
MINI(-S3) turns ON, the bit of the corresponding station
turns to 1 (ON).
Error 2) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted D9004
MINI link MINI (-S3) and CPU module cannot be made.
SD54 detection S (Error) format QnA
errors B15 B9 B8 B0
status change
8th
module······ 1st 8th
module module
1st
module
Information of 2) Information of 1)
Number of Number of • Value stored here is the lowest station I/O number of the
SD60 module with module with S (Error) D9000
blown fuse fuse blown module with the blown fuse.
I/O module Rem
I/O module • The lowest I/O number of the module where the I/O module
verification
SD61 verification S (Error) D9002
error module verification error took place.
error number
number
Annunciator Annunciator • The first annunciator number (F number) to be detected is S (Instruction
SD62 D9009
number number stored here. execution)
Number of Number of S (Instruction
SD63 • Stores the number of annunciators searched. D9124
annunciators annunciators execution)
REMARK
Extensions are shown below.
SD10 SD11
Extension File type
Higher 8 Lower 8 Higher 8 name
bits bits bits
51H 50 H 41 H QPA parameters
51 H 50 H 47 H QPG Sequence program/SFC program
51 H 43 H 44 H QCD Device comment
51 H 44 H 49 H QDI Device initial value
51 H 44 H 52 H QDR File register
51 H 44 H 53 H QDS Simulation data
51 H 44 H 4C H QDL Local device
51 H 54 H 53 H QTS Sampling trace data (For QnA)
51 H 54 H 4C H QTL Status latch data (For QnA)
51 H 54 H 50 H QTP Program trace data (For QnA)
51 H 54 H 52 H QTR SFC trace file
51 H 46 H 44 H QFD Trouble history data
App - 69
Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
SD64 When F goes ON due to OUT F or SET F , the F D9125

numbers which go progressively ON from SD64 through SD79
SD65 are registered. D9126
The F numbers turned OFF by RST F are deleted from
SD66 SD64 - SD79, and the F numbers stored after the deleted F D9127
numbers are shifted to the preceding registers. Execution of
SD67 D9128
the LEDR instruction shifts the contents of SD64 to SD79
SD68 up by one. (This can also be done by using the INDICATOR D9129
RESET switch on the Q3A/Q4ACPU.) After 16 annunciators
SD69 have been detected, detection of the 17th will not be stored D9130
from SD64 through SD79.
SD70 SET SET SET RET SET SET SET SET SET SET SET D9131
Table of F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LED R
SD71 Annunciator D9132

detected SD62 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 ··· (Detected No.) S (Instruction
detection
annunciator SD63 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 ··· (No. of detected execution)
SD72 numbers New
numbers annunciators)
SD64 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
SD73 SD65 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15 New
SD66 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70
SD74 SD67 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65 New
SD68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38
SD69 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 38 110
SD75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151
New
SD70
SD71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210
(Detected No.)
SD76 SD72 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 210 0 New
SD73 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD77 SD74 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
SD75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD76 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD78 New
SD77 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD78 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD79 SD79 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
CHK CHK • Error codes detected by the CHK instruction are stored as S (Instruction
SD80 New
number number BCD code. execution)
SD90 Corresponds to SM90 • F number that will be turned ON D9108

when the step transition watchdog
SD91 Corresponds to SM91 D9109
timer setting or watchdog timer
SD92 Step Corresponds to SM92 time limit error occurs. D9110
transition B15 B8 B7 B0
SD93 watchdog Corresponds to SM93 D9111
F number for
timer setting
SD94 timer set Corresponds to SM94 Set F number Set time limit of timer D9112
value
value and (0 to 255) (1 to 255 sec.; U
(Enabled
SD95 time over Corresponds to SM95 (In 1 sec units)) D9113
only when • Turning ON any of SM90 to SM99
error
SD96 SFC Corresponds to SM96 during an active step starts the D9114
program timer, and if the transition
SD97 exists) Corresponds to SM97 condition next to the New
corresponding step is not met
SD98 Corresponds to SM98 New
within the timer time limit, the set
SD99 Corresponds to SM99 annunciator (F) turns ON. New
Stores the
xCH1 preset
transmission transmission K3: 300bps, K6: 600bps, K24: 2400bps, K48: 4800bps
SD105 speed speed when K96: 9600bps, K192: 19.2kbps, K384: 38.4kbps S New
setting GX K576: 57.6kbps, K1152: 115.2kbps
(RS232) Developer is QCPU
used. remote
Module No.
Error No. for
which has • Stores the lowest head No. of the module whose external
external S (Error
SD120 external power supply is OFF. New
power occurrence)
power * Applicable only for Q-series modules (For future use)
supply OFF
supply error
App - 70
Special Register List
(2) System information
Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
• The switch status of the remote I/O module is stored in the
following format.
B15 B4 B3 B0
S (Always) New Remote
Vacant 1)
1) Remote I/O module switch status Always 1: STOP
• The CPU switch status is stored in the following format:
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0 S (Every END
processing)
3) Vacant 2) 1)
1) CPU switch status 0: RUN
1: STOP
2: L.CLR New QCPU
2) Memory card
Always OFF
switch
3) DIP switch B8 through BC correspond to
SW1 through SW5 of system
Status of Status of setting switch 1.
SD200 0: OFF, 1: ON
switch CPU switch BD through BF are vacant.
• The CPU switch status is stored in the following format:

B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0 S (Every END
processing)
3) Vacant 2) 1)
1) CPU switch key 0: RUN
status 1: STOP
2: L.CLR
2) Memory card B4 corresponds to card A,
switch and B5 corresponds to card B New QnA
0: OFF, 1: ON
3) DIP switch B8 through B12 correspond to
SW1 through SW5 of system
setting switch 1.
B14 through B15 correspond
to SW1 through SW2 of
system setting switch 2.
0: OFF, 1: ON
• The following bit patterns are used to store the statuses of

the LEDs on the CPU module:
• 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flicker.
B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
S (Status
8) 7) 6) 5) 4) 3) 2) 1) New QCPU
1): RUN 5): BOOT change)
2): ERROR 6): Vacant
3): USER 7): Vacant
4): BAT.ALARM 8): MODE
Status of Mode bit patter
SD201 LED Status
CPU-LED 0: OFF 1: Green 2: Orange
• The following bit patterns are used to store the statuses of
the LEDs on the CPU module:
• 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flicker.
B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
S (Status
New
8) 7) 6) 5) 4) 3) 2) 1) change)
1): RUN 5): BOOT QnA
2): ERROR 6): CARD A (memory card)
3): USER 7): CARD B (memory card)
4): BAT.ALARM 8): Vacant
Bit pattern of • Stores bit patterns of LEDs turned off
SD202 LED off LED that is (Only USER and BOOT enabled) U New
turned off • Turned off at 1, not turned off at 0
App - 71
Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation (When set) ACPU
CPU
D9
• The operating status of the remote I/O module is stored in
the following format.
B15 B4 B3 B0
S (Always) New Remote
1)
1) Remote I/O module operating status Always 2: STOP
• The CPU operating state is stored as indicated in the
following figure:
B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0 S(Every END
processing)
Operating Operating
SD203 2) 1)
state of CPU state of CPU
1) Operating status of CPU 0: RUN
1: STEP-RUN D9015
2: STOP format
3: PAUSE
2) STOP/PAUSE cause 0: Key switch change
1: Remote contact
2: Peripheral, computer
link, or operation
from some other
remote source
3: Internal program
instruction
Note: Priority is earliest first 4: Error
0: Test not yet • Set when the device test mode is executed on GX
executed
Device test 1: During X Developer.
device test
SD206 execution 2: During Y S (Request) New Remote
type device test
3: During X/Y
device test
• When error is generated, the LED display (flicker) is made
Priorities 1 according to the error number setting priorities.
SD207 • The setting areas for priorities are as follows: D9038
to 4
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
SD207 4th priority 3rd priority 2nd priority 1st priority
LED display SD208 8th priority 7th priority 6th priority 5th priority
D3039
priority Priorities 5 SD209 10th priority 9th priority
U
SD208 format
ranking to 8 Default value SD207 = H4321
change
SD208 = H8765
SD209 = H00A9
Priorities 9 • No display is made if "0" is set.
SD209 However, even if "0" has been set, information concerning New
to 10 CPU module operation stop (including parameter settings)
errors will be indicated by the LEDs without conditions.
• The year (last two digits) and month are stored as BCD code
at SD210 as shown below:
Time data B15
····· B12 B11 ····· B8 B7 ····· B4 B3 ····· B0 (e.g.) July. 1993
SD210 Time data (year, H9307 D9025
month)
Year Month
• The day and hour are stored as BCD code at SD211 as
shown below:
Time data
B15
·····B12 B11 ····· B8 B7 ····· B4 B3 ····· B0 (e.g.) 31st, 10 o'clock
SD211 Time data H3110 D9026 Rem
(day, hour)
Day Hour
• The minutes and seconds (after the hour) are stored as BCD
code at SD212 as shown below:
Time data B15 ·····B12 B11 ····· B8 B7 ····· B4 B3 ····· B0 (e.g.) 35, 48
SD212 Time data (minute, H3548 S/U (Request) D9027
second)
Min. Sec.
• The day of the week is stored as BCD code at SD213 as
shown below:
B15 ·····B12 B11 ····· B8 B7 ····· B4 B3 ····· B0 (e.g.) Friday
H0005
Time data
(Higher
Day of week QCPU
SD213 Time data digits of D9028
0 Sun remote
year, day of Later 2 digits of year (0 to 99) 1 Mon
week) 2 Tues
3 Wed
4 Thur
5 Fri
6 Sat
App - 72
Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
• The day of the week is stored as BCD code at SD213 as
shown below:
B15
····· B12 B11 ····· B8 B7 ····· B4 B3 ····· B0 (e.g.) Friday
H0005
Time data
Day of week S/U
SD213 Time data (, day of D9028 QnA
0 Sun (Request)
week)
"0" must be set 1 Mon
2 Tues
3 Wed
4 Thur
5 Fri
6 Sat
SD220 • LED display ASCII data (16 characters) stored here.

B15 to B8 B7 to B0
SD221
SD220 15th character from right 16th character from right
SD222
SD221 13th character from right 14th character from right
SD223
LED display LED display SD222 11th character from right 12th character from right S (When
SD224 New
data data SD223 9th character from right 10th character from right changed)
SD225 SD224 7th character from right 8th character from right
SD226 SD225 5th character from right 6th character from right
SD226 3rd character from right 4th character from right
SD227 SD226 1st character from right 2nd character from right
0: Automatic
mode
SD240 Base mode The base mode is stored. S (Initial) New
1: Detail
mode
0: Main only
No. of 1 to 7: • Stores the maximum number of the extension bases being
SD241 extension Number of S (Initial) New
extension installed.
bases
bases
Base type B7 B2 B1 B0
differentiation Fixed to 0 to
0: QA**B is QCPU
Main base
A/Q base installed (A remote
SD242 1st extension S (Initial) New
differentiation mode)
1: Q**B is 2nd extension Fixed to 0
installed (Q to if no extension
mode)
7th extension
B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
SD243
SM243 Extension 3 Extension 2 Extension 1 Main
No. of base No. of base
SM244 Extension 7 Extension 6 Extension 5 Extension 4 S (Initial) New
slots slots
SD244 • As shown above, each area stores the number of slots being
installed.
Loaded • When SM250 goes from OFF to ON, the upper 2 digits of the
Loaded S (Request
SD250 maximum I/O final I/O number plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as New Rem
maximum I/O END)
No. BIN values.
Q2A(S1)
Head I/O No. Head I/O No. • Stores the upper two digits of the head I/O number of an I/O
Q3A
SD251 for for module that is removed/replaced in the online status. U D9094
Q4A
replacement replacement (Default value: 100H)
Q4AR
RS422 baud RS422 baud • Stores the baud rate of RS422. S (When
SD253 rate rate changed) New QnA
0: 9600bps 1: 19.2kbps 2: 38.4kbps
Number of
SD254 modules • Indicates the number of mounted NET/10 modules. S (Initial) New
mounted
SD255 I/O No. • Indicates I/O No. of the 1st NET/10 module mounted.
Information of 1st module
Network
SD256 • Indicates network No. of the 1st NET/10 module mounted.
No.
SD257 Group No. • Indicates group No. of the 1st NET/10 module mounted.
SD258 Station • Indicates station No. of the 1st NET/10 module mounted.
No.
NET/10 Standby • In the case of standby stations, the module number of the
SD259 information information standby station is stored.(1 to 4)
SD260
Information of
to 2nd module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
SD264
SD265 Information of
to • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
3rd module
SD269
SD270
to Information of • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
4th module
SD274
App - 73
Corresponding
CPU
D9
1) When Xn0 of the mounted CC-Link module turns ON, the bit
of the corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
2) When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC-Link module
turns OFF, the bit of corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
3) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted
CC-Link module and CPU module cannot be made.
Information of 3) Information of 2) Information of 1)
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0

QCPU
Vacancy S (Error) New
remote
1st module
2nd module
3rd module
4th module
The above module Nos. n are in order of the head I/O
CC-Link Error detection numbers.
SD280
error status (However, the one where parameter setting has not been
made is not counted.)
1) When Xn0 of the mounted CC-Link module turns ON, the bit
of the corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
2) When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC-Link module
turns OFF, the bit of corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
3) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted
CC-Link module and CPU module cannot be made.
Information of 3) Information of 2) Information of 1)
S (Error) New QnA
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
Vacancy
1st module
2nd module
3rd module
4th module
Number of points
SD290 allocated for X • Stores the number of points currently set for X devices
Number of points
SD291 allocated for Y • Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices Rem
Number of points
SD292 allocated for M • Stores the number of points currently set for M devices
Number of points
SD293 allocated for L • Stores the number of points currently set for L devices
Number of points
SD294 allocated for B • Stores the number of points currently set for B devices Rem
Number of points
SD295 allocated for F • Stores the number of points currently set for F devices
Device Number of points
SD296 allocation allocated for SB • Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices Rem
Number of points
SD297 (Same as allocated for V • Stores the number of points currently set for V devices S (Initial) New
parameter Number of points
SD298 allocated for S • Stores the number of points currently set for S devices
contents
Number of points
SD299 allocated for T • Stores the number of points currently set for T devices
Number of points
SD300 allocated for ST • Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices
Number of points
SD301 allocated for G • Stores the number of points currently set for G devices
Number of points
SD302 allocated for D • Stores the number of points currently set for D devices
Number of points
SD303 allocated for W • Stores the number of points currently set for W devices Rem
Number of points
SD304 allocated for SW • Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices
Reserves the designated time for communication processing
with GX Developer or other units
Time reserved Time reserved The greater the value is designated, the shorter the response
for for time for communication with other devices (GX Developer, U(END
SD315 serial communication units) becomes. New
communication communication Setting range: 1 to 100 ms processing) QCPU
processing processing If the designated value is out of the range above, it is assumed remote
to no setting.
The scan time becomes longer by the designated time.
Number of
SD340 modules • Number of modules mounted on Ethernet S (Initial) New
mounted
SD341 I/O No. • Indicates Ethernet I/O No. of the 1st module mounted
Information of 1st module
SD342 Network • Indicates Ethernet network No. of the 1st module mounted
No.
SD343 Ethernet Group • Indicates Ethernet group No. of the 1st module mounted
No.
information Station
SD344 No. • Indicates Ethernet station No. of the 1st module mounted
SD345 • Vacant
to Vacant (With QCPU, the Ethernet IP address of the 1st module is
SD346 stored in buffer memory.)
• Vacant
SD347 Vacant (With QCPU, the Ethernet error code of the 1st module is
read with the ERRORRD instruction.)
App - 74
Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
SD348 Information
to from 2nd • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
SD354 module
SD355 Ethernet QCPU
Information of S (Initial) New
information 3rd module remote
SD361
SD362
Information of
4th module
SD368
SD340 Number of • Number of modules installed on Ethernet
modules mounted
SD341 I/O No. • Indicates Ethernet I/O No. of the 1st module mounted
Network
SD342 • Indicates Ethernet network No. of the 1st module mounted
Information of 1st
No.
SD343 Group No. • Indicates Ethernet group No. of the 1st module mounted.
SD344 Station No. • Indicates Ethernet station No. of the 1st module mounted.
SD345
module
to Ethernet IP address • Indicates Ethernet station No. of the 1st module mounted.
SD346 information S (Initial) New QnA
SD347 Error Code • Indicates error code of the 1st module mounted.
to 2nd module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
SD354
to 3rd module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
SD361
to 4th module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
SD368
B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
0 to 0
Not used Reception status of channel 1
Reception status of channel 2
Instruction Reception status of channel 3
SD380 reception status
of 1st module
Ethernet Reception status of channel 7
instruction Reception status of channel 8
S (Initial) New
reception ON : Received (channel in use)
status OFF: Not received (channel not in use)
Instruction QnA
SD381 reception status • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
of 2nd module
Instruction
of 3rd module
Instruction
of 4th module
• Stores the internal system software version in ASCII code.
Internal system High byte Low byte Stored in low byte
Software Inconsistent value in high byte
SD392 software S (Initial) D9060
version "41H" is stored when using version "A"
version
Note: The internal system software version may differ from the
version indicated by the version symbol printed on the case.
Multi CPU Multi CPU • In a multiple CPU system configuration, the CPU number of QCPU
SD395 the host CPU is stored. S (Error) New function
number number
PLC No. 1: 1, PLC No. 2: 2, PLC No. 3: 3, PLC No. 4: 4 Ver. B
(3) System clocks/counters

Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
Number of • Incremented by 1 for each second execution after the CPU
1 second S (Status
SD412 counter counts in module is set to RUN change) D9022
1-second units • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0
2n second
SD414 clock 2n second • Stores value n of 2n second clock (Default is 30) U New
clock units • Setting can be made between 1 and 32767
setting
SD415 2nms clock 2nms clock • Stores value n of 2nms clock (Default is 30) U New QCPU
setting units • Setting can be made between 1 and 32767
Number of • Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU S (Every
SD420 Scan counts in each module is set to RUN.* END New
counter
scan • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0 processing)
• Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU
Low speed Number of S (Every
module is set to RUN.
SD430 scan counts in each END New
• Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0
counter scan processing)
• Used only for low speed execution type programs
*: Counting is not executed for scans by initial execution type program.
App - 75
(4) Scan information
Corresponding
CPU
D9
Execution Program No. in S (Status
SD500 program • Program number of program currently being executed is New
execution stored as BIN value. change)
No.
Low speed Low speed • Program number of low speed execution type program No. S (Every
SD510 program program in currently being executed is stored as BIN value. END New
No. execution • Enabled only when SM510 is ON. processing)
Current scan S (Every D9017
SD520 time (In 1 ms • The current scan time is stored. (In 1 ms units) END format
units) • Range from 0 to 65535
processing) change
• The current scan time is stored. (In 100 s units)
Current • Range from 000 to 900
scan time S (Every
Current scan (Example) When the current scan time is 23.6ms, the
SD521 time (In 100 s END New
units) following values are stored.
D520=23 processing)
D521=600
• Stores the scan time of an initial execution type program.
SD522 Initial scan time (In 1 ms units)
(In 1 ms units) S (Every
Initial scan • Range from 0 to 65535
time END New
Initial scan time • Stores the scan time of an initial execution type program.
SD523 (In 100 s (In 100 s units) processing)
Minimum scan • Stores the minimum value of the scan time. S (Every D9018
SD524 Minimum time (In 1 ms (In 1 ms units) END format
scan time units) • Range from 0 to 65535 processing) change
Minimum scan • Stores the minimum value of the scan time. S (Every
SD525 Minimum time (In 100 s units) END New
scan time (In 100 s • Range from 000 to 900
units) processing)
Maximum scan • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of 1st D9019
SD526 time scan. (In 1 ms units) S (Every format
Maximum (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 change
scan time Maximum scan • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of 1st END
SD527 time scan. processing) New
(In 100 s (In 100 s units)
Current scan • Stores the current scan time of a low speed program.
SD528 Current time (In 1 ms units) S (Every
scan time (In 1 ms units)
for low Current scan END New
speed time • Stores the current scan time of a low speed program.
SD529 program (In 100 s (In 100 s units) processing)
Minimum scan • Stores the minimum value of the scan time of a low speed
SD532 Minimum time program. (In 1 ms units) S (Every
scan time (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535
for low Minimum scan END New
speed time • Stores the minimum value of the scan time of a low speed
SD533 program (In 100 s program. (In 100 s units) processing)
Maximum scan • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of 1st
SD534 Maximum time (In 1 ms scan of a low speed program.. (In 1 ms units) S (Every
scan time units) • Range from 0 to 65535
for low END New
speed Maximum scan • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of 1st
SD535 program time (In 100 s scan of a low speed program.. (In 100 s units) processing)
END • Stores the time from the end of a scan program to the start of
SD540 processing time the next scan. (In 1 ms units) S (Every
END (In 1ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535
processing END New
time END • Stores the time from the end of a scan program to the start of
SD541 processing time the next scan. (In 100 s units) processing)
(In 100 s • Range from 000 to 900
units)
Constant scan • Stores the wait time for constant scan setting.
SD542 wait time (In (In 1 ms units) S (Every
Constant 1ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535
scan wait END New
time Constant scan • Stores the wait time for constant scan setting.
SD543 wait time (In (In 100 s units) processing)
100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900
Cumulative • Stores the cumulative execution time of a low speed program.
execution time (In 1 ms units)
SD544 Cumulative for low speed • Range from 0 to 65535
programs (In S (Every
execution 1ms units) • Cleared to 0 after the end of one low speed scan.
time for low END New
speed Cumulative • Stores the cumulative execution time of a low speed program.
programs execution time processing)
SD545 for low speed (In 100 s units)
programs (In • Range from 000 to 900
100 s units) • Cleared to 0 after the end of one low speed scan.
• Stores the execution time of a low speed program during one
Execution time scan.
SD546 for low speed (In 1 ms units)
programs
Execution (In 1ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 S (Every
time for low • Stored every scan.
speed END New
• Stores the execution time of a low speed program during one
programs Execution time processing)
scan.
SD547 for low speed (In 100 s units)
programs (In
100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900
• Stored every scan.
App - 76
Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
• Stores the execution time of a scan program during one
Scan program scan.
SD548 execution time (In 1 ms units)
Scan (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535
S(Every
program • Stored every scan.
END New
execution • Stores the execution time of a scan program during one
Scan program scan. processing)
time
SD549 execution time (In 100 s units)
(In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900
• Stored every scan.
Service
interval
SD550 Unit/module No. • Sets I/O number for module that measures service interval U New
measureme
nt module
Module service • When SM551 is ON, stores service interval for module
Rem
SD551 interval (In 1 ms designated by SD550. (In 1 ms units)
Service • Range from 0 to 65535
units)
interval S (Request) New
Module service • When SM551 is ON, stores service interval for module
time
SD552 interval (In 100 designated by SD550. (in 100 s units)
s units) • Range from 000 to 900
App - 77
(5) Memory card
Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
• Indicates memory card A model installed
B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
0<----------->0
S (Initial
Drive 1 0: Does not exist
(RAM) type and card New QCPU
1: SRAM
removal)
0: Does not exist
Drive 2 (1: SRAM)
(ROM) type 2: ATA FRASH
Memory
Memory card A 3: FLASH ROM
SD600 card A
models • Indicates memory card A model installed
models
B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
0<----------->0
S (Initial
Drive 1 0: Does not exist
(RAM) type and card New QnA
1: SRAM
removal)
0: Does not exist
Drive 2
(ROM) type 2: EEPROM
3: FLASH ROM
S (Initial
Drive 1 and card New QCPU
(Standard removal)
SD602 Drive 1 capacity • Drive 1 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units.
RAM) S (Initial
capacity and card New QnA
removal)
S (Initial
Drive 2 and card New QCPU
(Standard removal)
SD603 ROM) Drive 2 capacity • Drive 2 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units.
S (Initial
capacity and card New QnA
removal)
• The use conditions for memory card (A) are stored as bit
patterns.
(In use when ON)
• The significance of there bit patterns is indicated below:
B0: Boot operation (QBT) B8:
B1: Parameters (QPA) B9: CPU fault history S (Status
B2: Device comments (QFD) change) New QCPU
(QCD) BA: SFC trace (QTS)
B3: Device initial value (QDI) BB: Local device (QDL)
B4: File register R (QDR) BC:
B5: Trace (QTS) BD:
B6: BE:
B7: BF:
Memory
Memory card A
SD604 card A use • The use conditions for memory card (A) are stored as bit
use conditions
conditions patterns.
(In use when ON)
B8: Simulation data
B0: Boot operation (QBT) (QDS)
B1: Parameters (QPA)
B9: CPU fault history S (Status
B2: Device comments (QFD) New QnA
(QCD) B10: SFC trace (QTS) change)
B3: Device initial value (QDI)
B11: Local device (QDL)
B4: File R (QDR) B12:
B5: Sampling trace (QTS) B13:
B6: Status latch (QTL)
B14:
B7: Program trace (QTP) B15:
• Indicates memory card B model installed

B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
0<----------->0
Memory Drive 3 0: Does not exist

Memory card B (RAM) type 1: SRAM
SD620 card B S (Initial) New QCPU
models
models 0: Does not exist
Drive 4 (1: SRAM)
(ROM) type 2: E2PROM
3: FLASH ROM
Drive 4 is fixed for "3" since it incorporates a flash ROM.
App - 78
Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
• Indicates memory card B model installed
B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
0<----------->0
Q2A(S1)
Memory
Memory card B Drive 1 0: Does not exist Q3A
SD620 card B S (Initial) New
models (RAM) type 1: SRAM Q4A
models
0: Does not exist Q4AR
Drive 2
2: EEPROM
(ROM) type
3: FLASH ROM
• Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units.

(Fixed for "64" since Drive 3 incorporates 64 K bytes RAM.) S (Initial) New QCPU
Drive 3
(Standard Q2A(S1)
SD622 Drive 3 capacity
RAM) Q3A
• Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units. S (Initial) New
capacity Q4A
Q4AR
• Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units. S (Initial) New QCPU
Drive 4
Q2A(S1)
(Standard
SD623 Drive 4 capacity Q3A
ROM) • Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units. S (Initial) New
Q4A
capacity
Q4AR
• The use conditions for drive 3/4 are stored as bit patterns.
(In use when ON)
B8:
B0: Boot operation (QBT) B9: CPU fault history
Drive 3/4 B1: Parameters (QPA) (QFD)
Drive 3/4 use B2: Device comments (QCD) B10: SFC trace (QTS) S (Status
use New QCPU
conditions B3: Device initial value (QDI) B11: Local device change)
conditions B4: File R (QDR) (QDL)
B5: Trace (QTS) B12:
B6: B13:
B7: B14:
B15:
SD624 • The use conditions for memory card B are stored as bit
patterns.
(ON when in use)
B8: Simulation data
B0: Boot operation (QBT) Q2A(S1)
(QDS)
Memory B1: Parameters (QPA) B9: CPU fault history
Memory card B B2: Device comments S (Status Q3A
card B use (QFD) New
use conditions (QCD) change) Q4A
conditions B10: SFC trace (QTS)
B3: Device initial value (QDI) B11: Local device (QDL)
B4: File R (QDR) Q4AR
B12:
B5: Sampling trace (QTS)
B13:
B6: Status latch (QTL) B14:
B7: Program trace (QTP) B15:
File register S (Status

SD640 Drive number • Stores drive number being used by file register. New
drive change)
SD641
• Stores file register file name (with extension) selected at
SD642 parameters or by use of QDRSET Instruction as ASCII code.
B15 to B8 B7 to B0
SD643 File register File register file SD641 2nd character 1st character S (Status
SD642 4th character 3rd character New
file name name change)
SD644 SD643 6th character 5th character
SD644 8th character 7th character
SD645 SD645 1st character of extension 2E H(. )
SD646 3rd character of extension 2nd character of extension
SD646
File register File register • Stores the data capacity of the currently selected file register S (Status
SD647 in 1 k word units. New
capacity capacity change)
File register
File register S (Status
SD648 block • Stores the currently selected file register block number. D9035
block number change)
number
Comment Comment drive • Stores the comment drive number selected at the S (Status
SD650 parameters or by the QCDSET Instruction in ASCII code. New
drive number change)
App - 79
Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
SD651 • Stores file register file name (with extension) selected at the
parameters or by use of QDRSET Instruction as ASCII
SD652 code.
B15 to B8 B7 to B0
SD653 Comment Comment file SD651 2nd character 1st character S (Status
SD652 4th character 3rd character New
SD654 file name name change)
SD655 1st character of extension 2E H(. )
SD656 SD656 3rd character of extension 2nd character of extension
Boot designation • Stores the drive number where the boot designation file
SD660 (*.QBT) is being stored. S (Initial) New
file drive number
SD661 • Stores the file name of the boot designation file (*.QBT).
Boot
SD662 B15 to B8 B7 to B0
operation SD661 2nd character 1st character
File name of
SD663 designation SD662 4th character 3rd character
boot designation S (Initial) New
SD664 file SD663 6th character 5th character
file SD664 8th character 7th character
SD665 SD665 1st character of extension 2E H(. )
SD666 3rd character of extension 2nd character of extension
SD666
(6) Instruction-related special registers-

Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
SD705 • During block operations, turning SM705 ON makes it

Mask possible to use the mask pattern being stored at SD705 (or
Mask pattern U New
pattern at SD705 and SD706 if double words are being used) to
SD706 operate on all data in the block with the masked values.
Number of
vacant
communicati • Stores the number of vacant blocks in the communications S (During
SD714 0 to 32 request area for remote terminal modules connected to the D9081 QnA
on request AJ71PT32-S3. execution)
registration
areas
• Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored
SD715 in the following manner:
IMASK B15 B11 B0
SD716 instruction SD715 l15 to l1 l0
S (During
Mask pattern New
mask execution)
SD716 l31 to l17 l16
pattern
SD717
SD717 l47 to l33 l32
SD718
• For use as replacement for accumulators used in A-series
Accumulator Accumulator programs. S/U New
SD719
Program
Program No.
No. Stores the program number of the program to be loaded by
designation for
SD720 designation the PLOAD instruction when designated. U New QCPU
PLOAD
for PLOAD Range: 1 to 124
instruction
instruction
Number of
vacant
CC-Link • Stores the number of vacant registration area for the request S (During
SD730 communicati 0 to 32 for communication with the intelligent device station New QnA
connected to A(1S)J61QBT11. execution)
on request
registration
areas
• Special register that temporarily stores keyboard data input S (During
SD736 PKEY Input PKEY Input by means of the PKEY instruction. New
execution)
App - 80
Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
SD738 • Stores the message designated by the MSG instruction.
SD739 B15 to B8 B7 to B0
SD740 SD738 2nd character 1st character
SD741 SD739 4th character 3rd character

SD745
SD746
SD747
SD748
SD753 Message Message SD752 30th character 29th character S (During
New
SD754 storage storage SD753 32th character 31th character execution)

SD757
SD758
SD759
SD760

SD768
SD769
Designate the limit for each PID loop as follows:
SD774 B15 B1 B0
PID Limit 0: Limit set
to SD774 Loop 16 to Loop 2 Loop 1 U New QCPU
setting 1: Limit not set
SD775
SD775 Loop 32 to Loop 18 Loop 17
Remaining
No. of
simultaneou
• Stores the remaining number of simultaneous execution of
SD780 s execution 0 to 32 U New QnA
the CC-Link dedicated instructions.
of CC-Link
dedicated
instruction
• Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction
as follows:
B15 B11 B0
IMASK SD781 l63 to l59 l48
SD781
instruction S (During
to Mask pattern SD782 l79 to l65 l64 New QCPU
mask execution)
SD793
pattern
to
SD793 l255 to l241 l240
App - 81
(7) A to Q/QnA conversion
ACPU special registers D9000 to D9255 correspond to Q/QnA special registers
SD1000 to SD1255 after A to Q/QnA conversion.
These special registers are all set by the system, and cannot be turned ON or
OFF by the user program.
To set data by the user program, correct the program for use of the Q/QnACPU
special registers.
However, some of SD1200 to SD1255 (corresponding to D9200 to 9255 before
conversion) can be set by the user program if they could be set by the user
program before conversion.
For details on the ACPU special registers, refer to the user's manual for the
corresponding CPU, and MELSECNET or MELSECNET/B Data Link System
Reference Manuals.
REMARK
Supplemental explanation on "Special Register for Modification" column

1) For the device numbers for which a special register for modification is specified,
modify it to the special register for Q/QnACPU.
2) For the device numbers for which is specified, special register after
conversion can be used.
3) Device numbers for which is specified do not function for Q/QnACPU.

Corresponding
Special Register after Register for Name Meaning Explanation
CPU
Register Conversion Modification
When fuse blown modules are detected, the first I/O number of the
lowest number of the detected modules is stored in hexadecimal.
Number of (Example: When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown,
Fuse module "50" is stored in hexadecimal) To monitor the number by peripheral
D9000 SD1000
blown with blown devices, perform monitor operation given in hexadecimal.
fuse (Cleared when all contents of SD1100 to SD1107 are reset to 0.)
• Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of
remote I/O stations.
• Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch
numbers or base slot numbers when fuse blow occurred.
A0J2 I/O module Extension base unit
Slot No.
Setting Stored Stored
of base
switch data data
unit
Number of 0 1 0 5
Fuse module 1 2 1 6
D9001 SD1001
blown with blown 2 3 2 7
fuse 3 4 3 8
4 5
5 6
6 7
7 8
• For the remote I/O station, the value of (module I/O No./10H) + 1
is stored.
App - 82
Corresponding
CPU
If I/O modules, of which data are different from data entered, are
detected when the power is turned on, the first I/O number of the
I/O module lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in
I/O
verification hexadecimal. (Storing method is the same as that of SD1000.) To
module
D9002 SD1002 error monitor the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor
verificatio
module operation given in hexadecimal.
n error (Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0.)
number
• I/O module verify check is executed also to the modules of
remote I/O stations.
• Error status of the MINI(S3) link detected on loaded
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master module is stored.
B15 B8 B7 B0
8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
module module module module module module module module module module module module module module module module
Error
NIMI link
D9004 SD1004 detection QnA
error
status On the PLC CPU and A(1S)J71PT32(S3) The corresponding bit turns on when
sides, the bit corresponding to A(1S)J71PT32(S3)'s following signals turn on.
A(1S)J71PT32(S3)
with communication error turns on.
· Hardware error (X0/X20)
· MINI (S3) link error detected
(X6/X26)
· MINI (S3) link communication
error (X7/X27)
• When the AC power supply module is used, 1 is added at

occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within
20ms.(The value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when power is
switched from OFF to ON.
AC Number of • When the DC power supply module is used, 1 is added at
occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms.
D9005 SD1005 DOWN time for AC QCPU
(The value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when power is
counter DOWN
switched from OFF to ON.
• When the DC power supply module is used, 1 is added at
occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms. (The
QnA
value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when power is switched
from OFF to ON.
Self-diag Self-diag
• When error is found as a result of self-diagnosis, error number is
D9008 SD1008 SD0 nostic -nosis error
stored in BIN code.
error number
• When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or
SET F , the F number, which has been detected earliest
among the F numbers which have turned on, is stored in BIN
code.
• SD62 can be cleared by RST F or LEDR instruction. If
F number another F number has been detected, clearing of SD62 causes
Annuncia at which the next number to be stored in SD62.
D9009 SD1009 SD62 tor external • When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or
detection failure has SET F , the F number, which has been detected earliest
occurred among the F numbers which have turned on, is stored in BIN
code.
• SD62 can be cleared by executing RST F or LEDR
instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on CPU
module front to ON position. If another F number has been
detected, clearing of SD62 causes the next number to be stored
in SD62.
Step
number at • When operation error has occurred during execution of
Error which application instruction, the step number, at which the error has
D9010 SD1010
step operation occurred, is stored in BIN code. Thereafter, each time operation
error has error occurs, the contents of SD1010 are renewed.
occurred.
Step • When operation error has occurred during execution of
number at application instruction, the step number, at which the error has
Error which occurred, is stored in BIN code. Since the step number is stored
D9011 SD1011
step operation into SD1011 when SM1011 turns from OFF to ON, the data of
error has SD1011 is not updated unless SM1011 is cleared by a user
occurred. program.
• The I/O control mode set is returned in any of the following
I/O I/O control numbers:
D9014 SD1014 control mode 0: Both input and output in direct mode
mode number 1: Input in refresh mode, output in direct mode
3: Both input and output in refresh mode
App - 83
Corresponding
CPU
• The operation status of CPU as shown below are stored
in SD203.
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
Remote RUN/STOP Key switch of CPU

by computer
0 RUN
0 RUN
1 STOP
Operatin 1 STOP
Operating state 2 PAUSE *1
D9015 SD1015 SD203 g state
of CPU 2 PAUSE * 1
of CPU 3 STEP RUN

Cannot be changed by
remote RUN/STOP
Status in program Remote RUN/STOP

by parameter
0 Other than following
STOP 0 RUN
1 instruction execution 1 STOP
2 PAUSE *1
*1: When the CPU module is in RUN mode and SM1040
is off, the CPU module remains in RUN mode if
changed to PAUSE mode.
0: Main program
(ROM)
1: Main program
(RAM)
2: Subprogram 1
(RAM)
3: Subprogram 2
(RAM)
4: Subprogram 3
(RAM)
5: Subprogram 1
Program (ROM) • Indicates which sequence program is run presently. One
D9016 SD1016
number 6: Subprogram 2 value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code.
(ROM)
7: Subprogram 3
(ROM)
8: Main program
(E2PROM)
9: Subprogram 1
(E2PROM)
A: Subprogram 2
(E2PROM)
B:Subprogram 3
(E2PROM)
• If scan time is smaller than the content of SD520, the
Minimum scan
Scan value is newly stored at each END. Namely, the
D9017 SD1017 SD520 time
time minimum value of scan time is stored into SD520 in BIN
(In 10 ms units)
code.
Scan Scan time • At every END, the scan time is stored in BIN code and
D9018 SD1018 SD524
time (In 10 ms units) always rewritten.
• If scan time is larger than the content of SD526, the
Maximum scan
Scan value is newly stored at each END. Namely, the
D9019 SD1019 SD526 time
time maximum value of scan time is stored into SD526 in BIN
(In 10 ms units)
code.
• Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in
Constant scan multiples of 10 ms.
Constant
D9020 SD1020 time (User sets in 0 : No setting
scan
10 ms units) 1 to 200 : Set. Program is executed at intervals of (set
value) 10 ms.
Scan Scan time • At every END, the scan time is stored in BIN code and
D9021 SD1021
time (In 1 ms units) always rewritten.
App - 84
Corresponding
CPU
• When the PLC CPU starts running, it starts counting 1
1 every second.
Count in units of
D9022 SD1022 SD412 second • It starts counting up from 0 to 32767, then down to
1s.
counter -32768 and then again up to 0. Counting repeats this
routine.
• Stores the year (2 lower digits) and month in BCD.
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0 (e.g.) July. 1987
Time Time data H8707
D9025 SD1025
data (year, month)
Year Month
• Stores the day and hour in BCD.
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0 (e.g.) 31st, 10 o'clock
D9026 SD1026
data (day, hour)
Day Hour
• Stores the minute and second in BCD.
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0 (e.g.) 35, 48
D9027 SD1027
data (minute, second)
Min. Sec.
• Stores the day of the week in BCD.
(e.g.) Friday
B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0
H0005
Day of week
Time Time data
D9028 SD1028 "0" must be set 0 Sun
data (, day of week) 1 Mon
2 Tues
3 Wed
4 Thur
5 Fri
6 Sat
Extensio
• Stores the block No. of the extension file register being
D9035 SD1035 SD648 n file Use block No.
used in BCD code.
register
• Designate the device number for the extension file
register for direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036
and SD1037 in BIN data.
D9036 SD1036 Extensio
Device number Use consecutive numbers beginning with R0 of block
n file
when individual No. 1 to designate device numbers.
register Extension file register
devices from
for 0
extension file to
designati Block No.1 area
register are 16383
on of
directly 16384
device Block No.2 areaa
D9037 SD1037 accessed SD1036,SD1037
to
number
Device No. (BIN)
to
• Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate (or flicker)

to indicate errors with error code numbers.
D9038 SD1038 SD207 Priorities 1 to 4 • Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown
LED below.
display B15 to B12 B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 to B0
priority SD207 4th priority 3rd priority 2nd priority 1st priority
ranking SD208 7th priority 6th priority 5th priority

D9039 SD1039 SD208 Priorities 5 to 7 • For details, refer to the applicable CPUs User's Manual
and the ACPU Programming manual (Fundamentals)
SH-3435 (version I or later).
App - 85
ACPU Special
Special Register Corresponding
Special Register after Name Meaning Explanation
for Modification CPU
Register Conversion
Turned on/off with a peripheral device. When
STRA or STRAR is executed, the value
For Step or time stored in SD1044 is used as the sampling trace
D9044 SD1044 sampling during condition.
trance sampling trace At scanning 0
At time Time (In 10 ms units)
The value is stored into SD1044 in BIN code.
• Stores the block number of the expansion file register
which is used as the work area for the execution of a
Block number
Work area SFC program in a binary value.
D9049 SD1049 of extension file
for SFC • Stores "0" if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller,
register
which cannot be expansion file register No. 1, is used
or if SM320 is OFF.
• Stores error code of errors occurred in the SFC
program in BIN code.
SFC 0 : No error
Error code 80 : SFC program parameter error
program
D9050 SD1050 generated by 81 : SFC code error
error 82 : Number of steps of simultaneous execution
SFC program
number exceeded
83 : Block start error
84 : SFC program operation error
Block number • Stores the block number in which an error occurred
in the SFC program in BIN code.
D9051 SD1051 Error block where error
In the case of error 83 the starting block number is
occurred stored.
• Stores the step number, where error code 84
Step number occurred in an SFC program, in BIN code.
D9052 SD1052 Error step where error Stores "0" when error code 80, 81 or 82 occurred.
occurred Stores the block stating step number when error
code 83 occurs.
Transition
• Stores the transition condition number, where error
Error condition
D9053 SD1053 code 84 occurred in an SFC program, in BIN code.
transition number where
Stores "0" when error code 80, 81, 82 or 82
error occurred
occurred.
Error Sequence step • Stores the sequence step number of transfer
D9054 SD1054 sequence number where condition and operation output in which error 84
step error occurred occurred in the SFC program in BIN code.
• Stores the step number when status latch is
executed.
• Stores the step number in a binary value if status
latch is executed in a main sequence program.
Status Status latch • Stores the block number and the step number if
D9055 SD1055 SD812 status latch is executed in a SFC program.
latch step
Block No. Step No.
(BIN) (BIN)
Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits
• Stores the software version of internal system in

ASCII code.
Stored in low byte
Software High byte Low byte
Inconsistent value in high byte
Software
D9060 SD1060 SD392 version of QnA
version "41H" is stored when using version "A"
internal system
Note: The software version of the initial system may
differ from the version indicated by the version
information printed on the rear of the case.
PLC Serial • In the self-loopback test of the serial communication
communic communication module, the serial communication module
D9072 SD1072
ation module data writes/reads data automatically to make
check check communication checks.
Number of
empty • Stores the number of empty blocks in the
blocks in communication request registration area to the
communic
D9081 SD1081 SD714 0 to 32 remote terminal module connected to the QnA
ations
request MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master unit, A2CCPU or
registration A52GCPU.
area
App - 86
ACPU Special
Register Conversion
• Sets the time check time of the data link instructions
Register
(ZNRD, ZNWR) for the MELSECNET/10.
for setting • Setting range : 1 s to 65535 s (1 to 65535)
D9085 SD1085 1S to 65535S
time check • Setting unit :S
value • Default value : 10 s (If 0 has been set, default
10 s is applied)
Head
device No.
in data See each micro
area of • For details, refer to the manual of each
D9090 SD1090 computer
microcomp microcomputer package.
uter sub package
routine
INPUT
Instruction Detailed error
D9091 SD1091 • Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error.
error code
Head I/O Head I/O • Stores the first two digits of the head I/O number of
number of number of I/O the I/O module, which will be dismounted/mounted
D9094 SD1094 SD251 I/O module
to be module to be online (with power on), in BIN value. Example) Input
replaced replaced module X2F0 H2F
D9100 SD1100 • Output module numbers (in units of 16 points), of
which fuses have blown, are entered in bit pattern
D9101 SD1101 (Preset output module numbers when parameter
setting has been performed.).
D9102 SD1102
Bit pattern in 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1
D9103 SD1103 units of 16 SD1100 0 0 0 (YCO)
0 0 0
(Y80)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Fuse points, SD1101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D9104 SD1104
blown indicating the
1 1
D9105 SD1105 module modules whose SD1107 0 0 0 0 Y7
B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y7
30
0 0 0
fuses have
D9106 SD1106 Indicates fuse flown status
blown
• Fuse blow check is executed also to the output
modules of remote I/O stations.
D9107 SD1107 (If normal status is restored, clear is not performed.
Therefore, it is required to perform clear by user
program.)
• Set the set value of the step transition watchdog timer
D9108 SD1108
and the annunciator number (F number) that will turn
on when the watchdog timer times out.
D9109 SD1109
B15 to B8 B7 to B0
D9110 SD1110 Step
Time setting
transfer
D9111 SD1111 value and the F Set time limit of timer 0 to 255
monitoring
number at time (1 to 255 sec.: (In 1 sec units))
timer
D9112 SD1112 out
setting
Set F number
D9113 SD1113 (By turning on any of MS1108 to SM1114, the
monitoring timer starts. If the transfer condition
following a step which corresponds to the timer is not
D9114 SD1114 established within set time, set annunciator (F) is
tuned on.)
D9116 SD1116 • When I/O modules, of which data are different from
those entered at power-on, have been detected, the
I/O module numbers (in units of 16 points) are
D9117 SD1117
entered in bit pattern.
(Preset I/O module numbers set in parameters when
D9118 SD1118 Bit pattern, in parameter setting has been performed.).
units of 16 B15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1
D9119 SD1119 I/O module points, SD1116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY
0
verification indicating the 1
SD1117 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9120 SD1120 error modules with 100
1
verification SD1123 0 0 0 0 XY
100
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9121 SD1121 errors.

Indicates I/O module verification error
• I/O module verify check is executed also to the
D9122 SD1122 modules of remote I/O stations. (If normal status is
restored, clear is not performed. Therefore, it is
D9123 SD1123 required to perform clear by user program.)
App - 87
ACPU Special
Register Conversion
• When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by SET F ,
1 is added to the contents of SD63. When
Annunciat RST F or LEDR instruction is executed, 1
Annunciator is subtracted from the contents of SD63. (If the
or
D9124 SD1124 SD63 detection INDICATOR RESET switch is provided to the CPU
detection
quantity module, pressing the switch can execute the same
quantity
processing.)
Quantity, which has been turned on by SET F is
stored up to 8.
• When any of F0 to 2047 is turned on by SET F ,
D9125 SD1125 SD64 the annunciator numbers (F numbers) that are turned
on in order are registered into D9125 to D9132.
The F number turned off by RST F is erased
from any of D9125 to D9132, and the F numbers
D9126 SD1126 SD65 stored after the erased F number are shifted to the
preceding registers. By executing LEDR
instruction, the contents of SD64 to SD71 are shifted
Annunciator upward by one. (If the INDICATOR RESET switch is
D9127 SD1127 SD66 detection provided to the CPU module, pressing the switch can
numbers execute the same processing.) When there are 8
annunciator detections, the 9th one is not stored into
D9128 SD1128 SD67 SD64 to SD71 even if detected.
SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET
Annunciat F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR
or
D9129 SD1129 SD68
detection SD62 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
number SD63 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8
D9130 SD1130 SD69 SD64 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
SD65 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15
SD66 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70
D9131 SD1131 SD70
SD67 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65
SD68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38
SD69 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 38 110
D9132 SD1132 SD71 SD70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151
SD71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210
App - 88
(8) Fuse blown module
Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
SD1300 • The numbers of output modules whose fuses have D9100
blown are input as a bit pattern (in units of 16 points).
SD1301 D9101
(If the module numbers are set by parameter, the
SD1302 parameter-set numbers are stored.) D9102
SD1303 Bit pattern in units of • Also detects blown fuse state at remote station output D9103
SD1304 16 points, indicating modules D9104
SD1305 B15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D9105
the modules whose
Fuse blown 1 1
SD1306 fuses have blown SD1300 0 0 0 (YC0) 0 0 0 (Y80) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S (Error) D9106 Rem
module 1 1
SD1307 0: No blown fuse SD1301 (Y1F0) 0 0 0 0 (Y1A) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9107
SD1308 1: Fuse blown 1 1 New
(Y1F (Y1F
present SD1331 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD1309 B0) 30)
New to
to Indicates fuse flown status
New
SD1330 • Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a
new one.
SD1331 This flag is cleared by error resetting operation. New
• The module number (in units of 16 points) whose
Bit pattern in units of external power supply has been disconnected is input
16 points, indicating as a bit pattern.
the modules whose (If the module numbers are set by parameter, the
External parameter-set numbers are used.)
external power
power B15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
supply has been
SD1350 supply SD1350 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
disconnected QCPU
to disconnecte S (Error) New
0: External power SD1351 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 remote
SD1381 d module
supply
(For future
disconnected
extension)
1: External power
supply not SD1381 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
disconnected Indicates fuse flown status
(9) I/O module verification

Corresponding
(When set) CPU
D9
SD1400 • When the I/O modules whose I/O module information D9116
differs from that registered at power on are detected,
SD1401 D9117
the numbers of those I/O modules (in units of 16
SD1402 points) are entered in bit pattern. D9118
SD1403 (If the I/O numbers are set by parameter, the D9119
Bit pattern, in units parameter-set numbers are stored.)
SD1404 D9120
of 16 points, • Also detects I/O module information of remote station
SD1405 D9121
indicating the
SD1406 I/O module B15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D9122
modules with 1
SD1407 verification D9116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ( X0Y) S (Error) D9123 Rem
verification
0: No I/O verification
errors.
SD1408 error 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
errors D9117 ( )
XY
190
SD1409 1: I/O verification

D9123 0
1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New to
to error present (XY
1FE0 )
New
SD1430 Indicates I/O module verification error
• Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a

SD1431 New
new one.
This flag is cleared by error resetting operation.
App - 89
Appendix 5 Application Program Examples
Appendix 5.1 Flip-flop ladder
(1) Y70 turns ON when X00 is turned ON, and turns OFF when X01 is turned ON.
X0
0 SET Y70
X1
2 RST Y70
CIRCUIT END
(2) When X02 is turned ON, Y71 turns OFF if Y70 is ON, and turns on if Y70 is OFF.
This flip-flop operation is repeated.
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QA-16
Program name MAIN
X2 T1 K5
0 T0
T0 K5
6 T1
Y70
T0
12 Y71
CIRCUIT END
X2
T0 contact
T1 contact
Y70
Y71
App - 90
(3) The flip-flop operation starts when X2 is turn-ed on. In this operation, Y70 turns on
if the timer T0 is on, and Y71 turns on if the timer T1 is on. (Cycle: 10 s)
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QA-17
Program name MAIN
X2 T1 K50
0 T0
T1
T0
7 PLS M0
Y70
M0
11 RST T1
T0 K50
16 T1
T1
T1
22 Y71
PLS M1
M1
26 RST T0
CIRCUIT END
X2
T0 contact
T1 contact
Y70
Y71
App - 91
Appendix 5.2 One shot ladder
(1) Output starts and continues for a certain time after input X1 is turned on.
(Time for the input being on must be longer than the set time limit.)
X1 K70
0 T15
T15
Y75
CIRCUIT END
X1
T15
normally
close
Y75
Set time limit
7s
(2) When the input X0 is turned on momentarily, Y76 turns on for a certain time.
X0 T16 K100
0 T16
Y76
Y76
CIRCUIT END
(3) Output starts and continues for a certain time when the input X0 is switched from
on to off.
X0
0 PLF M1
M1 T16 K100
3 T16
Y76
Y76
CIRCUIT END
X0
Y76
Set time limit
Pulse width
10 s
App - 92
Appendix 5.3 Long time timer
(1) Necessary time is obtained by connecting timers in serial.

X2 K30000
0 T9 3000.0 s
T9 K20000
5 T10 2000.0 s
T10
11 Y72 Turns on after the
timer goes time limit
CIRCUIT END
X2
T9
normally open
T10
normally open
3000 s 2000 s
Y72
5000 s
(2) Necessary time is obtained by using timers and counters.

Timer time limit X Counter's set value = Long time timer (note that accuracy of
timers are accumulated.)
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QA-18
Program name MAIN
X2 M56 Y73 K9000
0 T14
X2 C7
7 Y73 Turns on after the
Y73 timer goes time limit
T14 K4
12 C7
M56
C7
18 RST C7
CIRCUIT END
1 scan
X2
T14 coil
T14 normally
open (M56)
C7
Y73
900 s x 4 = 3600 s = 1 hour
(Note) Sufficient time is obtained with the counter C7, which counts the number of
time-outs of the timer T14.
With M56, T14 is reset after it goes time-out. With C7, the output Y73 is self-energized
while count up is in progress. With Y73, T14 is reset and following time-limit actions
are stopped.
App - 93
Appendix 5.4 Off delay timer
MELSEC-Q PLCs do not provide off delay timers. Make it as follows.
(1) T6 starts operating at the timing when X5 is turned OFF.

Y70 X5 K8
0 T6
X5 T6
6 Y70
Y70
CIRCUIT END
X5
T6 coil
T6 normally
close
Y70
Set time limit
0.8 s
(2) Turn on X5 momentarily.

After that, the timer T8 starts operating at the timing when X6 is momentarily
turned ON.
X5 T8
0 Y71
Y71
X6 Y71 K41
4 T8
M45
M45
CIRCUIT END
X5
X6
T8 coil,M45
T8 normally
close
Y71
Set time limit
4.1 s
(Note) The above ladder behaves as an off delay ladder by momentarily turning ON
input X5 and X6.
M45 is equivalent to a momentary contact of T8.
App - 94
Appendix 5.5 On delay timer (momentary input)
PLC's timers operate with the on delay system, which allows easy continuous inputs
but requires relays M for momentary inputs.
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QA-19
Program name MAIN
X1 X2 K62 The timer starts
0 T4 after X1 turns ON,
M50 and continue
M50 self-energized.
T4
8 Y70 Turn ON 6.2 s later
T4
10 Y71 Turn OFF 6.2 s later
CIRCUIT END
X1
X2
T4,M50
Y70
Y71
Set time limit
6.2 s
(Note) The above ladder behaves as an on delay ladder by momentarily turning on
input X1 and X2.
App - 95
Appendix 5.6 ON-OFF repeat ladder
In an ON-OFF repeat ladder, Y70 turns ON when X0 is turned ON, and turns OFF
when X0 is turned ON again.
X1
0 FF Y70
CIRCUIT END
Appendix 5.7 Preventing chattering input
The timer is set so that it starts output when the input keeps being on for 0.2 s.
X0 K2
0 T1
T1
5 M1
CIRCUIT END
M1 turns ON when X0 keeps being ON for 0.2 s or longer. Therefore, this is used
instead of X0 when writing a program.
App - 96
Appendix 5.8 Ladders with a common line
The following ladder cannot be operated by PLC programs. To make such ladders
controllable, use master control instructions (MC, MCR) in a program.
Manual Auto
X0 X1 X4 X3 Y71
Y70
Relay ladder X2
X7 Y79 X2
Y71
X6
X7
Y71
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QA-1
Program name MAIN
A sequence program with master controls

X0 X1
0 MC N0 M1
N0 M1
X2
4 M10 Manual circuit
X6 X7
6 M11
9 MCR N0
X1 X0
10 MC N0 M2
N0 M2
X4 X3
14 M20 Auto circuit
X7 Y79
17 M21
20 MCR N0
M10 Y71
21 Y70
M20
M11 X2
25 Y71 Common circuit
M21
Y71
CIRCUIT END
App - 97
Appendix 5.9 Time control program
With the time control program, time value is set in the two digits of a digital switch,
according to which the outputs Y70 to Y72 turn on after the set time limit has elapsed.
Currently elapsed time is displayed on Y40 to Y47.
This operation is repeated.
Digital switch for setting time Display for current time
59 0.1 s units PLC 26 0.1 s units
X20 to X27 Y40 to Y47
Pushbutton for X3
reading time Turns on if the current value
Y70 is less than 2 s
Switch for timer X4 Turns on if the current value

Y71 is just 3 s
Switch for operation X5 Turns on if the current value
Y72 is 4.1 s or more.
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QA-2
Program name MAIN
X3
0 PLS M5
M5 Reading the set time
3 BIN K2X20 D1
2 digits in 0.1 s units
T3 K10
16 T4 Flicker for
X4 T4 D1 repeating the timer
7 <> K0 D1 T3
X5
21 BCD T3 K2Y40 Output time value to exterior
Turns on when a current value
> K20 T3 Y70 of T3 is from 0.1 to 1.9 s
= K30 T3 Y71 Turns on when a current value
of T3 is 3.0 s
< K40 T3 Y72 Turns on when a current value
of T3 is 4.1 s or more.
CIRCUIT END
App - 98
Appendix 5.10 Clock ladder
With a clock ladder, the clock data such as hour, minute and second is output to a
digital display.
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QA-3
Program name MAIN
T0 K5
5 T1
T1 K5 0.5 s flicker
0 T0
T1 K60
10 C11 Count seconds
C11
15 RST C11
K60
C12 Count minutes
C12
24 RST C12
K99
C13 Count hours
C13
33 RST C13
SM400
38 BCD C11 K2Y40
BCD C12 K2Y48
BCD C13 K2Y50

CIRCUIT END
0
Ones 1 Ones
47 seconds digit 2
3
digit 64 hours
K2Y40 K2Y50
4
Tens 5 Tens
digit 6 digit
7
8
Ones 9
18 minutes digit A
B
K2Y48
C
Tens D
digit E
F
LED of output module
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53 Y52 Y51 Y50 Y4F Y4E Y4D Y4C Y4B Y4A Y49 Y48 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Tens digit Ones digit Tens digit Ones digit Tens digit Ones digit
K2Y50 hour, Output K2Y48 minute, Output K2Y40 second, Output
App - 99
Appendix 5.11 Starting - operation of electrical machinery
By turning the start switch on, machinery starts operation. After operation time
has elapsed, the machinery enters an arc interlock state and then operation mode.
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QA-20
Program name MAIN
T5 K5
13 T6 Arc interlock
X0 X1
0 Y70 RUN
Y70 Y72 K20
T5 period timer
Y70 T5 Y72
9 Y71 operation
T6 Y70 Y71
18 Y72 operation
Y72
CIRCUIT END
Start X0
Stop X01
Operation Y70
operation
Y71
operation
Y72
T5 = 2 s
T6 = 0.5 s·····Arc interlock
App - 100
Appendix 5.12 Displaying elapsed time and outputting before time limit
With the following ladder, time elapsed in the timer is displayed on the LED, and output
is performed before the set time limit has been reached. This system can also be
applied to counters.
Elapsed time display

(4 digits of BCD)
Output module
1234
X2 Y6C to 6F
x 100
Y68 to 6B
x 10
Starts when turned on Y64 to 67
x1
Stops when turned off Y60 to 63
x 0.1
X2 K6000 Timer starts when X2

0 T53
is turned ON
BCD T53 K4Y60 Outputs current value of timer
= K500 T53 Y76 Turns on if the current value

Y76 is 50 s or more
> K120 T53 Y77 Turns on if the current value

CIRCUIT END is 12 s or less
X2 K3000
0 T4 Timer starts when X2 is turned on
BCD T4 K4Y60 Outputs current value of timer
> K300 T4 Y70 Turns on if the current value is

30 s or less
< K299 T4 > K320 T4 Y71 Turns on if the current value is
from 30 to 31.9 s
< K319 T4 > K340 T4 Y72 Turns on if the current value is
from 32 to 33.9 s
< K339 T4 Y73 Turns on if the current value is
34 s or more
<= K600 T4 Y74 Turns on if the current value is
60 s or more
<= K800 T4 Y75 Turns on if the current value is
80 s or more
CIRCUIT END
App - 101
Appendix 5.13 Retentive timer
Input X2 switches between on and off continuously. The time of X2 being on is

accumulated and Y72 turns on according to this accumulated value n.
(1) When using a ladder that accumulates value without a retentive timer.
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QA-21
Program name MAIN
X2
0 M0 Timer starts when X2 is turned on
M0
2 PLS M1
K600
T195
M1 Writes D7 to timer when X2 is
9 MOV D7 T195
turned on
M0
12 MOV T195 D7 Save the current value of the
timer to D7
T195
15 MOV K0 D7 Clears D7 when the timer goes
time out
Y72 Y72 turns on when the timer
goes time out
CIRCUIT END
(2) When retentive timers are allocated in the device settings of PLC parameters.
Retentive timer (ST): 224 points (ST0 to ST223)
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QA-8
Program name MAIN
X2 K600
0 T195 Timer starts when X2 is turned on
T195
5 Y72 Cannot be cleared by turning off
X1
7 RST T195 Can be cleared by turning on X1
CIRCUIT END
App - 102
Appendix 5.14 Switching timer set value externally
(1) With an external switch, a value to be set in one timer can be selected from three
patterns; 1 s, 10 s, and 100 s
A timer is activated and reset by a pushbutton switch.
OL
1s
X0 Y70 Indicates the timer is in operation
SC 10 s RL
X1
100 s Y71 Indicates the timer has gone time out
X2
PB Starts the timer
X3 Y72 MC Load
PB Resets the timer
X4
~ to to ~
Input power supply Load power supply
Path name A: SCHO
Project name QA-22
Program name MAIN
X0
0 MOV K10 D0 Set value 1 s
X1
X2
X3
9 SET M0 Starts the timer
X4
11 RST M0 Stops the timer
M0 D0
12 T8
Y70 ON while the timer is

T8 in operation
19 Y71 Turns ON when the timer goes
time out
Y72
CIRCUIT END
App - 103
Appendix 5.15 Setting counters externally
With an external digital switch having 4 digits, counters can be set remotely and their
current values are displayed in 4 digits. In addition to every count-up, the timer outputs
data when it reaches a value of 100 and 50 before the set limit.
Note that a setting error is indicated if the set limit of counters is less than 100.
I/O I/O I/O I/O

UNIT1 UNIT0 UNIT3 UNIT4
Digital switch (BCD x 4 digits)
1 2 3 4
X20-2F X0-1F Y60-6F Y70-74
DC12V
AC100V
PB
Setting signal X0
Y70
PB RL Setting error
Start X5
Y71 ON during
PB RL
Reset or stop X1 RUN
Y72 Turns on at
DC12V R1 100 before
Count pulse Current value display the set value
X3
BCD x 4 digits Y73 Turns on at
R2 50 before
DC24V the set value
Y74 Turns on at
R3 counter stop
Setting value
Maximum setting value 9999
Set error range
Start Y72 turns on at Y73 turns on at Y74 turns on

Turn on X5 100 before 50 before at the set value
Y71 turns on the set value the set value
App - 104
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QA-4
Program name MAIN
X0
0 SET M0 Setting
X1
2 RST M0
M0
4 BIN K4X20 D0 Reading the set value
> K100 D0 Y70 Outputs an error

M0 Y70 if 100 or less
12 MOV D0 D1
- K100 D1 Set value ? 100

(100 before the set value)
MOV D0 D2
- K50 D2 Set value ? 50

X5 C0 (50 before the set value)
24 Y71 ON during RUN
Y71
Y71
28 MC N0 M3
N0 M3
X3 D0
31 C0 Counter that turns on
D1 at stop
C1 Counter that turns on
D2 at 100 before the set value
C2 Counter that turns on
at 50 before the set value
44 MCR N0
X1
45 RST C0 Counter is reset by
turning on X1
RST C1
RST C2
M0
58 BCD C0 K4Y60 Display counted values
C1 to exterior
62 Y72 Turns on at 100 before
C2 the set value
64 Y73 Turns on at 50 before
C0 the set value
66 Y74 Turns on at a the set value
CIRCUIT END
App - 105
Appendix 5.16 Measuring operation time
Setting operation time to a control target is useful for judging when to replace its
components, do lubrication to it, etc. The timer ST and data register D must have
back-up power source so that they can continue operating at power failure. With the
contents of D31 (in one hour units) displayed externally, it can work as an operation
timer.
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QA-23
Program name MAIN
X2 K3600
0 ST250 6 minutes timer
ST250
5 RST T250
+ K1 D30
1 hour timer
= K10 D30 MOV K0 D30
+ K1 D31 Measures in 1 hour units

SM400 (Always ON)
21 BCD D31 K4Y60 Output operation time
to exterior
25 <= K1000 D31 Y70 Indicates when to replace
CIRCUIT END
100 hours is set as the management time.
Appendix 5.17 Measuring cycle time
By measuring operation time of a control target (from its start to end), it is possible to
display cycle time out, control time lag, etc.
The following ladder can indicate cycle time out. To measure time lag, use the <, >,
and = instructions to judge the state of T200, and turn on a counter.
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QA-24
Program name MAIN
X0 X1
0 M56 In a cycle
M56
M56 T200 K32760

4 T200 Measures cycle time
10 < K400 T200 SET Y70 Cycle time run out

K32760
14 < K300 T200 >= K400 T200 C10 Number of cycle times of
X7 3.01 to 4.00 s
24 RST Y70 Clears the time out display
and accumulated counts
RST C10
CIRCUIT END
App - 106
Complement
Appendix 5.18 Application example of (D) CML (P)
Obtain absolute values of negative values – 32768 or smaller (to –2147483648 ...... 32
bit data).
D1 D0
B B B B B B
15 14 ·················· 1 0 15 14
·················· B1 B0
Before
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
DCML D0 D20 DCML execution
(Negative number)
D+ K1 D20 D21 D20

After
DCML execution 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
D21 D20
After D + execution 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
(Absolute value)
(Example)
999 is subtracted from a set value each time X1 is turned on, and the resulting value is
displayed.
When the resulting value goes down below zero, the output Y70 turns on, and the
absolute value of the resulting value is displayed.
Read the set value Turn on X0
Subtraction (- 999) Turn on X1
Negative number NO
obtained?
YES
Y70 setting
DCML execution
+ 1 execution
Results display
X0
0 DBIN K4X20 D0 Input data
X1
4 D-P K999 D0 Subtract 999
D> K0 D0 SET Y70

F3 Turn Y70 on if negative
number obtained
PLS F3
M0
M0 If D0 is a negative number,
18 DCML D0 D20
complement of 2 is taken to
D+ D20 K1 D30 have a positive number
(absolute value)
DBCD D30 K8Y40 Output an absolute value
Y70
31 DBCD D0 K8Y40 Outputs a positive number
CIRCUIT END
App - 107
Appendix 5.19 Program showing divided value of 4-digit BIN value to 4 places of decimals
(1) Example 1
Two digital switches are provided, one of which contains a dividend, and the other of
which contains a divisor. The results of operation using this dividend and divisor are
displayed in its 4 integral parts and 4 decimal parts.
Digital display
Digital switch
Y5F to Y50 Y4F to Y40
QCPU QX QY
42 42P
X3F to X30
X2F to X20
X0
Import dividend and dividor Dividend Digital switch X30 to X3F→D0

Divisor Digital switch X20 to X2F→D1
Division
(D0)÷(D1)= (D2)……(D3)
Display a quotient Quotient Remainder
Clear index register Z0, Z1,

data register D10
FOR
4×(Z1)→(D10) HC-(D10)→(Z0)
Set display address after
the decimal point
1st time 4×0 → 0 HC- K0 →HC
2nd time 4×1 → 4 HC- K4 →H8
Multiply the remainder with 10, 3rd time 4×2 → 8 HC- K8 →H4
divide the result and take 4th time 4×3 → 12 HC- K12 →H0
a quotient of lower 1 digit
(D3)×10→(D3)
Display lower 1 digit (D3)÷(D1)= (D2)……(D3)
Count the number of times (register Z1) Y4C Y48 Y44 Y40
to to to to
INC Z1 4F 4B 47 43
NO
4 obtained?
NEXT
Last-1st 2nd 3rd 4th digit
YES
END
App - 108
The sequence program of example 1.
The FOR-NEXT instruction is issued to divide each decimal place individually and
display 4 decimal places in K4Y40.
Path name A: SCHOOL
Project name QA-5
Program name MAIN
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0 Reads data
BINP K4X20 D1
/P D0 D1 D2 Division
BCDP D2 K4Y50 BCD-outputs a quotient
DMOVP K0 Z0 Clears the index Z0
MOVP K0 D10 Clears D10
PLS M0
22 FOR K4
M0
24 * K4 Z1 D10
- H0C D10 Z0
* D3 K10 D3
Repeats 4 times
/ D3 D1 D2
BCD D2 K1Y40Z0
INC Z1
45 NEXT
CIRCUIT END
The value of Z1 is added one every INC Z1 instruction.
App - 109
(2) Example 2
D0 is divided by D1 to obtain D5 in 4 decimal places.
The dividend D0 is multiplied with 10,000. The result of dividing calculation using
this multiplied value is converted to a BCD value and output to an external digital
display.
K4Y50 K4Y40
D6 Integral number D5 Decimal number

in 4 digits in 4 digits
K4Y60
D7 Remainder of a decimal number
Path name A: SCHOOL

Project name QA-6
Program name MAIN
X0
0 BINP K4X30 D0
BINP K4X20 D1
MOVP K0 D2 Clears D2
*P D0 K10000 D3 10000-fold
D/P D3 D1 D5
DBCDP D5 D5
DBCDP D7 D7
MOVP D6 K4Y50 Integral part
MOVP D5 K4Y40 Decimal fraction
MOVP D7 K4Y60 Decimal number

remainder
CIRCUIT END
App - 110
Appendix 5.20 Carriage line control
The following is an example of sequence control using a carriage to convey works

(materials).
Series of operations performed in one cycle is as follows; A work is set on the carriage,
the carriage moves forward, the carriage stops at forward limit, the pushing arm
pushes the work to the other conveyer side, and the carriage moves back to the
backward limit.
Container for work
LS open complete (X4) LS work present (X1)
LS backward limit (X3)

Push (Y73)
Carriage
Carriage moves
forward (Y71)
Carriage moves back (Y72)

Push back (Y74)
Control panel
LS forward limit (X2)
RUN indicator (Y70) Start button (X0)
MELSEC-Q
Input Output
Start button
X0 Y70 RUN indicator
Switch (LS work present)
X1 Y71 M Carriage moves forward
Switch (LS forward limit)
X2 Y72 M Carriage moves back
Switch (LS backward limit)
X3 Y73 Push
Switch (LS open complete)
X4 Y74 Push back
App - 111
Path name A: SCHO
Project name QA-10
Program name MAIN
X0 M2
0 Y70 RUN indicator
Y70 X1 X3
PLS M1
F3
M1
SET Y71
F3 Carriage moves forward
Y71 X2
RST F3
Y71
SET Y73
F3 Push
Y73 K30
T0
T0
RST Y73
F3
SET Y74
F3 Push back
Y74 X4
RST Y74
F3
SET Y72
F3 Carriage moves back
Y72 X3
RST Y72
F3
M2 Completion flag
CIRCUIT END
Timing chart
Start buttonX0
Switch (LS work present)X1
Switch (LS forward limit)X2
Switch (LS backward limit) X3
Switch (LS open complete) X4
RUN indicator Y70
Carriage moves forward Y71
Carriage moves back Y72
Push Y73
Push back Y74
3sec
App - 112
Appendix 5.21 Starting compressors in order using ring counters
This system provides pressure control using three compressors.

Pressure shortage is detected by the three pressure switches. The less pressure is
provided, the more compressors are activated. To equal the number of usages of each
compressor, compressors are activated according to the set order.
System configuration of compressor control
MELSEC-Q
Compressor A B C
Pressure switch
PX1 PX2 PX3

Control panel
Pressure shortage "Major"

Sufficient
Pressure shortage "Medium"
pressure
Pressure shortage "Minor"
Start button Stop button
MELSEC-Q
Start Input Output
PB0 MC
X0 Y70 Compressor A
A
Stop
PB1
X1
Y71 MC
Pressure switch Compressor B
B
PX1
X2
MC
PX2 Y72 Compressor C
X3 C
PX3
X4 Y73 Sufficient pressure
Y74 Pressure shortage "Major"
Y75 Pressure shortage "Medium"
Y76 Pressure shortage "Minor"
App - 113
Operation explanation
(1) The pressure switches (X2, X3, X4) are initially off. In this state, turning on the
start switch (X0) activates the three compressors all together, and when sufficient
pressure is obtained (X2, X3, and X4 turn on), the three compressors stop. This is
the basic operation of this system.
If all compressors are at stop with sufficient pressure provided and the pressure
shortage "Minor" is detected (X4 turns off), one compressor is activated and
supplies pressure until sufficient pressure is obtained.
The compressor activated as such is decided in order from A to C each time
compressors are reactivated in reaction to pressure shortage.
Note that the stop switch (X1) is available for stopping compressors at any time.
(2) If one compressor could not supply sufficient pressure, the pressure shortage
level goes up to "Medium" (X3 turns off) and the second compressor is activated
to support the first compressor. This second compressor will be compressor C if
compressor A has been in operation, A if B has been in operation, and B if C has
been in operation.
(3) If two compressors could not supply sufficient pressure, pressure shortage level
goes up to "Major" (X2 turns off), and the last compressor is activated.
When only one compressor is in operation and pressure shortage level goes from
"Minor" to "Major" directly, the rest two compressors are activated at once.
(4) When two or three compressors are in operation, they continue operating together
until sufficient pressure is obtained and stop together when obtained (X4 turns
on).
Timing chart
Start - (X0)
PX3 - (X4)
Pressure switch PX2 - (X3)
PX1 - (X2)
A - (Y70)
Compressor B - (Y71)
C - (Y72)
Pressure shortage
Compressor
Major Minor Minor Medium Major Minor Minor Minor Medium
A,B,C B C A,C A,B,C A B C A,C
App - 114
Path name A: SCHO
Project name QA-11
Program name MAIN
X0 X1
0 M0 RUN
M0
X4
4 Y73 Indicates pressure status
X4 X3 X4 Y76 Y75
6 Y74 Pressure shortage "Major"
Y74 Pressure shortage "Minor" is indicated when
the pressure switch X4 turns off.
X3 X2 X4 Y76
13 Y75 Pressure shortage "Medium"
Y75 Pressure shortage "Medium" is indicated when
the pressure switch X3 (Medium) turns off.
X2 X4
19 Y76 Pressure shortage "Minor"
Y76 Pressure shortage "Major" is indicated when
the pressure switch X2 (Minor) turns off.
M0
23 PLS M1
F3 Turns on M9 at startup
Y74
26 PLS M2
F3 Shifts by pressure
M1 shortage "Minor"
29 SET M9
F3
M0
31 RST M9
F3
RST F3
M12 Reset when X1 (stop)
RST F3
M11 turns on
RST F3
M10
M2
36 SFT M13
F3
SFT F3
M12
Shift register
SFT F3
M11
SFT F3
M10
M10
45 RST F3
M13
M0
M13
48 SET M10
F3 Returns shift to M10
X4 M0 M10
50 Y70 Compressor A
Y75 M11
Y76
M11
Y71 Compressor B
Y75 M12
Y76
M12
Y72 Compressor C
Y75 M10
Y76
CIRCUIT END
App - 115
After the basic operation, one compressor is activated in reaction to pressure shortage
detected. To use the three compressors equally, there is ordering control available.
This control is enabled by the 3-stage ring counter (ring-shaped shift registers) M10 to
M12.
A shift signal is generated when pressure shortage is detected (X04 switches from on
to off).
Compressor
A B C
X0 Start SET
M9 M10 M11 M12
X1 Stop RST
X4(PX3)OFF
Shift operation
X4
M10
M11
M12
App - 116
Appendix 5.22 Application example of positioning control
The following is an example of a positioning system with a pulse generator that outputs
pulses per motor, brake, and unit of distance.
In this system, a command value is set with the digital switch, and this set command
value is compared with the current value at start-up to decide in which way, forward or
reverse, the motor rotates. The current value in the register D16 is subtracted by 1
when in forward direction, and incremented by 1 when in reverse direction. Positioning
completes when the command value matches the current value. The current value is
converted to a BCD value so that current position is represented in 4-digit decimal
numbers.
OP
Forward rotation Reverse rotation Motor brake

Pulse generator
OP
MELSEC-Q
X2
Start Forward
rotation Reverse
X0 Y70 rotation
Y71
X1 Y72
Command value setting switch Brake for current value display
5 4 0 0 3 6 2 8
mm mm
X20 to X23 Y4C to Y4F
X1 X1000
X24 to X27 Y48 to Y4B
X10 X100
X28 to X2B Y44 to Y47
X100 X10
X2C to X2F Y40 to Y43
X1000 X1
Path name A: SCHO

Project name QA-26
Program name MAIN
X0 M2
0 M0 RUN
M0
Y72 Releases the brake
BINP K4X20 D15 Reads the command value
< D15 D16 Y70 Forward rotation
> D15 D16 Y71 Reverse rotation

M0 X1 Y70
20 -P K1 D16 - 1 during forward rotation
Y71
+P K1 D16 + 1 during reverse rotation
Checks consistency with
= D15 D16 M2
the command value
X2
38 MOV K0 D16 Clears OPR
SM400 (Always ON)
41 BCD D16 K4Y40 Displays the current value
to exterior
CIRCUIT END
App - 117
Appendix 5.23 Application example using index Z
(1) Counts the number of manufactured products every day in one month cycle, and
stores the resulting number to the corresponding register of the date (D1 to D31).
(2) Inputs the planed number of products to manufacture using the external digital
switch. Production stops when this number is accomplished.
(3) Inputs the date using the external digital switch.
(4) Displays to exterior how many products have been manufactured in the current
month as well as the number manufactured on the current day.
K2X20 K2Y58
Date 3 0 3 0 Date
Planed K4X30 Input Output K4Y40 Manufactured

number 0 1 8 0 module module 0 1 8 0 number on the
of products current day
X02 K4Y60
Count value 3 7 8 2 Accumulated number
How many products manufactured on the current day is counted with C5.
Accumulated number of products manufactured is counted with C6.
The date is entered in the index Z to indirectly designate the data register
corresponding to the date using D0Z0.
When Z0 is 30, D0Z0 becomes 0 + Z, designating D30.
D 0 0 D 8 124 D 16 263 D 24 170 D 32 0

D 1 159 D 9 129 D 17 241 D 25 194 D 33 3782 Accumulated
number
D 2 145 D 10 169 D 18 181 D 26 219 D 34 0
Planed number
D 3 168 D 11 119 D 19 179 D 27 0 D 35 180
of products
D 4 144 D 12 247 D 20 0 D 28 0 D 36 30 Date
D 5 130 D 13 0 D 21 0 D 29 213 D 37 0
D 6 0 D 14 0 D 22 163 D 30 180 D 38 0
D 7 0 D 15 124 D 23 129 D 31 0 D 39 0
Manufacturing results of each day ranging from 1 to 31 are stored in D1 to D31,

being available as production data.
App - 118
Path name A: SCHO
Project name QA-7
Program name MAIN
0 = K0 K4X20 MOV K32760 D35 Digital switch

SM410 X2 D35 When X20 to 2F are 0,
5 C5 writes 32760 to D35 and
(0.1s clock)
Tentative count
C5 K32760 counts products manufactured
value is set
C6
X0
16 <> K0 K4X20 BIN K4X20 D35 Inputs a production command
BIN K2X30 D36 Inputs date
<= K32 D36 SET M2

F3
<= K1 D36 >= K31 D36 RST M2

F3 Y70 flashes indicating
an error if date
PLS M3
F3 exceeding 31 is set
M2 SM411
43 Y070
M3
46 <> D36 Z0 RST C5
F3
MOV D36 Z0 Indirectly designates date

SM400 (Always ON) Stores the number of products
57 MOV C5 D0Z0
manufactured to data register
BCD Z0 K2Y58 Displays the manufacture
date to exterior
BCD D0Z0 YK440 Displays the manufactured
number on the current day
BCD C6 K4Y60 Displays the manufactured
number in one month
MOV C6 D33
X6
71 -P C5 C6 Clears the daily
manufactured number
RST C5 anytime on the day,
if necessary
X7
79 RST C5
RST C6 Clears all at the end

of month
FMOV K0 D0 K32
FMOV K0 K4Y40 K3
CIRCUIT END
FMOV K0 D0 K32 Simultaneously transfers data 0 to D0 to D31.
FMOV K0 K4Y40 K3 Simultaneously transfers data 0 to D0 to D31.
App - 119
Appendix 5.24 Application example of FIFO instruction
Manual coating work and its working time can be stored and duplicated by machinery
later.
Conveyor system
MELSEC-Q
Steps
to
Teaching panel X 20 21 22 23 24 25
Coating bath
Position is detected by sensors of X20 to 25

(K2X20)
FIFO table
Pointer D10 6 K2Y72

D30 6
Read using FIFRP
Step 1 11 1 1 31 1
Step 2 12 2 32 2
Coating Data is backed up when X03 is turned on
Step 3 13 8 33 8
bath
pattern Step 4 14 4 34 4
Step 5 15 16 Backed up data is read when X05 is turned on 35 16
Step 6 16 32 36 32
37 0
K2X20 32 Write using FIFWP 38 0
FIFO table 39 0
Pointer D20 6 D1 (timer constant of T1)
40 6
Read using FIFRP
Step 1 21 135 135 41 135
Step 2 22 150 42 150
Washing Step 3 23 120 Data is backed up when X03 is turned on 43 120
time
Step 4 24 100 44 100
Step 5 25 20 Backed up data is read when X05 is turned on 45 20
Step 6 26 135 46 135
Current value of T0 0
D0 135 Write using FIFWP 0
App - 120
Path name A: SCHO
Project name QA-9
Program name MAIN
X0
0 Y70 Moves in right direction
M1
X1
3 Y71 Moves in left direction
M2
X2
6 M3 Washes
K32000
T0
MOV T0 D0
X2
14 PLS M10
F3
M10
17 < D10 K6 FIFWP K2X20 D10 Stores the pattern of coating
bath's position
FIFWP D0 D20 Stores washing time
X3
27 BMOVD10 D30 K20 Backs up stored data
X5
32 BMOVD30 D10 K20 Reads backed up data
X6 Reads the position pattern
37 <= K1 D10 FIFRP K2Y72 D10
of the washing bath
M6
FIFRP D1 D20 Reads washing time
48 < K2X20 K2Y72 M1 Moves in right direction
52 > K2X20 K2Y72 M2 Moves in left direction

M1 M2
56 PLS M4 Starts washing if the patters
M4 match
60 SET M5
M5 D1
62 T1 Washes
T1
67 RST M5
PLS M6 Reads the next washing bath

when current washing completes
SM400
71 BCD D10 K1Y60 Outputs the pointer
MOV T1 D3
CIRCUIT END
App - 121
Appendix 5.25 Application example of data shift
Working materials are conveyed along with their code numbers, and the data register
of the processing machinery is analyzed to machine the work material according to its
code number.
X0
Start
X1 RUN
Stop Y70
Input Output
Code number K1X20
Type detection module module
1 to 8
X2
Move of Shift
work material instruction
Machinery Data register Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A D30 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
B D31 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18
C D32 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28
D D33 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38
E D34 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48
F D35 M51 M52 M53 M54 M55 M56 M57 M58
A code number is stored in the data register, and the M corresponding to the stored
number is activated to perform machining.
Machinery A Machinery B Machinery C Machinery D Machinery E Machinery F
D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35
A code number shifts

A code number is
when X2 is turned on.
input by K1X20.
App - 122
Path name A: SCHO
Project name QA-12
Program name MAIN
X0 X1
0 Y70 RUN
Y70
SM400 (Always ON)

4 MOV K1X20 D30 Imports a code number
X2
8 DSFLP D30 K6 Shifts a code number
Y70
12 = K1 D30 M1
= K2 D30 M2
= K3 D30 M3
= K4 D30 M4
Machinery A
= K5 D30 M5
= K6 D30 M6
= K7 D30 M7
= K8 D30 M8
Y70
53 = K1 D31 M11
= K2 D31 M12
= K3 D31 M13
= K4 D31 M14
Machinery B
= K5 D31 M15
= K6 D31 M16
= K7 D31 M17
= K8 D31 M18
Y70
94 = K1 D32 M21
= K2 D32 M22
= K3 D32 M23
= K4 D32 M24
Machinery C
= K5 D32 M25
= K6 D32 M26
= K7 D32 M27
= K8 D32 M28
App - 123
Y70
135 = K1 D33 M31
= K2 D33 M32
= K3 D33 M33
= K4 D33 M34
Machinery D
= K5 D33 M35
= K6 D33 M36
= K7 D33 M37
= K8 D33 M38
Y70
176 = K1 D34 M41
= K2 D34 M42
= K3 D34 M43
= K4 D34 M44
Machinery E
= K5 D34 M45
= K6 D34 M46
= K7 D34 M47
= K8 D34 M48
Y70
217 = K1 D35 M51
= K2 D35 M52
= K3 D35 M53
= K4 D35 M54
Machinery F
= K5 D35 M55
= K6 D35 M56
= K7 D35 M57
= K8 D35 M58
CIRCUIT END
App - 124
Path name A: SCHO
Project name QA-14
Program name MAIN
Appendix 5.26 Example of operation program calculating square root of data
The data stored in D5 is calculated to its square root and the result is stored in D6 and
D7.
X0
0 MOVP K4X20 D5 Sets data
BSQR D5 D6 Calculates the square root
MOVP D7 K4Y50 Square root (integral part)
MOVP D6 K4Y60 Square root (decimal part)

CIRCUIT END
Results of square root operation are stored as follows.
Square root Square root

(integral part) (decimal part)
.... A value in 5th decimal pace is
rounded off.Therefore a value in 4th
D5
=
D6 · D7
decimal place has error of ±1.
0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
(BCD value) (BCD value) (BCD value)
REMARK
QCPUs provide square root operation instructions for data in a real number (floating
point) format.
App - 125
Path name A: SCHO
Project name QA-15
Program name MAIN
Appendix 5.27 Example of operation program calculating n-th power of data
A value stored in D10 is calculated to its n-th power (n is a value stored in D14) and
the result is stored in D10.
X1
0 FMOVP K0 D10 K10 Clears data
BINP K4X30 D10 Sets data
MOVP D10 D15
BINP K2X20 D14

Sets n
-P K1 D14
SCJ P0
X1
18 CJ P0
21 FOR D14
X1
23 D D10 D15 D10 Multiplies the value n times
28 NEXT
P0 X1
29 D/ D10 K10000 D16
DBCD D16 K6Y50 BCD-outputs a value in

10 digits to exterior
DBCD D18 K4Y40
CIRCUIT END
NOTE
An operation error occurs if a value in D10 exceeds 2147483647.
App - 126
Appendix 5.28 Program using digital switch to input data
When always inputting and storing a set value of the digital switch to D10 of the PLC
Digital switch Input module CPU
1 2 3 4
X20 Data
to register
X2F BIN conversion
D10
SM400 (Always ON)

Wrong
configuration BIN K4X20 D10
In the above program, changing a value of the digital switch with the PLC in RUN
mode may cause codes other than 0 to 9 to occur at the timing of the change. This
generates "OPERATION ERROR" of the CPU.
To avoid this, write a program as follows.
(Example 1) When 4 digits of X20 to X2F are used.

SM400
0 <= K0 K1X20 >= K9 K1X20 MOV K1X20 K1M20
<= K0 K1X24 >= K9 K1X24 MOV K1X24 K1M24
<= K0 K1X28 >= K9 K1X28 MOV K1X28 K1M28
<= K0 K1X2C >= K9 K1X2C MOV K1X2C K1M32
BIN K4M20 D10
(Example 2) When 8 digits of X20 to X3F are used.

SM400
0 RST Z0
4 FOR K8
7 <= K0 K1X20Z0 >= K9 K1X20Z0 MOV K1X20Z K1M100Z
+ K4 Z0
31 NEXT
SM400
32 DBIN K8M100 D10
DBCD D10 K8Y40
CIRCUIT END
App - 127
Appendix 5.29 Displaying number of faults with fault numbers using fault detection program
The following program sequentially displays the number of turned-on bit devices (X, M.
F, etc.) among many bit devices being used continuously, together with their device
numbers.
[Application example]
When M or F is used as an output device of a fault detection program, use the
following program to know how many faults were occurred and fault code numbers of
the faults occurred.
[Sequence program flow]

(Operating procedure)
Device F is used in the program example

Fault detection ladder
X2 ON OFF
Display B Display A
1) Search fault (ON) devices Displays the number of

2) Display the number faulty devices on display A (Y50 to Y5F) (Y40 to Y4F)
of faulty devices
Display C
(Y60 to Y6F)
X0 ON OFF
Displays the first fault number Displays the fault number on display C
Condition of program
The total number of

faulty circuits are set
to 50.
X1 ON OFF
Displays the number of
remaining faulty devices.
This number includes the Displays the number of remaining faulty devices on display A
next fault number and Displays the next fault number on display C
currently displayed fault
number.
NO Displays the last YES

End
fault number
App - 128
Path name A: SCHO
Project name QA-31
Program name MAIN
X20
0 F3
X24
4 F5
X28
8 F8
X2C
12 F13
X30
16 F33
X34
20 F35
X38 Faulty circuit
24 F37
X3C
28 F39
X4
32 F1
X5
36 F11
X6
40 F16
X7
44 F40
X2 M200
48 DSUMP K8F1 D0
F3
MOVP D0 D10
Searches ON devices
DSUMP K8F33 D0
+P D0 D10
BCDP D10 K4Y40
SET M400
RST M700
X000 M200M400
73 PLS M500
SET M700
M500
80 SET M200
RST M600
MOV K0 Z0 Designates the head

number of a faulty
DMOV K8F1 D0
circuit (F1 to 0)
M600
95 DMOVP K8F33 D0
App - 129
M100M200
103 DROR D0 K1 Searches ON devices
SM700 shifting 32-bit data
SET M100
to right
INC Z0
BCD Z0 K4Y60
X1 M700
120 PLS M300
M300
125 RST M100
Searches next ON device
< K0 D10 - K1 D10
BCD D10 K4Y40
144 = K32 Z0 SET M600
150 = K50 Z0 RST M200
MOVP K0 K4Y60 Resets when search

PLS M800 is finished
M800
164 RST M400
CIRCUIT END
(1) Searching ON devices
DSUMP K8F1 D0
DSUMP K8F33 D0
32 bits
F F F F F F
3231 4 3 2 1
S before execution (K8F1) 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
b15 b0
A0 after execution 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
The total number of bits with 1 is stored in BIN.

(16 in this example)
When X2 is turned on, the number of turned-on bits among F1 to F64 is stored to
D10 and displayed.
App - 130
F Transferred by a MOVP instruction
F
16 1
D0 D10
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
16 16
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
F F
32 17
F F
48 33
D0
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
7 Added by a + P instruction
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
F F F
64 5049
D10
Number of turned-on inputs among X20 to 5B 23
(2) Searching ON devices shifting 32-bit data to left DROR D0 K1

F F F F F F
DMOV K8F1 D0 32 31 3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0 1
DMOV K8F33 D0
(32 bits)
DMOV instruction
D1,D0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
D1 D0
(16 bits) (16 bits)
DRDR D0 K1
D1 D0
b31 b30 b29 b28b27 b17b16 b15 b14 b13 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Before execution 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
Contents of To b31
B0 before Carry flag
execution (SM700)
After 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
execution To b31
(1) When X0 is turned on, the above shift data (D0, D1) is set. After that, the data
is shifted in right direction by 1 bit at each scan until a turned on bit is
detected.
When a turned-on bit is detected, shifting stops in that scan (SM700 turns
on), and the accumulated number of shifts (equivalent to a device number) is
displayed.
(2) Detecting the next turned-on bit takes place each time X1 is turned on, and
the detected device number is displayed in the same manner. At the same
time, 1 is subtracted from the number of turned-on bits, which was obtained
in advance, to display the remaining number of turned-on bits.
App - 131
APPENDIX 6 Keys of GX Developer
The following table lists keys used in GX Developer with their applications.
(1) Names and applications of keys

Names Application Names Application
JIS Closes windows, stops execution,
compliant Esc opens/closes instruction selection Alt Selects menus
keys windows
Inputs TAB codes, moves a cursor
Tab Back
Space Deletes a character before a cursor
fast
Enables various operation in
Ctrl combination with alphanumerical Enter Inputs a carriage return
keys or function keys
Selects characters at the shift
Shift
position
Shift + Switches alphabet characters

Caps Lock between upper and lower case
Special Goes up in a displayed page such

keys Page
Up as ladders, HELP, etc. Print
Screen Captures a screen shot
(scrolls 1 screen in - direction)
Goes down in a displayed page
Page
Down such as ladders, HELP, etc. Scroll
Lock Disables scroll-up and scroll down
(scrolls 1 screen in + direction)
Switches between overwrite and Num
Makes the ten keys function only for
Insert Lock
insert in ladder screens inputting numbers
Deletes a character after a cursor
Delete
(clears all set contents)
Moves a cursor to the home
Home
position
Moves a cursor, or scrolls a line in
screens such as ladders, lists,
etc.( )
App - 132
(2) Function keys in ladder mode
Combination F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 C V X
None ― Write Monitor Conversion ― ― ―
Ladder/ Monitor Border Border

Alt ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
list switch stop delete write
Monitor Horizontal Vertical

Comment Statement Note
Ctrl ― ― start (all ― ― stripe stripe Copy Paste Cut
display display display
windows) delete delete
Conversion
Monitor (write
Shift ― Read ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
write mode during
RUN)
Conversion
Alt Monitor Device
(all program
+ ― ― stop (all ― name ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
being
Ctrl windows) display
edited)
1) Press function key F2 (write), Shift + F2 (read), or F3

(monitor) to switch between each mode. To convert, press F4
(conversion) key.
2) Edit ladders using Ctrl + C (copy), Ctrl + V (paste), and Ctrl

+ X (cut).
3) Press F4 to convert.
Press Shift + F4 to perform write during RUN.
Press Alt + Ctrl + F4 to perform write during RUN to all
programs currently being edited.
App - 133
Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller Training Manual
Mitsubishi Programmable
Logic Controller
Training Manual

MODEL SCHOOL-Q-BASIC-WIN-E
MODEL 13JW50
CODE
SH(NA)-080617ENG-A(0601)MEE
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.

PLC Training ManualQ Series Basic Course (For GX Developer) E

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PLC Training ManualQ Series Basic Course (For GX Developer) E

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller Training Manual

Q-series basic course(for GX Developer)

Q-series basic course(for GX Developer)

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Turn off the power before installing or removing the module.

When a problem occurs, notify the instructor as soon as possible.

Print Date * Textbook number Revision

© 2006 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

CHAPTER 1 BASICS OF PLC 1- 1 to 1-14

1.1 Program ..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1

CHAPTER 2 OPERATING GX DEVELOPER 2- 1 to 2-40

2.1 Basic Knowledge Required for Operating GX Developer......................................................................... 2- 1

CHAPTER 3 PLC DEVICES AND PARAMETERS 3- 1 to 3- 4

3.1 Devices ...................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1

CHAPTER 4 SEQUENCE & BASIC INSTRUCTIONS -Part 1- 4- 1 to 4-40

4.1 List of Instructions Described in this Chapter ........................................................................................... 4- 1

CHAPTER 5 BASIC INSTRUCTION Part 2 5- 1 to 5-60

5.1 Notation of Numbers (Data) ...................................................................................................................... 5- 1

CHAPTER 6 USING OTHER FUNCTIONS 6- 1 to 6-26

6.1 Clock Function........................................................................................................................................... 6- 1

7.1 Intelligent Function Module ....................................................................................................................... 7- 1

CHAPTER 8 USING THE LOGIC TEST FUNCTION (GX SIMULATOR) 8- 1 to 8-16

8.1 Operating Procedure of Logic Test Function (GX Simulator) .................................................................. 8- 2

9.1 Typical Troubles ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 1

APPENDIX App- 1 to App-133

Appendix 1 I/O Control Mode......................................................................................................................App- 1

The related manuals are shown below.

(1) QCPU User's Manual

In this textbook, the following CPUs are generically named "QCPU (Q

Input circuit Internal sequential operation Output circuit

Figure 1.1 PLC Configuration

The PLC is an assembly of relays and timers/counters as well as an electronic device

• Closes the normally close

Figure 1.2 Program

15) 16) 17)

(1) High Performance model and Basic model

* See "Q series data book (L08029E)" for details.

(2) Q mode CPU and A mode CPU

MELSEC Q25HCPU QX10 QX10 QX10 QX10 QX41 QX41

Power supply module CPU module I/O modules Base unit

Main base unit Extension base unit

With three I/O

With five I/O

With eight I/O

24V DC (Plus common)

High Performance model QCPU is compatible with the memory cards.

• The memory cards are required when the

The memory of QCPU consists of the following block configurations.

Drive numbers of the target memory accessed

Memory card (RAM)

Drive number 0 Drive number 1

Standard RAM Memory card (ROM)

(1) Wiring of I/O devices

Figure 1.4 Wiring of I/O devices

Main base unit (Q33B,Q35B,Q38B,Q312B)

Base unit with three

Base unit with eight slots

Base unit with 12 slots

The I/O numbers of the

slot next to the one with

32-point modules are changed.

(The numbers are assigned